Cat.No. W365–E1–1
SYSMAC CQM1H Series
CQM1H-SCB41
Serial Communications Board
OPERATION MANUAL
SYSMAC
CQM1H Series
CQM1H-SCB41
Serial Communications Board
Operation Manual
Produced September 1999
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
!
!
!
WARNING
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.
1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.
v
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the SYSMAC CQM1H-series CQM1H-SCB41 Se-
rial Communications Board and includes the sections described below.
The Serial Communications Board is classified as an Inner Board.
Read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table carefully and be sure you understand
the information provided before attempting to install and operate a Serial Communications Board.
Name
Cat. No.
Contents
SYSMAC CQM1H-series
CQM1H-SCB41
Serial Communications Board
W365-E1-1
Describes the use of the Serial Communications Board to
perform serial communications with external devices,
including hardware and the usage of standard system
protocols for OMRON products.
Operation Manual
Host Link communications commands are described in the
SYSMAC CQM1H-series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual (W364).
Creating protocol macros is described in the CX-Protocol
Operation Manual (W344).
SYSMAC CQM1H-series
Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
W363-E1-1
W364-E1-1
W344-E1-1
Describes the installation and operation of the
CQM1H-series PCs.
SYSMAC CQM1H-series
Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual
Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions
supported by CQM1H-series PCs, Host Link commands,
and other programming information.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E
CX-Protocol Operation Manual
Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create protocol
macros as communications sequences to communicate with
external devices.
Section 1 introduces the hardware and software functions of the Serial Communications Board, including
the serial communications modes, system configurations, and specifications.
Section 2 describes the components of the Serial Communications Board, how to connect it in the CPU
Unit, and how to connect it to external devices.
Section 3 describes the settings, control bits, flags, and status information available in the CPU Unit for
use with the Serial Communications Board.
Section 4 describes the procedure and other information required to use Host Link communications.
Section 5 describes the procedure and other information required to use protocol macros.
Section 6 provides information required to use no-protocol communications on a Serial Communications
Board port.
Section 7 provides information required to create 1:1 data links through a Serial Communications Board
port.
Section 8 describes the procedure and other information required to use 1:N-mode and 1:1-mode NT
Links to Programmable Terminals (PTs).
Section 9 describes the troubleshooting and maintenance procedures for the Serial Communications
Boards.
Appendix A to Appendix N provide the specifications of the standard system protocols.
!
WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiii
xv
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
4
8
8
SECTION 2
Board Components and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
10
14
17
2-1 Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 3
Default Settings and Related Bits/Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
28
30
3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 PC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTION 4
Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
4-1 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Changes from Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
36
39
45
53
SECTION 5
Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
5-1 Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Restrictions in Using the CX-Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
65
66
70
76
80
85
SECTION 6
No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Using No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
100
101
102
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7
Communications for 1:1 Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Using 1:1 Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
109
110
111
SECTION 8
NT Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
8-1 Overview of NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
116
117
SECTION 9
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
9-1 Front-panel Indicator Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
121
130
132
Appendices
A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B CompoWay/F Master Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H ES100j Digital Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
L Visual Inspection System Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
137
153
171
187
209
229
243
283
305
317
349
367
403
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
ix
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Serial Communications Boards.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Serial Communica-
tions Boards and the PC in general. You must read this section and understand the information contained before at-
tempting to set up or operate a PC system containing a Serial Communications Board.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
xii
xii
xiii
xiii
xv
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
6-1-1 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
xv
xi
Conformance to EC Directives
3
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement ma-
chines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual
close at hand for reference during operation.
WARNING It is extremely important that a Serial Communications Board and all related
units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions,
especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You
must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a Serial
Communications Board to the above mentioned applications.
!
3
Safety Precautions
WARNING Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied. Doing so
!
may result in electric shock.
WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Inner Boards, or Dedicated
I/O Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in
unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following
operation may result in changes to memory status.
!
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to the
CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PC on a net-
work.
WARNING Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may
!
result in electric shock.
Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be caused
!
by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, input signals may not be read properly.
xii
Conformance to EC Directives
5
4
Operating Environment Precautions
Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
!
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tempera-
ture.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
!
following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon-
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.
!
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC.
WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
!
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to pro-
tect against electrical shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the fol-
lowing. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric
shock.
• Assembling the Units or mounting the Serial Communications Board.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting or wiring the cables.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or the
PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-
cautions.
!
• Do not turn OFF the power supply while transferring protocol macro data.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
xiii
Conformance to EC Directives
5
• Always discharge static electricity by touching a grounded metal part before
mounting the Serial Communications Board.
• Always discharge static electricity by touching a grounded metal part before
connecting cable connectors to RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port of the Serial
Communications Board.
• Be sure that the connectors, terminal blocks, expansion cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of
the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated
voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the
power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may re-
sult in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipa-
tion. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Confirm polarities before connecting RS-422A/485 cables. Some devices re-
quire that SDA/B and RDA/B or signal polarities be reversed.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power sup-
ply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Check the user programming (ladder program, protocol macro data, etc.) for
proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking the pro-
gram may result in an unexpected operation.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the contents of
the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Circuit boards have sharp or pointed edges, such as those on the leads of elec-
trical parts. Do not touch the back of printed boards or mounted sections with
your bare hands.
• Connect or set terminating resistance correctly when using RS-422A/485
cables.
• During transportation and storage, cover the circuit boards with conductive
materials to prevent them from being damaged by static electricity caused by
LSIs or ICs and keep them within the specified storage temperature.
• Refer to Section 2 Board Components and Installation and correctly wire and
install the Units.
• Do not attempt to take any Units apart, to repair any Units, or to modify any
Units in any way.
• Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand voltage
tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result in burning.
xiv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-1-1 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or ma-
chines. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC stan-
dards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the standards in
the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the
equipment or control panel in which the OMRON devices are installed. The cus-
tomer must, therefore, perform final checks to confirm that devices and the over-
all machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN50081-2
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC or 75 to
1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards for the PC (EN61131-2).
6-1-2 Conformance to EC Directives
The CQM1H-series PCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine
or device in which a CQM1H-series PC is used complies with EC directives, the
PC must be installed as follows:
1, 2, 3...
1. The PC must be installed within a control panel.
2. Reinforced insulation or double insulation must be used for the DC power
supplies used for the I/O power supplies.
3. PCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Common Emission
Standard (EN50081-2). When a PC is built into a machine, however, noise
can be generated by switching devices using relay outputs and cause the
overall machine to fail to meet the Standards. If this occurs, surge killers
must be connected or other measures taken external to the PC.
The following methods represent typical methods for reducing noise, and
may not be sufficient in all cases. Required countermeasures will vary
depending on the devices connected to the control panel, wiring, the config-
uration of the system, and other conditions.
6-1-3 EMI Measures
The CQM1H-series PCs conform to the Common Emission Standards
(EN50081-2) of the EMC Directives. However, the noise generated from Serial
Communications Board communications cables may not satisfy these stan-
dards. In such a case, commercially available ferrite cores must be placed on the
communications cable or other appropriate countermeasures must be provided
external to the PC.
xv
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Recommended Ferrite Cores
The following ferrite core (data line noise filter) is recommended:
0443-164151 by Fair-Rite Products Corp.
Low impedance, 25 MHz: 90 Ω, 100 MHz: 160 Ω
Recommended Mounting Method
Mount the core on one turn of the communications cable, as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
Mount the cores as closely to the end of the communications cable as possible,
as shown in the following illustration.
Serial
Commu-
nications
Board
xvi
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the hardware and software functions of the Serial Communications Board, including the serial com-
munications modes, system configurations, and specifications.
1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1 Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-2 Serial Communications Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-3 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-4 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-5 Mounting Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Protocol Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-1 Host Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-2 Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-3 No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4 PC 1:1 Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-5 NT Links –– 1:N Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-6 NT Links –– 1:1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-1 Serial Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3-2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
Basic Operating Procedure
Section 1-1
1-1 Overview
1-1-1 Model Number
Name
Serial Communications Board CQM1H-SCB41 One RS-232 port
One RS-422A/485 port
Model
Specifications
1-1-2 Serial Communications Boards
The Serial Communications Board is an Inner Board for the CQM1H-series PCs.
One Board can be installed in Inner Board slot 1 of a CQM1H-series CPU Unit.
The Board cannot be installed in slot 2.
The Board provides two serial communications ports for connecting host com-
puters, Programmable Terminals (PTs), general-purpose external devices, and
Programming Devices (excluding Programming Consoles). This makes it pos-
sible to easily increase the number of serial communications ports for a CQM1H-
series PC.
Port 1:
Port 2:
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
1-1-3 Features
The Serial Communications Board is an option that can be mounted in the CPU
Unit to increase the number of serial ports without using an I/O slot. It supports
protocol macros (which are not supported by the ports built into the CPU Units),
allowing easy connection to general-purpose devices that have a serial port.
Inside controlled machine
Serial Communications Board
RS-232C
OR
RS-422A/485
Dedicated controller
or other device
Bar code reader
or other device
Temperature controller
or other device
External device with RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 port
Both RS-232C and RS-422A/485 ports are provided. The RS-422A/485 port en-
ables 1:N connections to general-purpose external devices without going
through Converting Link Adapters. The 1:N connections can be used with proto-
col macros or 1:N-mode NT Links.
2
Protocol Overview
Section 1-1
1-1-4 System Configuration
The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Com-
munications Board: Host Link (SYSMAC WAY), protocol macro, no-protocol, 1:1
Data Links, 1:N-mode NT Link, and 1:1-mode NT Link modes. The devices
shown in the following diagram can be connected.
Note The 1:1-mode NT Link and 1:N-mode NT Link communications modes use dif-
ferent protocols that are not compatible with each other.
Programming
Device
(excluding
General-purpose Programmable
Programming
external device
Terminal (PT)
Host computer
C-series PC
Console)
1:1
Data Link
NT Link
Protocol macros
No-protocol
Host Link
Host Link
CQM1H-series CPU Unit
Serial Communications Board
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
General-purpose Programmable
C-series PC
external device
Terminal (PT)
Programming Host computer
Device
1:1
Data Link
Protocol macros
No-protocol
NT Link
(excluding
Programming
Console)
Host Link
Host Link
Note An NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapter can be used to convert between
RS-232C and RS-422A/485. This Link Adapter requires a 5-V power supply.
Power is provided by the RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board
when the Link Adapter is connected to it, but must be provided separately when
connecting the Link Adapter to other devices.
3
Basic Operating Procedure
Section 1-2
1-1-5 Mounting Location
The Serial Communications Board can be installed in Inner Board slot 1 of a
CQM1H-series CPU Unit. The Board cannot be installed in slot 2.
Serial Communications Board
1-2 Protocol Overview
The following six serial communications modes can be used as required for
each serial communications port on the Serial Communications Board.
• Host Link:
For connections to host computers, personal computer peripheral devices, or
Programmable Terminals
• Protocol Macros:
For communications with general-purpose external devices using protocols
• No-protocol:
For connections to general-purpose devices for no-protocol communications
using TXD(––) and RXD(––) instructions
• 1:1 Data Links:
For 1:1 data links with a C-series PC, including another CQM1H
• 1:N-mode NT Link:
For communications with one or more Programmable Terminals (PTs)
• 1:1-mode NT Link:
For communications with one PT
Communications Ports and Serial Communications Modes
Serial communications mode
Board
Port
Peripheral
bus or
Programming
Host Link Protocol
No-
protocol
1:1 Data 1:N-mode 1:1-mode
(SYSMAC
WAY)
macro
Link
NT Link
NT Link
Console bus
Serial
RS-232C
(port 1)
No
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK (See
note 2)
OK (See
note 2)
Commu-
nications
Boards
RS-422A/
485 (port 2)
OK (See
note 1)
OK (See
note 1)
OK (See
note 1)
OK (See
note 2)
OK (See
note 2)
Note 1. A 4-wire connection must be used when using Host Link, no-protocol, or 1:1
Data Link communications with an RS-422A/485 connector.
2. The PT Programming Control functions are not supported.
Connection examples for the serial communications modes are shown in the fol-
lowing sections.
4
Protocol Overview
Section 1-2
1-2-1 Host Link Mode
In Host Link Mode, C-mode Host Link commands can be sent from a computer,
PT, or other host to read or write I/O memory in the PC or to control the PC’s oper-
ating modes.
The TXD(––) instruction can be used to send ASCII data to the host. This is
called slave-initiated communications or unsolicited communications.
Note 1. Programming Devices can also be connected in Host Link mode.
2. A 4-wire connection must be used when using an RS-422A/485 port.
Sending C-mode Host Link Commands
Host computer
Serial Communications Board
Response
Host Link
command
Slave-initiated Communications
Host computer
TXD(––)
PC initiates communication.
Serial Communications Board
Data
CQM1H
1-2-2 Protocol Macros
Data transfer procedures (called protocols) with general-purpose external de-
vices can be created as macros using the CX-Protocol to match the communica-
tions specifications of the external device (but, half-duplex communications and
start-stop synchronization must be used).
These protocols are stored in the Serial Communications Boards from the CX-
Protocol, and enable data to be exchanged with general-purpose external de-
vices simply by executing the PMCR(––) instruction in the CPU Unit.
Standard system protocols for exchanging data with OMRON devices (such as
Temperature Controllers, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers, and
Modems) are provided as a standard feature in the Serial Communications
Boards and the CX-Protocol. The CX-Protocol can also be used to change the
standard system protocols according to user requirements.
Serial Communications Board
PMCR
(––)
CQM1H
External device
with RS-232C port
RS-232C
Message
Protocol made specifically for the
required communications specifications
Note There are some restrictions in using the CX-Protocol to manipulate protocols or
perform other operations for the CQM1H-series Serial Communications Board.
These restrictions are described below.
5
Basic Operating Procedure
Section 1-2
• Pin 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H-series CPU Unit must be
turned ON to use the CX-Protocol. While pin 8 is ON, you will not be able to use
any of the CPU Unit or Board ports for the CX-Programmer, SYSMAC-CPT, or
SYSMAC Support Software.
• The model of PC must be set to the C200HG and the model of CPU Unit must
be set to the CPU43.
• Refer to 5-2 Restrictions in Using the CX-Protocol for further details.
1-2-3 No-protocol Communications
The TXD(––) and RXD(––) instructions can be used in the ladder program to
send and receive data without conversion through the RS-232C port to and from
an external device.
A start code can be sent before the data and an end code can be sent after it.
Alternately, the amount of data being sent can be specified. A communications
frame, however, cannot be created according to the specifications of the partner
device, providing less flexibility than protocol macros. Retry processing, data
form conversions, controlling processing based on a response, and other com-
munications procedures cannot be performed.
No-protocol communications are suitable for communications with bar code
readers and other devices that only send data or printers and other devices that
only receive data.
Note A 4-wire connection must be used when using an RS-422A/485 port.
Serial Communications Board
TXD(––) or
RXD(––)
CQM1H
External device
with RS-232C port
RS-232C
OR
Data only
1-2-4 PC 1:1 Data Links
Two PCs can be connected via RS-232C cable to create a data link between
them of up to 64 words in the LR area. The link words written by one PC are auto-
matically transferred to the other PC for reading.
One of the following three ranges of words can be set to be linked:
LR 00 to LR 63, LR 00 to LR 31, or LR 00 to LR 15
A 1:1 Data Link communications system can be created between the CQM1H
and another CQM1H, or between the CQM1H and the CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HS, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1(-V2).
6
Protocol Overview
Section 1-2
Note A 4-wire connection must be used when using an RS-422A/485 port.
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H or other C-series PC
CQM1H
RS-232C
Master PC
Slave PC
LR 00
to
LR 00
to
Master area
(sent)
Master area
(received)
LR 31
LR 32
LR 31
LR 32
to
Slave area
(received)
Slave area
(sent)
to
LR 63
LR 63
1-2-5 NT Links –– 1:N Mode
A PC can be connected to one or more Programmable Terminals (PTs) using an
RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port. The I/O memory of the PC is allocated to the
Status Control Areas and the Status Notification Areas used by the PTs, as well
as to display objects, such as touch switches, lamps, and memory tables. This
enables the status of the I/O memory in the PC to be controlled and monitored by
operations from the PTs, without the use of a ladder diagram programming in the
PC. Up to eight PTs can be connected to a PC.
Note The user does not need to be aware of NT Link commands. The user only has to
allocate the PC memory to the PTs.
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H
1:N
1:1
RS-422A/485
PT
PT
PT
1-2-6 NT Links –– 1:1 Mode
The functionality of the 1:1 mode is the same as that of the 1:N mode, but only a
1:1 connection is possible. The 1:1 and 1:N modes are not compatible as proto-
cols.
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H
1:1
PT
7
Basic Operating Procedure
Section 1-4
1-3 Specifications
1-3-1 Serial Communications Board
Device name
Serial Communications Board
Model number
Classification
CQM1H-SCB41
CQM1H-series Inner Board
CQM1H-CPU51/61
Supporting CPU Units
Number of mountable Boards/PC and
mounting location
One Board per PC maximum, must be in Inner Board slot 1
Serial communications
ports
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Protocols
Host Link, protocol macro, no-protocol, 1:1 Data Link, 1:N-mode NT Link
or 1:1-mode NT Link can be selected for each port.
Software interface with CPU Unit
PC Setup settings
IR 200 to IR 207 (words for Inner Board slot 1)
DM 6550 to DM 6559 (in read-only DM area in CPU Unit)
Set from Programming Device
Current consumption (see note)
Dimensions
200 mA max. at 5 V DC
25 × 110 × 107 (mm) (W × H × D)
90 g max.
Weight
Standard accessories
Socket: XM2SA-0901 (OMRON) (two included)
Hood: XM2SA-0911-E (OMRON) (two included, ESD compatible)
Note The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Board. Power is sup-
plied from the CQM1H
When an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications
Board, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board. A current consump-
tion of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is connected. In the
above specifications, “x” indicates that 150 mA must be added for each port to
which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to provide the required 5-V
power supply.
1-3-2 General Specifications
Conform to SYSMAC CQM1H-series CPU Unit specifications.
1-4 Basic Operating Procedure
An overview of the basic operating procedure is provided here. Details are pro-
vided in sections 4 to 8 of this manual according to the serial communications
mode.
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC.
2. Mount the Board.
3. Connect the Board and the external device(s).
4. Turn ON the power supply to the PC.
5. Set the PC Setup settings from a Programming Device (e.g., Programming
Console or CX-Protocol).
6. Execute communications.
Use the control bits, flags, and words allocated in the IR area in the ladder
program to control communications.
8
SECTION 2
Board Components and Installation
This section describes the components of the Serial Communications Board, how to connect it in the CPU Unit, and how to
connect it to external devices.
2-1 Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 RS-232C Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 RS-422A/485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Mounting the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-3 Mounting Height and Connector Cover Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-4 Precautions in Handling the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 Port Applicability and Restrictions for 2-Wire/4-Wire Connections . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5 Recommended RS-232C Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-6 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-7 Wiring Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-8 Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-9 Assembling Connector Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-10 Connecting to the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
10
11
12
13
14
14
15
15
16
17
17
18
18
19
20
21
23
25
25
26
9
Installation
Section 2-1
2-1 Component Names and Functions
The components of the Serial Communications Board are described in this sec-
tion.
Serial Communications Board
(Inner Board slot 1)
Port 1:
RS-232C
Applicable Connectors
Terminating resistance
switch
Socket: XM2SA-0901 (OMRON)
Hood:
XM2SA-0911-E (OMRON)
(Two of each are included with the Board)
2-wire or 4-wire switch
Port 2:
RS-422A/485
2-1-1 Indicators
Board Indicators
There are three LED indicators on the Board, as described below.
RDY: Lit when the Board is operational (green)
RDY
COMM1: Lit when data is being sent or received on the RS-232C port (Yellow)
COMM2: Lit when data is being sent or received on the RS-442A/485 port (Yellow)
COMM1
COMM2
Indicator
RDY
Color
Status
Lit
Meaning
Green
Operating normally, and protocol macro
preparations have been completed.
Flashing
There is an error in the PC Setup settings for the
Board or in the protocol macros contained in the
Board.
Not lit
A hardware error has occurred in the Board.
Port 1 is being used for sending or receiving.
Port 1 is not being used for sending or receiving.
Port 2 is being used for sending or receiving.
Port 2 is not being used for sending or receiving.
COMM1
COMM2
Yellow
Yellow
Flashing
Not lit
Flashing
Not lit
10
Wiring
Section 2-1
CPU Unit Indicators
A Serial Communications Board is mounted as an Inner Board in the CPU Unit
and thus affects the CPU Unit ERR/ALM indicator.
Indicator
Color
Status
Meaning
ERR/ALM Red
Lit
Fatal error
If a fatal error occurs, the CPU
Unit will stop operation in
either RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Flashing
Not lit
Non-fatal
error
If a non-fatal error occurs, the
CPU Unit will continue
operation in either RUN or
MONITOR mode.
Normal
operation
The CPU Unit is operating
normally. This indicator will
also not be lit when a
watchdog timer error occurs.
If an error in the Inner Board is the cause of the error indicated on the ERR/ALM
indicator, the Inner Board Error Flag (SR 25415) will turn ON and information on
the error will be stored in AR 0400 to AR 0407. Refer to Section 9 Troubleshoot-
ing and Maintenance for details.
2-1-2 RS-232C Port
Protocol
Host Link No-protocol Protocol macros 1:1 Data Links
Half-duplex
1:N NT Links
1:1 NT Links
Communica-
tions method
Synchroniza- Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous)
tion
Baud rate
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/ 19,200 bps
1:1
19,200 bps
1:1
38,400 bps
1:1
19,200 bps
1:1
Connections
(1:N possible using Converting Link Adapters)
(1:N possible us-
ing Link Adapters)
Transmission 15 m max. (See note)
distance
Interface
Complies with EIA RS-232C
Note The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, how-
ever, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the
device being connected to confirm support.
Connector Pin Layout
Pin No.
Abbreviation
FG
Signal name
Shield
I/O
1 (See note 1)
---
2
SD
Send data
Output
Input
Output
Input
---
3
RD
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Power supply
Data set ready
4
RTS (RS)
CTS (CS)
5V
5
6 (See note 2)
7
8
DSR (DR)
DTR (ER)
Input
Output
Data terminal ready
(See note 4)
9
SG
FG
Signal ground
Shield
---
---
Shell (See note 1)
Note 1. Pin No. 1 and the shell are connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the
Power Supply Unit inside the Serial Communications Board. Therefore, the
cable shield can be grounded by grounding GR of the Power Supply Unit.
2. Pin 6 (5 V) is required when the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected. For
details on connection methods, refer to 2-3 Wiring.
11
Installation
Section 2-1
Caution Do not connect the 5-V power supply of pin 6 to any external device other than an
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device and the Serial Com-
munications Board may be damaged.
!
The following cables are provided for connection to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters.
We recommend that these cables be used.
NT-AL001-E connecting cables: XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
Applicable Connectors
Recommended Cables
Socket: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911-E (OMRON, conforms to ESD) or equivalent
One Socket and one Hood are provided for each port.
UL2464 AWG28 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
Cable length: 15 m max.
2-1-3 RS-422A/485 Port
Protocol
Host Link No-protocol Protocol macros 1:1 Data Links
1:N NT Links
1:1 NT Links
Communica-
tions method
Half-duplex
4-wire, 1:1
4-wire, 1:N
2-wire, 1:1
2-wire, 1:N
OK
OK
No
No
OK
OK
No
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
OK
OK
Synchroniza- Start-stop synchronous (asynchronous)
tion
Baud rate
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/ 19,200 bps
1:N (N: 32 Units max.)
19,200 bps
1:1
38,400 bps
19,200 bps
1:1
Connections
1:N (N: 8 Units
max.)
Transmission 500 m max.
distance
(The total combined cable length is 500 m max. T-branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Interface
Complies with EIA RS-485
Connector Pin Layout
Pin No.
Abbreviation
SDA
Signal name
Send data –
I/O
1 (See note 1)
Output
Output
---
2 (See note 1)
SDB
NC
Send data +
Not used
3
4
NC
Not used
---
5
NC
Not used
---
6 (See note 1)
RDA
NC
Receive data –
Not used
Input
---
7
8 (See note 1)
9
RDB
NC
Receive data +
Not used
Input
---
Shell (See note 2)
FG
Shield
---
Note 1. When 2-wire connections are used, use pins 1 and 2, or pins 6 and 8.
2. The shell is connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply Unit
inside of the Serial Communications Board. Therefore, the cable shield can
be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit.
12
Wiring
Section 2-1
Internal Circuits
The internal circuits for port 2 are shown below.
Pin 8: RDB (+)
Receiver
Terminating resistance: 200 Ω
Terminating resistance switch
Pin 6: RDA (–)
2-wire/4-wire switch
Pin 2: SDB (+)
Driver
Pin 1: SDA (–)
Caution Confirm polarities before connecting RS-422A/485 cables. Some devices re-
!
quire that SDA/B and RDA/B or signal polarities be reversed.
Applicable Connectors
Recommended Cables
Socket: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911-E (OMRON, conforms to ESD) or equivalent
One Socket and one Hood are provided for each port.
CO-HC-ESV-3P 7/0.2 (Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.)
Cable length: 500 m max.
(The total combined cable length is 500 m max. T-branch lines must be a maxi-
mum of 10 m long.)
2-1-4 Switches
The TERM and WIRE switches are on the front panel of the Serial Communica-
tions Board. Refer to page 10 for a diagram of the Board.
Terminating Resistance
Switch
When an RS-422/485 port is used, turn ON the switch if the Serial Communica-
tions Board is on the end of the transmission line. Refer to information on specific
serial communications modes for the ON/OFF settings.
Label
TERM
Name
Terminating
resistance switch
Settings
Factory setting
OFF:Terminating
resistance
OFF
OFF:Terminating
resistance
OFF
ON: Terminating
resistance ON
2-Wire or 4-Wire Switch
When an RS-422/485 port is used, set the switch to 2 when 2-wire connections
are used, and set the switch to 4 when 4-wire connections are used.
Label
WIRE
Name
Settings
2: 2-wire
4: 4-wire
Factory setting
2-wire or 4-wire
switch
2: 2-wire
Note Host Link, no-protocol, and 1:1 Data Link modes cannot use 2-wire
RS-422A/485 communications. Always use 4-wire connections when using
RS-422A/485 communications for these serial communications modes. Refer
to 2-3 Wiring for connections.
13
Installation
Section 2-2
2-2 Installation
2-2-1 Mounting the Board
This section describes how to mount a Serial Communications Board in Inner
Board slot 1 of a CPU Unit. Slot 1 is the slot on the left. Only one Serial Commu-
nications Board can be installed in each CPU Unit.
Note 1. The Serial Communications Board cannot be mounted in Inner Board slot 2.
2. Always turn OFF the power before installing or removing the Serial Commu-
nications Board. Installing or removing the Serial Communications Board
with the power ON can cause the CPU Unit to malfunction, damage internal
components, or cause communications errors.
3. Before handling the Serial Communications Board, touch a grounded me-
tallic object in order to discharge any static build-up from your body.
1, 2, 3...
1. Press the catches at the top and bottom of the Inner Board slot 1 compart-
ment cover.
Press the top catch.
Press the bottom catch.
2. Remove the compartment cover.
Inner Board Connector
3. Insert the Serial Communications Board.
14
Wiring
Section 2-2
2-2-2 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
CS1W-SCB41
Mounted in the CPU Unit
110
25
107
2-2-3 Mounting Height and Connector Cover Dimensions
When mounting the Serial Communications Board, make sure to provide space
for the mounting height and connector cover dimensions shown below.
Serial Communication Unit
mounted in the CPU Unit
Connecting Cable connector
123
223
Note The mounting heights shown above are applicable when the attached connec-
tors, connector covers, and recommended cables are used. The mounting
height may differ when other connectors, connector covers, and cables are
used. Determine the mounting height, taking into account the connectors, con-
nector covers, and the minimum bending radius of the cables.
15
Installation
Section 2-2
2-2-4 Precautions in Handling the Board
• Turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit before mounting or removing the
Board.
• Turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit before before connecting or dis-
connecting Board connectors or wiring.
• Separate the port connector lines from the high-tension or power lines to re-
duce external noise.
• Leave the port cover attached when not using a communications port.
Port cover
16
Wiring
Section 2-3
2-3 Wiring
2-3-1 Connectors
Prepare connecting cables for port 1 (RS-232C) and port 2 (RS422A/485) using
the Sockets and Hoods provided with the Board and the recommended cables.
Connection methods vary with the serial communications mode that is being
used. Refer to the following sections for connection examples.
Host Link:
Section 4 Host Link Communications
Protocol macros: Section 5 Protocol Macros
No-protocol:
1:1 Data Links:
NT Links:
Section 6 Non-protocol Communications
Section 7 Communications for 1:1 Data Links
Section 8 NT Link Communications
Hood
Socket
Standard Connectors
(for Both RS-232C and
RS-422A/485)
Name
Model
Specifications
Used together
Socket
XM2A-0901
9-pin male
(provided with
Serial
Hood
XM2S-0911-E
For 9-pin, metric
screws, conforms
to ESD
Communications
Board).
Socket:
XM2A-0901
Hood:
XM2S-0911-E
Recommended Cables
RS-232C Cables
Model
Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28×5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved)
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved)
Fujikura Ltd.
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P×AWG28 (7/0.127) (UL-approved)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×AWG28 (7/0.127) (not UL-approved)
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
17
Installation
Section 2-3
RS-422A/485 Cable
Model
Manufacturer
CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2
Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
Refer to pages 11 and 12 for the connector pin layouts. Refer to 2-3-5 Recom-
mended RS-232C Wiring Examples and 2-3-6 Recommended RS-422A/485
Wiring Examples for wiring examples, and to 2-3-7 Wiring Connectors for wiring
methods.
Standard cables are available for connection to personal computers and PTs.
Refer to Section 4 Host Link Communications for personal computer cables and
to your PT user’s manual for PT cables.
2-3-2 Wiring Precautions
• Before connecting or disconnecting the communications cables, always make
sure that the PC is turned OFF.
• Tighten the communications connector screws firmly with your fingers.
• Serial Communications Boards can be connected to various devices. For
compatibility, refer to the operation manuals for the devices to which they are to
be connected.
2-3-3 Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring
Observe the following precautions for external wiring.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid using I/O wires and
other control wires in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are running in parallel, allow at least 300 mm between the racks.
Low-current cables
Communications
cables
300 mm min.
Control cables
PC power supply
and general control
circuit wiring
300 mm min.
Power cables
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must
be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PC power supply
and general control
Communications
cables
circuit wiring
Steel sheet metal
200 mm min.
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less.
18
Wiring
Section 2-3
2-3-4 Port Applicability and Restrictions for 2-Wire/4-Wire Connections
The following table shows the port connections that can be used for each serial
communications mode.
RS-232C port
1:1 1:N
RS-422A/485 port
Serial communications
mode
4-wire
OK
2-wire
1:1
1:N 1:1
1:N
Host Link
OK
OK (See
note 2)
OK
No
No
Protocol macros
No-protocol
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
No
No
OK
No
1:1 Data Links
No
No
1:N-mode NT Links
1:1-mode NT Links
Note 1. The 1:N connection method can be used by converting between RS-232C
and RS-422A/485 through NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters.
2. Use 4-wire connections between the Converting Link Adapters.
3. The 2-wire RS-422A/485 connections cannot be used for Host Link commu-
nications. Use 4-wire connections.
The transmission circuits for 2-wire and 4-wire connections are different, as
shown in the following diagram.
Example of 2-Wire Connections
Example of 4-Wire Connections
2/4-wire switch
(DPDT)
2/4-wire switch
(DPDT)
Other Unit
Other Unit
Other Unit
Other Unit
Not connected
Board
Board
Note 1. Use the same transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes.
2. Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is set
to 2-wire.
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Settings
The NT-AL001-E Link Adapter has a DIP switch for setting RS-422A/485 com-
munications conditions. When connecting the Board, refer to the DIP switch set-
tings shown in the following table.
19
Installation
Section 2-3
Pin
Function
Factory
setting
1
2
Not used. Always set this pin to ON.
Built-in terminating resistance setting
ON
ON
ON:
OFF:
Connects terminating resistance.
Disconnects terminating resistance.
2/4-wire setting
3
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
2-wire: Set both pins to ON.
4-wire: Set both pins to OFF.
Transmission mode (See note)
Constant transmission: Set both pins to OFF.
Transmission performed when CTS signal in RS-232C
interface is at high level: Set pin 5 to OFF and pin 6 to ON. OFF
6
Transmission performed when CTS signal in RS-232C
interface is at low level: Set pin 5 to ON and pin 6 to OFF.
Note When connecting to a CQM1H-series CPU Unit, turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6.
2-3-5 Recommended RS-232C Wiring Examples
It is recommended that RS-232C cables be connected as described below, es-
pecially when the Serial Communications Board is used in an environment
where it is likely to be subject to electrical noise.
1, 2, 3...
1. Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.
Model
Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved)
AWG28x5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved)
Fujikura Ltd.
UL2464-SB (MA) 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved)
Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.
2. Combine signal wires and SG (signal ground) wires in a twisted-pair cable.
At the same time, bundle the SG wires to the connectors on the Serial Com-
munications Board and the remote device.
3. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) terminal
of the RS-232C connector on the Serial Communications Board. At the
same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Unit to
100 Ω or less.
4. A connection example is shown below.
Example:Twisted-pair Cable Connecting SD-SG, RD-SG, RTS-SG, and
CTS-SG Terminals
Actual Wiring Example
Twist the braided shield to make
Serial
Communications
Board
it thinner and connect to Pin No.
1 (FG). Cover this section with
heat-shrink tube to avoid contact
with other sections.
SG signal wires
Remote device
Pin Signal
Signal
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
SG
RD
SD
CTS
RTS
SG
Bundle the SG wires.
Aluminum foil
FG
FG
FG
Hood
Shield
XM2S-0911-E
20
Wiring
Section 2-3
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the Power
Supply Unit. Therefore, FG is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR)
on the Power Supply Unit. Although there is conductivity between the Hood (FG)
and pin 1 (FG), connect the Hood (FG) to the shield because the Hood (FG) has
smaller contact resistance with the shield than pin 1 (FG), and thus provides bet-
ter noise resistance.
Serial Communications Board
Power Supply Unit
Hood and GR are
internally connected.
Ground to 100 Ω or less
Grounding the GR terminal
grounds the Hood (FG).
2-3-6 Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring Examples
Recommended RS-422A/485 Cable
We recommend the following wiring methods to ensure quality transmissions for
RS-422A/485 communications.
1, 2, 3...
1. Always use shielded twisted-pair cables for the communications cables.
Model
Manufacturer
CO-HC-ESV-3Px7/0.2
Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
2. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) of the
RS-422A/485 connector on the Serial Communications Board. At the same
time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Unit to 100 Ω or
less.
Note Always ground the shield only at the Board end. Grounding both ends of the
shield may damage the device due to the potential difference between the
ground terminals.
Connection examples are shown below.
2-Wire Connections
Serial Communications
Board
Remote device
Pin
Signal
Signal
Hood
Shield
21
Installation
Section 2-3
4-Wire Connections
Serial Communications
Board
Remote device
Signal
Pin Signal
Hood
Shield
Using a 3G2A9-AL001 Link Adapter
Serial Communications
Board
3G2A9-AL001
Remote device
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422
interface
Hood
Signal
Pin
Remote device
Signal
Using an NT-AL001-E RS-232C/RS-422 Link Adapter
Serial Communications
Board
NT-AL001-E
Remote device
Pin
Pin
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
Pin
RD
SD
SD
RD
CTS
RTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
Remote device
Hood
FG
Signal
Shield
(See note.)
Note The following cables are available for this connection.
Length
70 cm
2 m
Model
XW2Z-070T-1
XW2Z-200T-1
It is recommended that one of these cables be used to connect the RS-232C port
on the Serial Communications Board to the NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapt-
er.
22
Wiring
Section 2-3
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the Power
Supply Unit. Therefore, FG is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR)
on the Power Supply Unit.
Serial Communications Board
Power Supply Unit
Hood and GR are
internally connected.
Ground to 100 Ω or less
Grounding the GR terminal
grounds the Hood (FG).
3. Be sure to turn ON the terminating resistance at the last Unit at the end of the
RS-422A/485 cable.
2-3-7 Wiring Connectors
Use the following steps to wire connectors.
Cable Preparation
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each
step.
Shield Connected to Hood (FG)
1, 2, 3...
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be
careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)
3. Trim off the braided shield using scissors so that the remaining shield length
is 10 mm.
10 mm
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the ex-
posed conductor length is 5 mm.
5 mm
23
Installation
Section 2-3
5. Fold back the braided shield.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded shield.
Aluminum foil tape
Shield Not Connected to Hood (FG)
1, 2, 3... 1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be
careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)
3. Trim off all the braided shield using scissors.
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the ex-
posed conductor length is 5 mm.
5 mm
5. Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield
was removed.
Adhesive tape
24
Wiring
Section 2-3
2-3-8 Soldering
1, 2, 3...
1. Thread a heat-shrinking tube through each conductor.
2. Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector termi-
nals.
3. Completely solder each conductor.
Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Inside diameter:
1.5 mm, l = 10
4. Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube to
shrink it in place.
Heat-shrinking tube
2-3-9 Assembling Connector Hood
Assemble the connector Hood as shown below.
Adhesive tape
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
End not connected to FG
Grounding plate
25
Installation
Section 2-3
2-3-10 Connecting to the Board
Tighten the screws firmly
with your fingers.
26
SECTION 3
Default Settings and Related Bits/Flags
This section describes the settings, control bits, flags, and status information available in the CPU Unit for use with the Serial
Communications Board.
3-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 PC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
28
30
27
PC Setup Settings
Section 3-2
3-1 Overview
The following settings, control bits, flags, and information are available in the
CPU Unit memory for use with the Serial Communications Board.
Contents
Addresses
PC Setup settings for the Serial
Communications Board
Port 1: DM 6555 to DM 6559
Port 2: DM 6550 to DM 6554
Control bits, flags, and status information
for the Inner Board slot 1
IR 200 to IR 207
Error flags and information for Inner
Boards
SR 25415: Inner Board Error Flag
AR 04:
Inner Board Error Code
CX-Protocol (for protocol
macro mode operation)
Serial Communications Board
CPU Unit
Flash memory
Protocol macro
data (for protocol
macro mode
operation)
Protocol
macro data
Backup
battery
PC Setup settings
(DM 6550 to DM 6559)
Read
constantly
Inner Board Slot 1
Area
(IR 200 to IR 207)
Refreshed
Inner Board Error Flag
and Error Code
(SR 25415 and AR 04)
3-2 PC Setup Settings
Settings for the Serial Communications Board can be made from a Program-
ming Device in the following words of the PC Setup.
Port 1: DM 6555 to DM 6559
Port 2: DM 6550 to DM 6554
The settings stored in these words are read constantly; the PC does not need to
be restarted or reset when changes are made to the settings. They will be up-
dated automatically as soon as they are changed.
The settings in these words depend on the serial communications mode that is
being used. Refer to the following sections for details.
Host Link:
Section 4 Host Link Communications
Protocol macros: Section 5 Protocol Macros
No-protocol:
1:1 Data Links:
NT Links:
Section 6 Non-protocol Communications
Section 7 Communications for 1:1 Data Links
Section 8 NT Link Communications
An overview of the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board is
given next. The default setting for each word is all zeros (0000).
28
PC Setup Settings
Section 3-2
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Function
Applicable
mode
DM 6550
(port 2)
00 to 03 Port settings
Host Link, no-
protocol, proto-
col macros
0: Standard (1 start bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps)
1: Settings in DM 6551 (DM 6556 for port 1)
DM 6555
(port 1)
04 to 07 CTS control settings
Host Link, no-
protocol, 1:1
Data Links
0: Disable; 1: Set
08 to 11 Link words for 1:1 Data Link (when bits 12 to 15 are set to 3)
0: LR 00 to LR 63; 1: LR 00 to LR 31; 2: LR 00 to LR 15
1:1 Data Link
master (link
words)
or
or
Maximum Programmable Terminal unit number (when bits 12 to 15 are set to 5) NT Link (max.
1 to 7 (BCD)
unit number)
12 to 15 Serial communications mode
All modes
0: Host Link; 1: No-protocol; 2: 1:1 Data Link slave; 3: 1:1 Data Link master;
4: NT Link in 1:1 mode; 5: NT Link in 1:N mode; 6: Protocol macro
DM 6551
(port 2)
00 to 07 Baud rate
00: 1.2K, 01: 2.4K, 02: 4.8K, 03: 9.6K, 04: 19.2K
Host Link, no-
protocol, proto-
col macros
DM 6556
(port 1)
08 to 15 Frame format
Start
1 bit
Host Link, no-
protocol, proto-
col macros
Length
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
7 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Stop
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
2 bit
2 bit
2 bit
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
None
Even
Odd
00:
01:
02:
03:
04:
05:
06:
07:
08:
09:
10:
11:
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
None
DM 6552
(port 2)
00 to 15 Transmission delay
Host Link, no-
0000 to 9999 (BCD): Set in units of 10 ms, e.g., a setting of 0001 equals 10 ms protocol
DM 6557
(port 1)
DM 6553
(port 2)
00 to 07 Host Link unit number
Host Link
00 to 31 (BCD)
08 to 11 Start code enable
0: Disable; 1: Set
No-protocol
No-protocol
DM 6558
(port 1)
12 to 15 End code enable
0: Disable (number of bytes received)
1: Set (specified end code)
2: CR, LF
DM 6554
(port 2)
00 to 07 Start code (No-protocol)
00 to FF (hexadecimal)
No-protocol
No-protocol
08 to 15 When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6553 or DM 6558 are set to 0 Hex:
Number of bytes received
DM 6559
(port 1)
00: Default setting (256 bytes)
01 to FF: 1 to 255 bytes
When bits 12 to 15 of DM 6553 or DM 6558 are set to 1 Hex:
End code (No-protocol)
00 to FF (hexadecimal)
29
PC Setup Settings
Section 3-3
3-3 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information
Control bits, flags, and status information for the Serial Communications Board
is available in the Inner Board Slot 1 area. The addresses in this area are as fol-
lows:
Inner Board Slot 1 Area: IR 200 to IR 207
The following bits are often used in Protocol Macro Mode. Refer to 5-6 Control
Bits, Flags, and Status Information for details.
Word
Bits
00
Function
Communications
modes
IR 200
All modes
Serial Communications Board Hardware Error Flag
Board Identification Error Flag (hardware error)
Protocol Data Error Flag
01
02
Protocol macro
03 to 10 Not used.
11
Port 2 Protocol Macro Execution Error Flag
12
Port 1 Protocol Macro Execution Error Flag
Port 2 PC Setup Error Flag
Port 1 PC Setup Error Flag
PC Setup Error Flag
All modes
All modes
13
14
15
IR 201
Port 1
Error Code
00 to 03
0: Normal operation 1: Parity error
2: Framing error
5: Timeout error
3: Overrun error
4: FCS error
6: Checksum error
7: Command error
04
05
Communications Error Flag
Transmission Enabled Flag
Host Link or
No-protocol
Turns ON when transmission is enabled, OFF when transmissions
are being processed for TXD(––).
Use with flag as an execution condition for TXD(––) when using
No-protocol or Host Link Mode.
06
07
Reception Completed Flag
Turns ON when receptions for RXD(––) have been completed in
No-protocol Mode.
Reception Overflow Flag
In No-protocol Mode, turns ON when the next data is received before
previous data is read out using RXD(––).
Sequence Abort Completion Flag
Protocol macro
All modes
Port 2
08 to 11
Error Code
0: Normal operation 1: Parity error
2: Framing error
5: Timeout error
3: Overrun error
4: FCS error
6: Checksum error
7: Command error
12
13
Communications Error Flag
Transmission Enabled Flag
Host Link or
No-protocol
Turns ON when transmission is enabled, OFF when transmissions
are being processed for TXD(––).
Use with flag as an execution condition for TXD(––) when using
No-protocol or Host Link Mode.
14
15
Reception Completed Flag
Turns ON when receptions for RXD(––) have been completed in
No-protocol Mode.
Reception Overflow Flag
In No-protocol Mode, turns ON when the next data is received before
previous data is read out using RXD(––).
Sequence Abort Completion Flag
Protocol macro
30
PC Setup Settings
Section 3-3
Word
Bits
Function
Communications
modes
IR 202 00 to 07 Port 1
00 to 15
Communicating with PT Flags (Bits 00 to 07 are flags for PTs 0 to 7.) NT Link in 1:N mode
Repeat counter PV (00 to FF hexadecimal)
Reception counter
Protocol macro
No-protocol
The number of bytes of data received in No-protocol Mode (Hex). Reset
to 0 when data is read out using RXD(––).
IR 203 00 to 07 Port 2
00 to 15
Communicating with PT Flags (Bits 00 to 07 are flags for PTs 0 to 7.) NT Link in 1:N mode
Repeat counter PV (00 to FF hexadecimal)
Reception counter
Protocol macro
No-protocol
The number of bytes of data received in No-protocol Mode (Hex). Reset
to 0 when data is read out using RXD(––).
IR 204
Tracing Flag
Protocol macro
00
01
Port 1
Port 2
02 to 07 Not used.
Protocol Macro Error Code
0: Normal operation
2: Sequence number error
4: Protocol data grammar error
08 to 11 Port 1
12 to 15 Port 2
1: No protocol macro function
3: Data read/write area overflow
5: Protocol macro execution error during port initialization
Completed Reception Case Number
Completed Step Number
IR 205
IR 206
IR 207
Port 1
Protocol macro
Protocol macro
00 to 03
04 to 07
08 to 14
15
Not used.
IR 204 (bits 08 to 11) Data Stored Flag
0: No data stored; 1: Data stored
Port 2
00 to 03
04 to 07
08 to 14
15
Completed Reception Case Number
Completed Step Number
Not used.
IR 204 (bits 12 to 15) Data Stored Flag
0: No data stored; 1: Data stored
Serial Communications Port Restart Bits
Continuous Trace Start/Stop Bits
Shot Trace Start/Stop Bits
All modes
00
01
02
03
04
05
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Port 1
Port 2
Protocol macro
06 to 07 Not used.
Port 1
08
Protocol Macro Executing Flag (instruction execution)
No-protocol or
Protocol macro
Protocol macro
09
10
11
12
Transfer Step Error Processing Flag
Sequence End Completion Flag
Forced Abort Bit
Port 2
Protocol Macro Executing Flag (instruction execution)
No-protocol or
Protocol macro
Protocol macro
13
14
15
Transfer Step Error Processing Flag
Sequence End Completion Flag
Forced Abort Bit
IR 208 00 to 15 Not used.
---
to
IR 215
31
PC Setup Settings
Section 3-3
Word
Bit(s)
15
Function
SR 254
Inner Board Error Flag
Turns ON when an error occurs in an Inner Board mounted in slot 1 or slot 2. The error code for
slot 1 is stored in AR 0400 to AR 0407 and the error code for slot 2 is stored in AR 0408 to AR
0415.
AR 04
00 to 07 Slot 1 Inner Board Error Code (Hex)
00: Normal
01, 02: Hardware error
10: Serial Communications Board error
32
SECTION 4
Host Link Communications
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use Host Link communications.
4-1 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Host Link Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Types of Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Standard Cables from Board to Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 Example Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-3 Host Link Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-4 End Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Changes from Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 RS-422A/485 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
35
36
36
39
39
44
45
45
48
51
52
53
53
55
33
Connections
Section 4-1
4-1 Host Link Communications
A Host Link System can be used to send C-mode Host Link commands from a
host (e.g., personal computer or PT) to a PC to read/write I/O memory, control
operating modes, etc. The PC can also use the TXD(––) instruction to send spe-
cified I/O memory data to the host for slave-initiated communications.
Refer to the CQM1H-series PC Programming Manual for details on C-mode
commands.
Host-initiated
Communications
Communications in a Host Link System are normally started by a host computer.
Command
Host computer
CQM1H-series PC
Response
The host sends a command to the PC. The PC processes the command and re-
turns a response to the host computer. This process is repeated, allowing the
host computer to monitor and control PC operation.
Slave-initiated
Communications
The PC can also initiate communications with the host to send data, as may be
necessary when errors occur on the line controlled by the PC or to confirm the
operating status of the host.
ASCII data
Host computer
CQM1H-series PC
When the TXD(––) instruction is executed in the ladder program of the PC, the
contents of the I/O memory words specified for the instruction is converted to
ASCII and sent to the host. There is no response to this transmission.
TXD(––) Instruction
TXD(48) reads N bytes of data beginning from words S, converts it to ASCII, and
outputs the data from the specified port as a Host Link command. Up to 122 by-
tes (61 words) of data can be sent. Refer to theCQM1H-series PC Programming
Manual for details.
TXD(48)
S
C
N
First source word
Control word
Number of bytes: 4 digits BCD, 0000 to 0061
The format of the Host Link command generated by TXD(––) is shown below.
The command header code is EX and is followed by the specified data con-
verted to ASCII. There is no response to the EX command.
1
0
x 10 x 10
:
↵
@
E
X
Send data (ASCII)
Node No.
Header
code
122 characters max.
FCS
Terminator
Note If the PC is sending a response to a Host Link command when the TXD(––) in-
struction is executed, the EX command for TXD(––) will be sent after the re-
sponse.
If TXD(––) is executed in Host Link Mode, the specified data is converted to
ASCII before being sent. If TXD(––) is executed in No-protocol Mode, the speci-
fied data is sent without conversion.
34
Application Procedure
Section 4-1
4-1-1 Host Link Communications
Host Link communications are supported by all CQM1H-series CPU Units. A
Serial Communications Board can be used to connect a single PC to more than
one host computer for Host Link communications, including slave-initiated com-
munications. Host Link communications provide the following features.
Connect One Computer
to Multiple PCs
An RS-422A/485 port can be used to connect one host computer to up to 32
CQM1H-series PCs.
Computer Monitoring
and Control of PCs
Host Link communications enable the host computer to monitor or control PC
operations and to read and write I/O memory in the PCs.
Redundant Error
Checking
Both vertical and horizontal (FCS) parity checks are performed on communica-
tions data to achieve essentially error-free communications. Combining error
checking and retry processing goes one step further to eliminate nearly all the
effects of communications problems.
Simultaneous Usage of
Both Ports
The Serial Communications Board provides two serial communications ports
that can be used simultaneously to connect to two different networks of host
computers in addition to the connections made directly from the built-in CPU
Unit ports.
Slave-initiated
Communications
Communications can be performed either by sending a command from a host
and having the PC return a response, or by sending data from a PC to the host.
Note A Host Link connection can also be used to connect the PC to a Programming
Device running on a personal computer. The following two modes can be used to
connect to computers running Programming Devices. Only the Host Link Mode
can be used for the Serial Communications Board.
Serial communications
mode
Features
Host Link
Functions as a communications protocol with standard
host computers.
Either 1:1 or 1:N connections are possible.
Slower than a peripheral bus connection.
Connection is possible through a modem or Optical Link
Adapter, and long-distance and 1:N connections are
possible using RS-422A/485.
Peripheral bus
Enables high-speed communications. A peripheral bus
connection is thus the normal mode used to connect to a
computer running the CX-Programmer.
Only 1:1 connections are possible.
With the CQM1H, the baud rate of the Programming
Device is detected when the connection is made.
35
Connections
Section 4-2
4-1-2 Host Link Specifications
Item
Description
Communications mode Half-duplex (Full-duplex for slave-initiated communications)
Synchronization
Start-stop (asynchronous mode)
Baud rate (see note 1)
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports:
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
Default setting: 9,600 bps
Communications
RS-232C port: 15 m max. (see note 2)
distance (see note 1)
RS-442A/485 port: 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. T-branch
lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Connection
configuration
RS-232C port: 1:1 (1:N (N = 32 Units max.) is possible using an Converting Link Adapters.)
RS-422A/485 port: 1:N (N = 32 Units max.)
Number of connected
Units
32 Units max. (unit numbers 0 to 31; unit number 0 is set for 1:1 connection)
Frame structure
C-mode Host Link commands
Header:
Data:
@, address: (Host Link unit number) 0 to 31 (BCD)
Header code + text
Error check code:FCS
Terminator:
*+CR
Error check codes
Vertical parity: Even, odd. or none
FCS (horizontal parity converted to ASCII)
Command flow and
support
Command flow
Commands
Contents
Host computer to C-mode Host Link
PC
1:1 or 1:N communications with directly connected
PCs (The specified frame format must be prepared
on the host computer and then sent.)
commands
Data only
PC to host
computer
Communications using TXD(––) from CPU Unit.
No response from host.
Connection between the host computer and PC
must be 1:1.
Transmission delay
time
0 to 99,990 ms (set in PC Setup in 10-ms units)
Host computer to PC
The delay is from the return of a
response by the PC until a response
can be returned to the next command
received from the host.
PC to host computer
The delay is from the beginning of
TXD(––) execution until execution of
the next TXD(––) can be started.
Note 1. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by con-
nected devices.
2. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m.
4-2 Application Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC.
2. Mount the Board.
3. Connections
Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422 cables. The TERM
and WIRE switches on the front panel of the Board must be set if the Board is
connected using the RS-4522A/485 port.
The host computer can be connected to a PC 1:1, or NT-AL001-E Convert-
ing Link Adapters can be used to convert from RS-232C to RS-422A/485 to
connect the host computer to PCs 1:N. Standard connection examples are
36
Application Procedure
Section 4-2
shown below. Perform other processing as required, such as setting
switches on the external device(s).
Serial Communications Board
RS-232C
3G2A9-AL001
RS-422A
/485
RS-232C
RS-422A
/485
NT-AL001-E
Terminating resistance
ON, 5-V power supply
required
Terminating resistance
ON
The CPU Unit can be connected to a Programming Console, the CX-Pro-
grammer, or the CX-Protocol as required.
4. Turn ON power.
5. Set the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board.
Use a Programming Console, the CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to
set the settings in the PC Setup between DM 6550 and DM 6559.
Note The settings stored in these words are read constantly; the PC does
not need to be restarted or reset when changes are made to the set-
tings. They will be updated automatically as soon as they are
changed.
The following table shows the standard settings.
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Default
setting
Function
DM 6555 DM 6550
00 to 03 0 Hex
Standard port settings
(1 start bit, 7-bit data, even par-
ity, 2 stop bits, 9,600 bps)
04 to 07 0 Hex
08 to 11 ---
CTS control disabled
Not used.
12 to 15 0 Hex
Communications mode
0: Host Link
DM 6556 DM 6551
00 to 07 ---
08 to 15 ---
Baud rate: invalid
Frame format: Invalid
DM 6557 DM 6552 00 to 15 0000 Hex Transmission delay: 0 ms
DM 6558 DM 6553
00 to 07 00 BCD
08 to 11 ---
Node number 00
Not used.
12 to 15 ---
Not used.
37
Connections
Section 4-2
6. Program the host and the CPU Unit and execute the programs.
Host-initiated Communications: Host Link Commands
A program must be prepared in the host to send Host Link commands to the
PC and receive responses.
Program to send
commands and
receive responses
Serial Communications Board
Host
Response
Command
PC-initiated Communications: TXD(––) Instruction
TXD(––) must be included in the ladder program to send data from the PC to
the host.
Program to send
responses
Host
Data
Serial Communications Board
TXD(––)
CPU Unit
38
Application Procedure
Section 4-3
4-3 Connections
4-3-1 Types of Connection
Port connections for Host Link communications are shown in the following table.
Up to 32 nodes can be connected for 1:N connections.
Port
Configura-
tion
Schematic diagram
RS-232C
1:1
RS-232C
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E
NT-AL001-E
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
Resistance ON
RS-232C
1:N
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
5-V power
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
1:1
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
5-V power
Resistance ON
3G2A9-AL001
1:N
RS-422A
/485
RS-422A
/485
NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
5-V power
Resistance ON
Note 1. Four-wire connections must be used for RS-422A/485 connections with
Host Link communications.
2. “Resistance ON” indicates the terminating resistance must be turned ON.
3. “5-V power” indicates that a 5-V power supply is required for the Link Adapt-
er. Refer to the Link Adapter manual for details. A 5-V power supply is not
required for a Link Adapter connected to a Serial Communications Board
because power is supplied from pin 6 of the connector.
4. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m.
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic
connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures
be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-pair cables.
Refer to 2-3 Wiring for actual wiring methods.
39
Connections
Section 4-3
Host Computer Connections
1:1 Connections Using RS-232C Ports
IBM PC/AT or Compatible Computers
Serial Communications
Board
Computer
Signal
Pin
Pin Signal
FG
CD
SD
RD
RD
SD
DTR
SG
DSR
RTS
CTS
CI
RS-232C
interface
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
RS-232C
interface
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (female)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Using NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters
Serial Communications
Board
Computer
Signal
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Signal
Shield
RS-232C
(See note)
Pin
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
RS-422A
RS-232C
FG
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
FG
SD
RD
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
RTS
Interface
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
Terminal block D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
5-V (+)
power (–)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting
Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
Caution Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything but the
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Using this power supply for any other external device
may damage the Serial Communications Board or the external device.
!
40
Application Procedure
Section 4-3
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
Serial Communications
Board
Computer
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-232C
Shield
Signal
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
Signal
Pin
(See note)
RS-422A
FG
SD
FG
SD
NC
SD
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
RD
RD
RD
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Interface
RTS
CTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF (no terminating
resistance)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
5-V (+)
power (–)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Serial Communications
Board
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
RS-232C
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
(See note)
FG
SD
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
RD
RS-232C
Interface
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting
Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
41
Connections
Section 4-3
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Serial Communications
Board
Computer
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Pin Signal
Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
RS-422A
/ 485 In-
terface
Shield
FG
SD
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
RD
RS-232C
Interface
Hood
RTS
CTS
5V
Terminating resistance ON
4-wire
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block
connector (male)
5-V (+)
power (–)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
42
Application Procedure
Section 4-3
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Serial Communications
Board
3G2A9-AL001 Link Adapter
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Computer
Shield
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
Signal
Shield
FG
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
NC
SD
RD
SD
RS-232C RD
Interface
RTS
CTS
Hood
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
Terminating resistance OFF
4-wire
Signal
Pin
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block
connector (male)
Serial Communications
Board
5-V (+)
power (–)
Shield
Pin Signal
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Hood
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Terminating resistance ON
(last node)
4-wire
Serial Communications
Board
Computer
Signal
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-422A Pin Signal
Shield
RS-232C
Pin Signal Signal Pin
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
FG
SD
NC
SD
RD
RD
RS-232C
Hood
Interface RTS
CTS
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
Terminating resistance OFF
4-wire
DSR
DTR
SG
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block
connector (male)
Serial Communications
Board
5-V (+)
power (–)
Pin Signal
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Hood
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Terminating resistance ON
(last node)
4-wire
43
Connections
Section 4-3
4-3-2 Standard Cables from Board to Personal Computer
Board port
Computer
Computer
port
Network type
Model
Length
Remarks
RS-232C port IBM PT/AT or
D-sub, 9-pin
male
Host Link
(SYSMAC
WAY)
Conforms to
ESD.
XW2Z-200S-CV
XW2Z-500S-CV
2 m
5 m
(D-sub, 9-pin
female)
compatible
The following Connecting Cables can be used to connect an RS-232C to the
computer.
Board port
Computer
Computer
port
Network type
Model
Length
Remarks
RS-232C port IBM PT/AT or
D-sub, 9-pin
male
Host Link
(SYSMAC
WAY)
---
XW2Z-200S-V
XW2Z-500S-V
2 m
5 m
(D-sub, 9-pin
female)
compatible
Preparing an RS-232C Cable for the Computer
The following cables and connectors can be used to manufacture a cable to con-
nect the Serial Communications Board to the PC.
Applicable Connectors
The following connector connects to the Serial Communication Board.
Name
Model
XM2A-0901
XM2S-0911-E
Specifications
Used together
Socket
Hood
9-pin male
(provided with
Board).
For 9-pin socket,
metric screws,
ESD
countermeasures
The following connector connects to an IBM PC/AT or compatible
Name
Model
XM2D-0901
XM2S-0913
Specifications
Used together.
Socket
Hood
9-pin male
For 9-pin socket,
inch screws
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
(9-pin, male)
RS-232C port on Serial
Communications Board
CQM1H CPU Unit
Socket:
XM2D-0901
(9-pin, female)
Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended cable
Hood: XM2S-0911-E Socket: XM2A-0901
Hood and Socket provided with Board.
Recommended Cables
UL2464 AWG28 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
AWG28 5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P 28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
44
Application Procedure
Section 4-4
4-4 Host Link Communications
4-4-1 Protocol
Host Link communications are executed by means of an exchange of com-
mands and responses between the host computer and the PC. The command or
response data that is transferred in one exchange is known as a frame and one
frame can contain up to 131 characters of data.
The frame formats for Host Link commands transmitted from the host computer
and responses returned from the PC are described below. The PC automatically
returns an ASCII-code response when it receives an ASCII-code command
from the host computer. The host computer must have a program that controls
the transmission and reception of the commands and responses.
Command Frame Format
When transmitting a command from the host computer, prepare the command
data in the format shown below.
1
0
x 10 x 10
@
ꢀ
↵
Node No.
Header
code
Text
FCS
Terminator
The header code and text depend on the Host Link command being transmitted.
When a compound command is transmitted, there will be a second sub-header
code.
The FCS (Frame Check Sequence) code is calculated at the host computer and
set in the command frame. The FCS calculation is described later in this section.
The command frame may be up to 131 characters long. A command of 132 char-
acters or more must be divided into more than one frame. To split the command,
use a carriage return delimiter (↵, CHR$(13)) instead of a terminator. A termina-
tor must be used at the end of the last frame.
When dividing commands such as WR, WL, WC, or WD that execute write op-
erations, be careful not to divide into separate frames data that is to be written
into a single word. You must divide frames so that they coincide with the divisions
between words.
Item
Function
@
An “@” symbol must be placed at the beginning of every command.
Destination
Node No.
Identify the PCs by the Host Link node numbers (0 to 31) set in DM
6558 and DM 6553 of the PC Setup.
Header code Set the 2-character command code.
Text
Set the command parameters.
FCS
Set a 2-character Frame Check Sequence code.
Terminator
Set two characters, “ꢀ” and the carriage return (CHR$(13)) to
indicate the end of the command.
Normal Response Frame
Format
A normal response from the PC is returned in the format shown below. Prepare a
program at the host so that the response data can be interpreted and processed.
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
ꢀ
↵
Node No.
Header
code
End code
Text
FCS
Terminator
The header code and text depend on the Host Link command that was received.
The end code indicates the completion status of the command (e.g., whether or
not an error has occurred).
45
Connections
Section 4-4
When the response is longer than 131 characters, it will be divided into more
than one frame. A carriage return delimiter (↵, CHR$(13)) instead of a terminator
will automatically be set at the end of the frame. A terminator will be set at the end
of the last frame.
Item
Function
@
An “@” symbol is placed at the beginning of every response.
Local Host
Link Node
No.
The PC’s Host Link node number set in DM 6553 or DM 6558 of
the PC Setup.
Header code The 2-character command code is returned.
End code
Text
The status of command execution is returned (normal end code).
The results of the command are returned.
FCS
The 2-character Frame Check Sequence code is returned.
Terminator
Two characters, “ꢀ” and the carriage return (CHR$(13)) indicate the
end of the response.
Error Response Frame
Format
An error response from the PC is returned in the format shown below. Prepare a
program at the host so that the response data can be interpreted and processed.
1
0
1
0
x 10 x 10
x 16 x 16
@
ꢀ
↵
Node No.
Header
code
End code
FCS
Terminator
The header code and text depend on the Host Link command that was received.
The end code indicates the completion status of the command (e.g., whether or
not an error has occurred).
Item
Function
@
An “@” symbol is placed at the beginning of every response.
Local Host
Link Node
No.
The PC’s Host Link node number set in DM 6553 or DM 6558 of
the PC Setup.
Header code The 2-character command code is returned.
End code
FCS
The status of command execution is returned (error code).
The 2-character Frame Check Sequence code is returned.
Terminator
Two characters, “ꢀ” and the carriage return (CHR$(13)) indicate the
end of the response.
FCS (Frame Check
Sequence)
When a frame is transmitted, an FCS code is placed just before the delimiter or
terminator in order to check whether an error has occurred in the transmission.
The FCS is 8-bit data converted into two ASCII characters. The 8-bit data is the
result of an EXCLUSIVE OR performed on the data from the beginning of the
frame until the end of the text in that frame (i.e., just before the FCS). Calculating
the FCS each time a frame is received and checking the result against the FCS
46
Application Procedure
Section 4-4
that is included in the frame makes it possible to check for data errors in the
frame.
@
1
0
R
R
0
0
0
1
4
2
ꢀ
↵
Header code
Text
FCS
Terminator
Node No.
FCS calculation range
ASCII code
@
1
40
31
30
52
0100
EOR
0011
EOR
0011
EOR
0000
0001
0000
0010
0
R
0101
1
31
0011
0100
↓
0001
0010
↓
Calculation
result
Converted to hexadecimal.
Handled as ASCII characters.
4
2
Communications
Sequence
The right to send a frame is called the “transmission right.” The Unit that has the
transmission right is the one that can send a frame at any given time. The trans-
mission right is traded back and forth between the host computer and the PC
each time a frame is transmitted. An example sequence for multiframe commu-
nications between the host computer and PC is described below. Multiframe
communications are handled by exchanging delimiters and then using termina-
tors to indicate the last frame.
• The host computer sets a delimiter at the end of the first command frame and
transmits the frame.
• When the PC receives the delimiter, it returns the same delimiter to the host
computer.
• After receiving the delimiter from the PC, the host computer transmits the next
frame.
• Delimiters are used to send the rest of the frames.
• When the host computer sends the last command frame, it sets a terminator at
the end.
• When the PC receives a frame with a terminator, it sends the response.
• If there was more than one response frame, delimiters would be used here too.
Frame 2 (command)
Frame 3 (command)
Frame 1 (command)
@ Unit No.
Header code
Host
Text
Text
Text
computer
FCS
FCS
FCS
Delimiter
Delimiter
Terminator
Delimiter
Delimiter
@ Unit No.
Header code
End code
PC
Text
FCS
Terminator
Frame (response)
47
Connections
Section 4-4
Using the TXD(––)
Instruction
The TXD(––) instruction can be used to transmit data from the PC’s data area to
the host computer. There is no response from the host computer. The TXD(––)
instruction will be executed after the response has been transmitted if TXD(––)
is executed while a response to a Host Link command is being returned to the
host computer.
Host
computer
No response
@ Unit No.
Header code
PC
Text
FCS
Terminator
4-4-2 Example Programs
Command Transmission
The following type of program must be prepared in the host computer to receive
the data. This program allows the computer to read and display the data re-
ceived from the PC while a Host Link read command is being executed to read
data from the PC.
10 ’CQM1H SAMPLE PROGRAM FOR EXCEPTION
20 CLOSE 1
30 CLS
40 OPEN ”COM:E73” AS #1
50 ꢀKEYIN
60 INPUT ”DATA ––––––––”,S$
70 IF S$=” ” THEN GOTO 190
80 PRINT ”SEND DATA = ”;S$
90 ST$=S$
100 INPUT ”SEND OK? Y or N?=”,B$
110 IF B$=”Y” THEN GOTO 130 ELSE GOTO ꢀKEYIN
120 S$=ST$
130 PRINT #1,S$
140 INPUT #1,R$
’Sends command to PC
’Receives response from PC
150 PRINT ”RECV DATA = ”;R$
160 IF MID$(R$,4,2)=”EX” THEN GOTO 210 ’Identifies command from PC
170 IF RIGHT$(R$,1)<>”ꢀ” THEN S$=” ”:GOTO 130
180 GOTO ꢀKEYIN
190 CLOSE 1
200 END
210 PRINT ”EXCEPTION!! DATA”
220 GOTO 140
Example Program for
FCS
This example shows a BASIC subroutine program for executing an FCS check
on a frame received by the host computer.
400 *FCSCHECK
410 L=LEN(RESPONSE$)
420 Q=0:FCSCK$=” ”
430 A$=RIGHT$(RESPONSE$,1)
440 PRINT RESPONSE$,A$,L
450 IF A$=”*” THEN LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)-3
ELSE LENGS=LEN(RESPONSE$)-2
460 FCSP$=MID$(RESPONSE$,LENGS+1,2) ’.... FCS data received
470 FOR I=1 TO LENGS ’...........Number of characters in FCS
48
Application Procedure
Section 4-4
480 Q=ASC(MID$(RESPONSE$,I,1)) XOR Q
490 NEXT I
500 FCSD$=HEX$(Q)
510 IF LEN(FCSD$)=1 THEN FCSD$=”0”+FCSD$ ’FCS result
520 IF FCSD$<>FCSP$ THEN FCSCK$=”ERR”
530 PRINT”FCSD$=”;FCSD$,”FCSP$=”;FCSP$,”FCSCK$=”;FCSCK$
540 RETURN
Note 1. Normal reception data includes the FCS, delimiter or terminator, and so on.
When an error occurs in transmission, however the FCS or some other data
may not be included. Be sure to program the system to cover this possibility.
2. In this program example, the CR code (CHR$(13)) is not entered for RE-
SPONSE$. When including the CR code, make the changes in lines 430
and 450.
TXD(––) Application
Example
This example shows a program for using the RS-232C port in the Host Link
mode to transmit 10 bytes of data (DM 0000 to DM 0004) to a computer. From
DM 0000 to DM 0004, “1234” is stored in every word.
The default values are assumed for all of the PC Setup (i.e., the RS-232C port is
used in Host Link mode, the node number is 00, and the standard communica-
tions parameters are used.)
00100 20105
@TXD(––)
If SR 20105 (the Transmission Ready Flag) is
ON when IR 00100 turns ON, ten bytes of
data (DM 0000 to DM 0004) will be trans-
DM 0000
#0100
#0010
mitted.
The transmitted data will appear on the host
computer’s screen as follows, assuming the
text being sent is “1234” in all specified words:
@00EX1234123412341234123459*CR
Communications Control
Signals and
Communications Timing
The PC Setup has a setting that can be used to enable CTS control. If CTS con-
trol is enabled, processing will be placed on standby until the CS input turns ON
after the RS output ON signal is sent for a transmission from the Serial Commu-
nications Board. Connect the RS output from the host to the CS input on the
Board and perform flow control at the host.
49
Connections
Section 4-4
Setting a Transmission
Delay
A transmission delay can be set in the PC Setup to create a minimum interval
between sending a response from the PC to a Host Link command until the be-
ginning of sending the response to the next command.
The delay is not used in the response to the first command. The delay will affect
responses to other commands only if the normal time for the response comes
before the time set for the transmission delay has expired.
If the delay time has already expired when the next command is received, the
response will be spent immediately. If the delay time has not expired, the re-
sponse will be delayed until the time set for the transmission delay has expired.
The operation of the transmission delay for responses to host commands is illus-
trated below.
Transmission delay
Response sent
Transmission delay
Response sent
Transmission delay
Response sent
Response sent
Time
Response to
1st command
Response to
2nd command
Response to
3rd command
Response to
4th command
The transmission delay will also be effective in PC-initiated communications as
a minimum interval between sending commands to the host.
The delay is not used in sending the first command. The delay will affect other
commands only if the time set for the transmission delay has not expired when
the next command is ready to be sent.
If the delay time has already expired when the next command is ready, the com-
mand will be spent immediately. If the delay time has not expired, the command
will be delayed until the time set for the transmission delay has expired.
The operation of the transmission delay for PC-initiated communications is illus-
trated below.
Transmission delay
Command sent
Transmission delay
Command sent
Transmission delay
Command sent
Command sent
Time
1st TXD(––)
command
2nd TXD(––)
command
3rd TXD(––)
command
4th TXD(––)
command
50
Application Procedure
Section 4-4
4-4-3 Host Link Commands
The Host Link commands listed in the following table can be sent to the CQM1H
for Host Link communications. Refer to the CQM1H-series Programming Manu-
al for details.
PC mode
MON
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
---
Header code
RR
Name
RUN
Valid
PRG
Valid
IR/SR AREA READ
LR AREA READ
HR AREA READ
TC PV READ
RL
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Not valid
---
RH
RC
RG
RD
RE
RJ
Valid
Valid
Valid
TC STATUS READ
DM AREA READ
EM AREA READ
AR AREA READ
IR/SR AREA WRITE
LR AREA WRITE
HR AREA WRITE
TC PV WRITE
Valid
Valid
Valid
WR
WL
WH
WC
WG
WD
WE
WJ
R#
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
TC STATUS WRITE
DM AREA WRITE
EM AREA WRITE
AR AREA WRITE
SV READ 1
R$
Valid
SV READ 2
R%
W#
W$
W%
MS
SC
MF
KS
KR
FK
Valid
SV READ 3
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
SV CHANGE 1
SV CHANGE 2
SV CHANGE 3
STATUS READ
STATUS WRITE
ERROR READ
FORCED SET
Valid
Valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Not valid
Valid
FORCED RESET
MULTIPLE FORCED SET/RESET
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
PC MODEL READ
KC
MM
TS
Valid
TEST
RP
WP
QQ
XZ
Valid
PROGRAM READ
Not valid
Valid
PROGRAM WRITE
COMPOUND COMMAND
ABORT (command only)
INITIALIZE (command only)
TXD RESPONSE (response only)
Undefined command (response only)
Valid
ꢀꢀ
Valid
EX
IC
Valid
---
51
Connections
Section 4-4
4-4-4 End Codes
The response (end) codes listed in the following table are returned in the re-
sponse frame for Host Link commands. When two or more errors occur, the end
code for the first error will be returned.
End
Contents
Probable cause
Corrective measures
code
00
01
Normal completion
No problem exists.
---
Check the relation between the
command and the PC mode.
Not executable in RUN
mode
The command that was sent cannot be
executed when the PC is in RUN mode.
02
Not executable in MON-
ITOR mode
The command that was sent cannot be
executed when the PC is in MONITOR
mode.
03
04
UM write-protected
Address over
The PC’s UM is write-protected.
Turn OFF pin 1 of the CPU Unit’s
DIP switch (SW1).
The program address setting in an read or
write command is above the highest program
address.
Check the program.
13
14
15
FCS error
The FCS is wrong.
Check the FCS calculation meth-
od. If there was influence from
noise, transfer the command
again.
Format error
The command format is wrong, or a com-
mand that cannot be divided has been di-
vided, or the frame length is smaller than the
minimum length for the applicable command.
Check the format and transfer the
command again.
Entry number data error
The data is outside of the specified range or Correct the data and transfer the
too long.
command again.
Hexadecimal data has not been specified.
16
18
Command not supported
Frame length error
The operand specified in an SV Read or SV Check search data or the search
Change command does not exist in the pro- starting point.
gram.
The maximum frame length of 132 bytes was Check the command and divide it
exceeded.
into multiple frames if necessary.
If the frame exceeds 280 bytes, the Recep-
tion Overflow Flag will be turned ON and
there will not be a response.
19
Not executable
The read SV exceeded 9,999, or an I/O
memory batch read was executed when
items to read were not registered for com-
pound command.
Register items to read before at-
tempting batch read.
23
A3
User memory protected
The UM is write-protected.
Turn OFF the write-protection
Correct the command data and
transfer the command again.
Aborted due to FCS error in An FCS error occurred in the second or later
transmission data
frame, or there were two bytes or less of
data in an intermediate or final frame for mul-
tiple writing.
A4
A5
Aborted due to format error
in transmission data
The command format did not match the
number of bytes in the second or later frame.
Aborted due to entry num-
ber data error in transmis-
sion data
There was an entry number data error in the
second or later frame, a data length error, or
data was not set in hexadecimal.
A8
Aborted due to frame length The length of the second and later frames
error in transmission data exceeded the maximum of 128 bytes.
52
Application Procedure
Section 4-5
A response will not be received with some errors, regardless of the command.
These errors are listed in the following table.
Error
PC operation
Parity, overrun, or framing error during
command reception. (Same even for
commands address to other Units.)
The Communications Error Flag will be turned ON, an error code will
be registered, and receptions will be reset. (The error will be cleared
automatically if communications restart normally.)
The Communications Error Flags are as follows:
Peripheral port: AR 0812
Built-in RS-232C port: AR 0804
Serial Communications Board port 1: IR 20104,
Serial Communications Board port 2: IR 20112
A command is received that does not have the The command will be discarded.
@ character at the beginning of the first frame.
Incorrect node number (Not a local unit or over The command will be discarded.
31)
The data in an intermediate or final frame for
multiframe writes is 2 bytes or longer.
An FCS error will occur.
4-5 Changes from Previous Products
There are differences between Host Link Systems created using the CQM1H-
series Serial Communications Boards in comparison to Host Link Systems
created with Host Link Units and CPU Units in other PC product series. These
differences are described in this section.
4-5-1 RS-232C Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an exist-
ing Host Link System to one using an RS-232C port on a CQM1H-series CPU
Unit or Serial Communications Boards.
Changes required for CQM1H-series product
Previous
products
Model number
Wiring
Other
C-series Host
Link Units
3G2A5-LK201-E
C500-LK203
The connector has been
changed from a 25-pin to a
9-pin connector.
The following changes are necessary for
systems that sync with ST1, ST2, and RT.
Synchronized transfers will no longer be
possible.
3G2A6-LK201-E
The CQM1H-series
products do not support the
ST1, ST2, and RT signals
and wiring them is not
required.
Half-duplex transmissions will be possible
with the CQM1H-series product, but the host
computer’s communications program,
hardware, or both will need to be altered.
The following changes are necessary for
systems that did not sync with ST1, ST2,
and RT.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary, however,
to change programs to allow for different text
lengths in frames or different CQM1H
command specifications. (See note.)
C200H-LK201
The connector has been
changed from a 25-pin to a
9-pin connector.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary, however,
to change programs to allow for different text
lengths in frames or different CQM1H
command specifications. (See note.)
53
Connections
Section 4-5
Previous
products
Model number
SRM1
Changes required for CQM1H-series product
Wiring
Other
C-series CPU
Units
No changes have been
made in wiring.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary, however,
to change programs to allow for different
CQM1H command specifications.
CPM1
CPM1A
CPM2A/CPM2C
CQM1-CPUjj-E
C200HS-CPUjj-E
C200HX/HG/HE-
CPUjj-E
C200HW-COMjj-E
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary, however,
to change programs to allow for different
CQM1H command specifications.
CS1-series CPU CS1G/H-CPUjj
Unit
No changes have been
made in wiring.
CS1-series
Serial
CS1W-SCB21/41
CS1W-SCU21
No changes have been
made in wiring.
Communications
Board or Unit
CVM1 or
CV-series CPU
Units
CVM1/CV-CPUjj
No changes have been
made in wiring.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary, however,
to change programs to allow for different
CQM1H command specifications.
CVM1 or
CV-series Host
Link Unit
CV500-LK201
Port 1:
The following changes are necessary for
half-duplex transmissions that use CD.
The connector has been
changed from a 25-pin to a
9-pin connector.
Check the system for timing problems when
using SEND(90), RECV(98), or CMND(––) to
initiate communications from the PC or timing
problems in sending commands from the host
Port 2 set for RS-232C:
The SG signal has been
changed from pin 7 to pin 9. computer. If necessary, switch to full-duplex
transmissions.
The following changes are necessary for
full-duplex transmissions that do not use
CD.
Half-duplex It may be possible to use the host
computer programs without alteration as long
as the same communications settings (e.g.,
baud rate) are used. It may be necessary,
however, to change programs to allow for
different CQM1H command specifications.
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text
lengths) when using C-mode Host Link commands is different for C-series Host
Link Units and CQM1H-series Serial Communications Boards. A host computer
program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly
if used for CQM1H-series PCs. Check the host computer program before using it
and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths.
54
Application Procedure
Section 4-5
4-5-2 RS-422A/485 Ports
Take the following differences into consideration when changing from an exist-
ing Host Link System to one using an RS-422A/485 port on a CQM1H-series
Serial Communications Board.
Changes required for CQM1H-series product
Previous
products
Model number
Wiring
Other
C-series Host
Link Units
3G2A5-LK201-E
C200H-LK202
Wiring pins have been
changed as shown below.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary,
however, to change programs to allow for
different text lengths in frames or different
CQM1H command specifications. (See
note.)
SDA: Pin 9 to pin 1
SDB: Pin 5 to pin 2
RDA: Pin 6 to pin 6
RDB: Pin 1 to pin 8
SG: Pin 3 to
3G2A6-LK202-E
Not connected
FG: Pin 7 to pin
Connector hood
C200HX/HG/HE
Communications
Board
C200HW-COMjj-E No changes have been
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary,
made in wiring.
however, to change programs to allow for
different CQM1H command specifications.
No changes have been
made in wiring.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary,
however, to change programs to allow for
different CQM1H command specifications.
CS1-series CPU CS1G/H-CPUjj
Unit
CS1-series Serial CS1W-SCB21/41
Communications CS1W-SCU21
Board or Unit
No changes have been
made in wiring.
It may be possible to use the host computer
programs without alteration as long as the
same communications settings (e.g., baud
rate) are used. It may be necessary,
however, to change programs to allow for
different CQM1H command specifications.
CVM1 or
CV-series CPU
Units
CVM1/CV-CPUjj
CVM1 or
CV-series Host
Link Unit
CV500-LK201
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text
lengths) when using C-mode Host Link commands is different for C-series Host
Link Units and CQM1H-series Serial Communications Boards. A host computer
program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly
if used for CQM1H-series PCs. Check the host computer program before using it
and make any corrections required to handle different frame text lengths.
55
SECTION 5
Protocol Macros
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use protocol macros.
5-1 Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 Using the Protocol Macro Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4 Storage Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Restrictions in Using the CX-Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1 Executing Communications Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-2 Ladder Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-3 Ladder Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
58
58
63
65
65
66
70
76
80
85
85
87
88
57
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
5-1 Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions
5-1-1 Protocol Macros
The protocol macro function is used to control devices by using the PMCR(––)
instruction in the ladder program to execute the data communications se-
quences (protocols) with the various communications devices, such as general-
purpose devices, connected to the RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port.
Standard system protocols are provided in the Serial Communications Board for
controlling OMRON devices (such as Digital Controllers and Temperature Con-
trollers).
Using the Protocol Support Tool called the CX-Protocol, the protocol macro
function can be used to create new protocols for commercially available mea-
suring instruments and devices, and to create protocols by modifying one of the
standard system protocols. The standard system protocols are also provided
with the CX-Protocol.
For details on the use of the CX-Protocol and the protocol macro function, refer
to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
5-1-2 Features
The main features of the protocol macro functions are described below. For de-
tails, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
Wide Range of
Communications
Protocols
Communications are possible with virtually any general-purpose external de-
vice, provided it has an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port, supports half-duplex
communications, and supports start-stop synchronization.
Customized Send and
Receive Frames
Send frames (command + data and other send frames) and receive frames (re-
sponse and other frames) can be created and registered according to the com-
munications frame specifications of the external device.
Communications-related
Functions
Error check code calculations, frame length calculations during sending, and
ASCII⇔ Hexadecimal conversion of numeric data are supported.
Send/Receive Monitoring
Receive wait monitoring, receive completion monitoring, and send completion
monitoring are supported. If monitoring times are exceeded, either send/receive
processing can be terminated or retry processing can be performed.
Retry Processing
Send/receive retry processing can be automatically executed when an error oc-
curs, simply by setting the number of retries.
PC Read/Write Variables
in Send Frames and
Receive Frames
Variables for reading PC memory can be included in the send frames. These can
be used as destination addresses or data when reading PC data. Variables for
writing to PC memory can be also included in the actual receive frames. These
can be used to write the contents of destination addresses or data to the PC dur-
ing reception.
Switch 1:N
Repeat processing (repeat counters) for send/receive processing can be speci-
fied in communications sequences. This enables the same data to be sent by
switching destination addresses during communications 1:N (N = 32 max. due
to restrictions in the physical layer) or by switching the PC memory write destina-
tion addresses during data reception.
Communications or the
Data Write Destinations
Using Repeat Processing
PC Interrupts During
Data Reception
An interrupt can be created in the PC’s CPU Unit during data reception, and an
interrupt program can be executed in the CPU Unit.
Next Process Switching
According to Receive
Messages
The contents of up to 15 expected receive messages can be compared with the
message actually received to determine the next process.
58
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Protocol Macro Function Specifications
Item
Description
Can be created and registered with the Protocol Support Tool
(CX-Protocol).
Number of protocols (20 max.)
Number of sequences (1,000 max.)
Per protocol
Number of
sequences
60 max.
Number of
messages
300 max.
100 max.
Number of
reception
matrixes
Protocol data memory
Flash memory in the Serial Communications Board (Retained even
when the power supply to the PC is turned OFF.)
Sequence execution condition
Using the CPU Unit’s PMCR(––) instruction (specifying the sequence
number)
Communications mode
Synchronous mode
Baud rate (see note)
Half-duplex
Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous mode)
RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports:
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
Default setting: 9,600 bps
RS-232C port: 15 m max.
Communications distance (see note)
Connection configuration
RS-442A/485 port: 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is
500 m max. T-branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
RS-232C port: 1:1 (1:N (N = 32 Units max.) is possible using a
Converting Link Adapter.)
RS-422A/485 port: 1:N (N = 32 Units max.)
Number of connected Units
32 Units max. (unit numbers 0 to 31; unit number 0 is set for 1:1
connection)
Maximum number of
data exchange words
between PC and
protocol macro
function
Operand setting
127 words
Including the word that specifies the number of
words (1 word)
Link word setting 128 words
Direct setting 128 words
O1, O2, I1, and I2: 128 words total
Maximum number of words per data attribute
59
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Item
Description
Sequence contents
(step common
parameters)
Number of steps
per sequence
16 max.
Transmission
control
X-on/X-off flow, RTS/CTS flow, delimiter control, or contention control,
and modem control can be selected.
parameters
Response
notification
method (operand)
Scan notification or interrupt notification (i.e., writing the receive data in
the I/O memory area specified in the 3rd operand of the PMCR(––)
instruction) can be selected.
Scan notification:
Writes the receive data to I/O memory during CPU Unit scanning.
Interrupt notification:
Writes the receive data to I/O memory as soon as it is received, and at
the same time specifies the execution of the interrupt program for the
CPU Unit.
Scan method
(fixed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Interrupt
notification
Interrupt
notification for
reception case
number
Monitoring time
during
Receive wait, receive completion, or send completion can be
monitored.
send/receive
processing
Setting range: 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 min
Link word setting Area in which data is exchanged between the CPU Unit and the Serial
Communications Board during Serial Communications Board
refreshing. Two areas are possible for each device: An area for storing
receive data and an area for storing send data.
60
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Item
Description
Step contents
Commands
Send only (SEND), receive only (RECEIVE), or send and receive
(SEND&RECEIVE)
Repeat counter
Retry count
1 to 255 times
0 to 9
(Only when the command is SEND&RECEIVE)
Send wait time
0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 min
(Only when the command is SEND or SEND&RECEIVE)
With or without
response write
(operand)
When receive processing is completed (when the receive data is
stored in the area specified in the 3rd operand of the PMCR(––)
instruction), whether or not to store the received messages can be
selected.
Next processing
When a step has ended normally, End (sequence completed), Next
(proceed to the next step No.), Goto (go to the specified step No.), or
Abort (interrupt the step and terminate that sequence) can be selected.
Error processing
Send message
When a step has ended abnormally, End, Next, Goto, or Abort can be
selected.
Consists of a header (*1), address (*2), length,
data (*2), error check code (*3), and terminator
(*1).
Data sent to the
specified address
when the command
is SEND or
For an explanation of *1, *2, and *3, see the
following pages.
SEND&RECEIVE.
Receive message Data sent from the
specified address
when the command
is RECEIVE or
SEND&RECEIVE.
Reception matrix When the
command is
Specifies the receive messages and the next
processing for each of cases No. 00 to No. 15.
Of the maximum 16 cases, one case must be set
RECEIVE or
SEND&RECEIVE, as “Other” in the receive messages (in addition to
sets the expected
receive messages
(15 max.), and
the set receive messages).
switches to the
next processing
according to the
message received.
Note The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the re-
mote device.
61
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Item
Description
Message con-
tents
*1:
Con-
stant
ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code
Header and
terminator
data attrib-
utes
*2:
Con-
stant
ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code (with an address, no control
code is possible)
Data attrib-
utes of ad-
dresses and
data in send/
receive mes-
sages
Vari-
ables
No conversion, conversion to ASCII data, or conversion to hexadecimal data
(the read/write direction can be specified)
Desig-
nation
method
(X, Y)
X: Effective address (where read from, or where written to)
Y: Data size (1 to 256)
Note The data size is the number of bytes on the transmission
path.
X
Word
designation
Word read (I/O
memory to
send data)
Set leading
address + n
Specify using
the 2nd oper-
and of the
PMCR(––)
instruction.
(The linear ex-
pression aN +
b, including re-
peat counter
N, is also pos-
sible for n.)
Specify using
a link word.
I/O memory di-
rect designa-
tion
Word write (re-
ceive data to
I/O memory)
Specify using
the 3rd oper-
and of the
PMCR(––)
instruction.
Specify using
a link word.
I/O memory di-
rect designa-
tion
Wild card
*
Any data or address can be re-
ceived (only in receive mes-
sages)
Repeat
counter
N
Y
Linear expres- aN + b
sion including
repeat counter
a: 0 to 255; b: 1 to 255
N: Repeat counter value
Wild card
*
Can be received regardless of
the length (only in receive mes-
sages)
Word designa- Word read (I/O
Set leading
address + n
Specify using
the 2nd oper-
and of the
PMCR(––)
instruction.
tion
memory to
send data)
(The linear ex-
pression aN +
b, including re-
peat counter
N, is also pos-
sible for n.)
Specify using
a link word.
I/O memory di-
rect designa-
tion
62
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Item
Description
Message con-
tents (contin-
ued)
*3:
LRC, LRC2, CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, SUM, SUM1, and SUM2 can be calcu-
lated.
Error check codes
Maximum length of
send/receive mes-
sages
256 bytes.
Maximum number of
data attributes regis-
tered in one message
96 attributes (see note 1)
30 attributes (see note 2)
Maximum number of
write data attributes
registered in one mes-
sage
Trace function
A total of up to 1,700 bytes (characters) of time-series data can be traced in
send and receive messages.
Changes to the step No. and control signals such as RTS and CTS can also
be traced.
Note 1. The CX-Protocol can be used to register up to 96 attributes per message.
2. A macro syntax error will occur when the protocol macro is executed if more
than 31 write attributes are registered in one message.
5-1-3 Using the Protocol Macro Function
The following three methods are available for using the protocol macro function.
Using the Standard
System Protocols
When connecting OMRON devices, data is sent and received between the
CQM1H-series CPU Unit and these devices by specifying the sequence number
of the standard system protocol provided in the Serial Communications Board
and CX-Protocol, and executing the sequence using the PROTOCOL MACRO
instruction (PMCR(––)). The CX-Protocol is not required to use the standard
system protocols.
*Send/receive messages are
Serial Communications Board
CPU Unit
stored in the area one or more
words after the send data
Standard system protocol
address or the receive data
Sequence No. 001
address specified in the
PMCR(––) instruction.
Messages
Sequence
number
Step 0
Sequence No.
specification
Step 1
RS-232C or
RS-422A/485
OMRON devices
I/O memory
Shared memory
I/O refreshing
Note The devices for which standard system protocols are provided are listed below.
For details, refer to 5-7 Using Protocol Macros.
Digital Controllers (E5jK, ES100j), Temperature Controllers (E5ZE,
E5jJ), Intelligent Signal Processors (K3Tj), Bar Code Readers
(V500/V520), Laser Micrometers (3Z4L), Visual Inspection Units
(F200/F300/F350), ID Controllers (V600/V620), Hayes Modem AT Com-
mand, and devices supporting the CompoWay/F protocol.
63
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-1
Modifying Standard
System Protocols
If there is no standard system protocol for the required OMRON product or you
wish to modify part of the protocol, you can use the CX-Protocol to modify a stan-
dard system protocol, transfer this as a separate communications sequence to
the Serial Communications Board, and execute the PMCR(––) instruction.
Modifying and transferring
standard system protocols
Serial Communications Board
CPU Unit
Command execution (SEND, RECEIVE,
Modified standard
SEND&RECEIVE)
Sequence No.
specification
system protocol
Messages
Step 0
Sequence
number
Step 1
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Step 2
General-purpose external device
I/O memory
Shared memory
I/O refreshing
Creating a New Protocol
When connecting a general-purpose external device that has an RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 port, use the CX-Protocol to create a new protocol containing the
communications specifications for the general-purpose external device, trans-
fer these specifications to the Serial Communications Board, and execute the
PMCR(––) instruction.
Creating and transferring a new protocol
Serial Communications Board
CPU Unit
Command execution (SEND, RECEIVE,
SEND&RECEIVE)
Newly created protocol
Messages
Step 0
Step 1
Step 2
Sequence
number
Sequence No.
specification
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
General-purpose external device
I/O memory
Shared memory
I/O refreshing
64
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-2
In this manual, the protocol structure is explained in simple terms, and examples
are given of the use of the PMCR(––) instruction when controlling OMRON de-
vices using standard system protocols. For details on the protocols, the method
of modifying the standard system protocols, and the method of creating new se-
quences, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
5-1-4 Storage Memory
The protocol macros are stored in flash memory in the Serial Communications
Board and will be saved even if power to the CQM1H is turned OFF. The PC Set-
up settings for the Serial Communications Board are stored in memory in the
CPU Unit with a battery backup.
5-2 Restrictions in Using the CX-Protocol
There are some restrictions in using the CX-Protocol to manipulate protocols or
perform other operations for the CQM1H-series Serial Communications Board.
These restrictions are described below.
• Pin 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CQM1H-series CPU Unit must be
turned ON to use the CX-Protocol. While pin 8 is ON, you will not be able to use
any of the CPU Unit or Board ports for the CX-Programmer, SYSMAC-CPT, or
SYSMAC Support Software.
• The model of PC must be set to the C200HG and the model of CPU Unit must
be set to the CPU43.
• Refer to the following table for details and for other restrictions. Unless speci-
fied, the functionality of the CX-Protocol will be the same as for the C200HX/
HG/HE.
Item
Restriction
Procedure
CQM1H DIP
switch settings
Turn ON pin 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the
CQM1H-series CPU Unit before attempting to use the
CX-Protocol. You will not be able to use the
CX-Protocol while pin 8 is OFF.
Turn ON pin 8 before using the
CX-Protocol.
Turn OFF pin 8 after you are finished
using the CX-Protocol.
While pin 8 is ON, you will not be able to use any of the
CPU Unit or Board ports for the CX-Programmer,
SYSMAC-CPT, or SYSMAC Support Software. Always
turn OFF pin 8 after you are finished using the
CX-Protocol.
PC model setting Set the model of PC to the C200HG and the model of
1. Select New from the File Menu.
(to create new
protocols)
CPU Unit to the CPU43-E.
2. Select C200HG from the Change PLC
Dialog Box.
3. Select CPU43-E from the Settings
Dialog Box.
Transferring
protocols to the
computer
You will not be able to upload the data for the standard
system protocols from the Board to the computer. If an
attempt is made, the transfer will be canceled and the
following message will appear. (The standard system
protocol data in the Board will not be affected.)
---
Decompiler has detected an error. No protocol data
or invalid protocol list on upload. It is likely that the
previous download was interrupted or the PMSU
memory has been cleared/damaged. Try to
download a valid protocol and retry upload.
You will be able to download protocol data from the
computer to the Board (including data for the standard
system protocols) and will then be able to upload the
data. To modify the standard system protocols for your
applications, modify the data provided with the
CX-Protocol and then download the data to the Board.
65
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-3
Item
Restriction
Procedure
Communications Use the same communications port settings for the
1. Double-click the PC icon while online.
port settings on
the Board
Board as those used for the C200HX/HG/HE. The
communications port names will be as follows:
2. Double-click the Communications Port
A or Communications Port B Icon in
the Project Window.
Communications Port A will be port 1 on the Board.
Communications Port B will be port 2 on the Board.
3. Make the settings in the
Communications Port Settings Dialog.
I/O memory
operations: PLC
Memory Window
Use I/O memory addresses only within the ranges
supported by the CQM1H. Do not attempt to edit
addresses IR 256 and higher in the IR Area (displayed
without the prefix) even though these addresses will be
displayed.
1. Click the PC icon and select Memory
from the pop-up menu. The PLC
Memory Window will be displayed.
2. Select the I/O memory areas and
address to be displayed or edited in the
Data Area Workspace.
The following restrictions apply when transferring I/O
memory.
1. Double-click the memory area in the
Data Area Workspace. The PLC Data
Table will be displayed.
When transferring from the computer to the PC, do not
select All. Use Selection or Range and specify a range 2. Specify the range of addresses to be
that lies between IR 000 and IR 255.
transferred if necessary.
When transferring from the PC to the computer, do not
select All. Use Visible area only or Selection and
specify a range that lies between IR 000 and IR 255.
3. Select Transfer to PLC via Online or
Transfer from PLC via Online from
the Online Menu.
Error log
The error log cannot be used. If it is displayed, the
contents will not agree with the error log in the CQM1H.
---
I/O tables
The I/O tables are not necessary for the CQM1H and
will be disabled. If an attempt is made to create I/O
tables, the following message will be displayed and the
I/O tables will not be created.
---
! The PLC does not contain an IO Table.
5-3 Application Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
2. Install the Board.
3. Connect the system.
Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422 cable. The settings
of the TERM and WIRE switches on the front panel of the Board will need to
be changed if the RS-422A/485 port on the Serial Communications Board is
used.
Serial Communications Board
External device
Terminating resistance ON
External device
External device
Terminating resistance ON
External device
Connect a Programming Console, the CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol
to the CPU Unit as required.
4. Turn ON power to the PC.
5. Set the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board.
Use the Programming Console, CX-Programmer, or CX-Protocol to set the
settings in DM 6550 to DM 6559.
66
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-3
Note The PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board are read
constantly during PC operation. It is not necessary to restart the PC
after changing these settings.
The default settings are shown in the following table. These are the standard
settings for protocol macros.
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Setting
Function
DM 6555 DM 6550
00 to 03 0 Hex
Standard port settings (1 start bit,
7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits,
9,600 bps)
04 to 07 ---
08 to 11 ---
12 to 15 6 Hex
Not used.
Not used.
Communications mode:
Protocol macro
DM 6556 DM 6551
00 to 07 ---
08 to 15 ---
Baud rate setting disabled.
Frame format setting disabled.
Not used.
DM 6557 DM 6552 00 to 15 ---
DM 6558 DM 6553 00 to 15 ---
DM 6559 DM 6554 00 to 15 ---
Not used.
Not used.
6. Run the system as described below in Using Standard System Protocols or
in Using User-created Protocols.
Using Standard System Protocols
Executed
with
PMCR(––)
CPU Unit
Uses standard system protocol No. 600
External device
Example: K3N Series
Serial Communications
Digital Panel Meter
Board
1, 2, 3...
1. Setting the Send Data
Refer to information on the 2nd operand of PMCR(––) in Appendix B Com-
poWay/F Master Protocol and set the number of send data words in S, and
set the send data starting in S+1.
2. Coding PMCR(––)
The following example shows how to use a Serial Communications Board to
read the present value for a K3N-series Digital Panel Meter using the Com-
poWay/F Master standard system protocol sequence No. 600: Send/Re-
ceive with ASCII Conversion and Response.
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Input condition
PMCR
#1600
DM0000
DM1000
1: Use port 1, 600: Sequence No. 600
First word of send data
First storage word for receive data
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag
(IR 20708 for Port 1) is OFF, communications sequence No. 600 of the stan-
dard system protocol in the Serial Communications Board is called, and
data is sent and received via port 1 of the Serial Communications Board.
67
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-3
Send Data
S:D00000
D00001
D00002
D00003
D00004
D00005
D00006
0007
0000
0101
000C
C000
0000
0001
7 words from D00000 to D00006
K3N node No. : 00
CompoWay/F command “0101” (reads the K3N present value)
Number of send bytes
CompoWay/F command send data
(Variable type, read start address, 00, number of elements)
Receive Data
D:D00010
D00011
D00012
D00013
0004
4 words from D00010 to D00013
Response code is stored.
The read data (in this case, the present value of K3N) is stored.
3. Executing the PMCR(––) instruction
4. For details on confirming operation, see Section 12 Tracing and I/O Memory
Monitoring in the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
• Transmission Line Tracing
The data in the send/receive messages flowing over the transmission line
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485) and the control codes are traced.
• I/O Memory Monitoring
Monitors send/receive data and the status of the various flags.
Using User-created Protocols
CX-Protocol
CPU Unit
Use the CX-Protocol to
create protocols.
PMCR(––)
External device
Serial
Communications
Board
Section references in the following procedure refer to the CX-Protocol Op-
eration Manual (W344).
1, 2, 3...
1. For details on designing protocols, see Section 4 and Section 5.
a) Create a communications sequence status transition chart.
b) From the status transition chart, divide the processing contents into se-
quence steps.
c) Determine the send/receive message contents.
2. Use the CX-Protocol to create and send a project (protocol data).
a) Creating a new project:
See 5.1 Creating a New Project or Protocol.
b) Creating a new communications sequence:
See 5.2 Creating a New Sequence or 7.1 Setting a Sequence.
c) Creating steps:
See 5.2 Creating a New Sequence and 8.1 Setting a Step.
d) Creating messages:
See 9.1 Setting a Message.
Note After creating messages, steps can also be created by specifying
message names.
68
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-3
e) Transferring the created project to the Board:
See 11.1 Transferring and Reading Protocol Data between Personal
Computers and Serial Communications Boards.
3. Create the ladder program.
a) Setting Send Data
• Specifying Operands
Set the send data in the I/O memory after the S+1 operand of the
PMCR(––) instruction. Set the number of send data words (including S
itself) in S.
• Direct Designations
Set the send data in the I/O memory specified by the read variables in the
send message.
• Specifying Link Words
Set the send data in the O1 or O2 area of the Link Word Area.
b) Coding PMCR(––)
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Input condition
PMCR
#1100
1: Use port 1, 600: Sequence No. 100
DM0000
First word of send data
DM1000
First storage word for receive data
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag
(IR 20708 for port 1) is OFF, communications sequence No. 100 registered
in the Serial Communications Board is called, and data is sent and received
via port 1 of the Serial Communications Board.
The amount of send data depends on the number of words specified in
DM 0000 (the number of words after DM 0001 plus 1 for DM 0000 itself),
and is sent from the next word after DM 0001.
Number of words
Send data
Number of send words plus 1 for DM 0000
Number of words
S: DM 0000
The receive data is stored in consecutive words beginning with DM 1000,
and the number of words actually stored in DM 1000 (the number of words
after DM 1001 plus 1 for DM 1000 itself) is stored.
Number of words
Receive data
Number of receive words plus 1 for DM 1000
Number of words
D: DM 1000
DM 1001
c) Execute PMCR(––)
4. For details on the confirming operation, see Section 12 Tracing and I/O
Memory Monitoring.
• Transmission Line Tracing
The data in the send/receive messages flowing over the transmission line
(RS-232C or RS-422A/485) and the control codes are traced.
• I/O Memory Monitoring
Monitors send/receive data and the status of the various flags.
69
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
5-4 Connections
This section describes the connections for protocol macros. Up to 32 nodes can
be used for 1:N connections.
Port
RS-232C
Configuration
Schematic diagram
1:1
RS-232C
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-422A/485
5-V power
RS-232C
Resistance
ON
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
RS-232C
RS-422A/
485
interface
RS-422A/485
interface
RS-232C
1:N
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
3G2A9-AL001
RS-422A
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance
ON
/485
Resistance ON
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
Resistance
ON
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
RS-422A/485
1:1
RS-422A/485 interface
RS-422A/485
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
5-V power
70
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
Port
Configuration
1:N
Schematic diagram
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485 interface
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485 interface
3G2A9-AL001
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance
ON
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
5-V power
Note 1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m.
2. The maximum combined cable length for RS-422A/485 is 500 m including
branch lines.
3. The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link
Adapter is connected.
4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic
connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures
be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-pair cables.
Refer to 2-3 Wiring for actual wiring methods.
Connecting RS-232C Ports 1:1
Connections to E5CK Controller
Serial Communications
Board
RS-232C
Shield
OMRON E5CK Controller
Signal
FG
Pin
Terminal Signal
SD
RD
SG
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
DSR
DTR
SG
Terminal block
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
71
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
Connecting a Host Computer with NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters
Serial Communications
Board
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Pin Signal
Computer
RS-232C
RS-232C
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
Signal
Signal
Pin
Shield
RS-422A
FG
NC
NC
FG
SD
SD
SD
SD
RS-232C
Interface
RD
RD
RD
RD
RTS
CTS
RS-232C
Interface
RTS
CTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (female)
Terminal block
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
5-V (+)
power (–)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF (4-wire)
Pin 4: OFF
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF (4-wire)
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting
Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
Connections to a Modem
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-232C port
Modem
FG
FG
SD
SD
RD
RD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
CD
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
ST2
RT
DTR
CI
ST1
D-sub, 25-pin
connector
72
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Serial Communications
Board
NT-AL001-E
Signal
RS-422A
/485
RS-232C
Shield
RS-422A
Shield
Signal Pin
Signal Signal Pin
Pin
FG
SD
NC
SD
interface
RD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
RS-232C
interface
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Signal
(See note)
RS-422A
/485
interface
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: OFF 4-wire
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
Serial Communications
Board
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A
Signal
Pin Signal Signal Pin
Signal
Pin
Shield
/485
FG
SD
NC
SD
interface
RD
RD
RS-232C
interface
RTS
CTS
5V
RTS
CTS
5V
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal
RS-422A
D-sub, 9-pin
Terminal block
/485
interface
connector (male)
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: ON 2-wire
Pin 4: ON
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting
Cables to connect to NT-AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
73
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Device supporting
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Shield
Signal
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
Shield
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
Hood
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Serial Communications Board
Computer
Signal
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-422A
Shield
Signal
Pin
Pin Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
RS-232C
NC
SD
FG
SD
RS-232C
Interface
RD
RD
RTS
CTS
RTS
CTS
5V
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
Terminating resistance ON
4-wire
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector
(male)
Terminal block
5-V (+)
power (–)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
74
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-4
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Device supporting RS-422A/485
communications (2-wire)
Serial Communications Board
Signal Pin
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Hood
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminating resistance ON
4-wire
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Serial Communications Board
Shield
3G2A9-AL001
Pin
Signal
Signal
Pin
Signal
Signal
Pin
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal
Pin
Terminating resistance ON
4-wire
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Shield
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Serial Communications Board
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Pin
Signal
Shield
Signal
Pin
Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
FG
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
NC
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
RS-232C
Interface
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin con-
nector (male)
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
Terminating resistance ON
4-wire
Shield
DIP Switch
Pin 2: OFF,
otherwise
D-sub, 9-pin con-
nector (male)
(+) 5-V
(–) power
same as below.
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Shield
Signal
Pin
Signal
Signal Pin
NC
FG
SD
SD
RD
RD
RTS
CTS
RS-232C
Interface
RTS
CTS
5V
DIP Switch
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON (terminating
DSR
DTR
SG
DSR
DTR
SG
resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Shield
(+) 5-V
(–) power
D-sub, 9-pin
connector
(male)
Terminal block
75
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-5
5-5 Protocol Structure
Protocols consist of communications sequences. A sequence consists of steps.
These steps can be repeated, or they can be branched or ended depending on
the responses received. A step consists of a command, send/receive mes-
sages, processing results, and the next process (which depends on the proc-
essing results).
Example: Reading the process values
for a Temperature Controller
Protocol
Transmission of process value reading message and
reception of response message
Communications
sequence
Step 0
Step 1
Messages
A protocol consists of processing sequences (such as reading the process value
for a Temperature Controller) for a general-purpose external device. A se-
quence consists of a group of steps, each of which consists of a send/receive/
control command, send/receive message, processing result, and a next step
that depends on the processing results.
For example, with a sequence that reads the process value for a Temperature
Controller, the sequence sends the send message for the connected Tempera-
ture Controller (a character string in which the Process Value Read command is
inserted between the header + address and the check code + terminator) and
receives the receive message (a character string in which the Process Value
Read command response is inserted between the header + address and the
check code + terminator).
Command
Send message (Example: PROCESS VALUE READ command)
SEND
CPU Unit
Header Address
Send data
Check Terminator
code
Receive message (Example: Response)
RS-232C or
RS-422A/485
RECEIVE
Header Address
Send data
Check
code
Terminator
Serial Communications Board
General-purpose external device
76
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-5
Depending on the response received, the user can either choose to resend the
same send message (retry processing), or to perform the next process (for ex-
ample, read the process value for a Temperature Controller with a different ad-
dress).
One protocol
One-step structure
With the SEND, RECEIVE, or
SEND&RECEIVE command
Sequence No. 000 to 999
(60 sequences max./protocol)
Step 0
Step 1
Transmission
control parameter
Link word setting
Step 0
Step 1
Command (see Note 1)
Messages (see note 2)
Send/receive
processing
(See
note 3.)
Y
monitoring time
Response
notification method
15 steps max.
Normal end
Retry?
15 steps max.
N (error)
N (no)
Message list (see note 2)
Send message list
Repeated
N (no)
Y
Next process
Error processing
Header Address Data Check Terminator
Receive message list
S Next step
S To specified step
S Sequence end
S Sequence interrupt
Header Address Data Check Terminator
Reception matrix list (see note 2)
Reception matrix
Case No. 15
Case No. 00
Receive message
Next process
Note 1. The SEND, RECEIVE, or SEND&RECEIVE commands can be used.
2. Three types of reception matrix are available for switching the processing,
depending on whether the messages are send messages, receive (wait)
messages, or multiple receive (wait) messages. Unlike sequences, these
matrixes are managed as lists.
3. Retries are possible on for the SEND&RECEIVE command.
Sequence Parameters
Parameter
Meaning
Transmission control
parameters
Control methods, such as flow control
Link words
Settings for shared words between the PC and the
Serial Communications Board.
Monitoring time
Monitoring time for send/receive processing
Response notification method Timing for writing received data to I/O memory in
the PC
77
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-5
Step Parameters
Parameter
Meaning
Command
Messages
One of the following: SEND, RECEIVE, or
SEND&RECEIVE
Send message The message sent for SEND.
Receive The expected message for RECEIVE.
message
Send message The message sent and the expected
and receive
message
message for SEND&RECEIVE.
Reception
matrix
A group of expected messages that can
be used to switch to different next
processes when RECEIVE or
SEND&RECEIVE is used.
Repeat counter
The number of times to repeat the step (0 to 255). The
repeat counter can be used to change send/receive
messages.
Retry count
Used for SEND&RECEIVE to retry the command for errors
(0 to 9).
Send wait time
Used for SEND or SEND&RECEIVE to create a wait time
before sending data.
Response write
enable (for operand
specification)
Specification of whether or not to write the received data to
memory.
Next process
Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the
current step is completed normally.
Error processing
Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the
current step ends in an error.
Standard System Protocol Example
Process Value Read Sequence for E5jK Controller Read Protocol
Level
Sequence
Item
Link words
Setting
---
Transmission control
parameters
Modem control
Response notification
method
Scan
3 s
Reception wait time Tr
Reception finished wait 3 s
time Tfr
Send finished wait time 3 s
Tfs
Steps
Step number
Repeat counter
Command
00
Reset/001
SEND&RECEIVE
3
Retry count
Send wait time
Send message
Receive message
---
SD (00) _1
RV (00) _1
Response write enable Write
Next process
Error process
End
Abort
78
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-5
Level
Item
Header <h>
Setting
Send message
SD (00) _1
“@”
Terminator <t>
Error check code <c>
Length <l>
[2A0D]
LRC (horizontal parity) (0) (2 bytes of ASCII)
---
Address <a>
$ (R (1) ) ,2)
Message edited
<h> + <a> + “1” + “00” + “0000” + <c> + <t>
Data
Receive message
RV (00) _1
Header <h>
“@”
Terminator <t>
Error check code <c>
Length <l>
[2A0D]
LRC (horizontal parity) (0) (2 bytes of ASCII)
---
Address <a>
& (R (1) ) ,2)
Message edited
<h> + <a> + “00” + “00” + & (W (1) ,4) + <c> + <t>
Data
Handling
The CQM1H-series PCs provide standard system protocols to enable commu-
nications with OMRON components without having to create communications
sequences. The sequences in the standard system protocols can be executed
merely by setting operands for the PMCR(––) instruction.
Communications
Problems for Standard
System Protocols
Processing for communications line problems during communications for the
standard system protocols are set to normal settings, as shown in the following
table. If these settings are not suitable to the application or if improvements are
desired, use the CX-Protocol to modify the following settings in the required se-
quences. For details on the use of the CX-Protocol, refer to the CX-Protocol Op-
eration Manual (W344). Refer to the appendices for the settings in the standard
system protocols.
Level
Item
Link words
Possible changes in settings
No reason to change.
Sequence
parameters
Transmission control
parameters
Response
notification method
The monitoring times are set to 3 seconds
for most sequences. The settings are
different for send-only and receive-only
sequences, as well as for sequences that
require time for responses.
Reception wait time
Tr
Reception finished
wait time Tfr
Send finished wait
time Tfs
Step
parameters
No reason to change.
Repeat counter
Command
Retry count
The retry count is general set to 3 retries (4
tries total) for sequences that use the
SEND&RECEIVE command. Different
settings are used for sequences that have
other commands.
No reason to change.
Send wait time
Send message
Receive message
Response write
enable
Next process
Error process
79
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-6
5-6 Control Bits, Flags, and Status Information
Control bits, flags, and status information for the Serial Communications Board
are available in the Inner Board Slot 1 area. The addresses in this area are as
follows:
Inner Board Slot 1 Area: IR 200 to IR 207
All of the bits in the following table are initialized (cleared) when power to the PC
is turned ON, when the mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN/MON-
ITOR mode, when the STUP(––) instruction is executed to change the serial
communications mode, or when the communications port is restarted. The bits
are also reset at the timing indicated in the Reset column in the table.
Word
Bits
00
Name and Function
Classifi-
cation
Set
Reset
IR 200
System
error
When error Power ON
occurs
Serial Communications Board Hardware Error Flag
Turns ON if an error occurs in the Board. Replace the
Board if this flag will not turn OFF even after remounting
the Board securely or mounting it in a different CPU Unit.
01
02
Board Identification Error Flag (hardware error)
Replace the Board if this flag turns ON.
Protocol Data Error Flag
Normal
completion
of protocol
data
This flag turns ON if an error is detected in the protocol
data checksum when the power is turned ON. The ERR
indicator on the CPU Unit will also flash and the RDY indi-
cator will flash.
transfer
This error may occur if the communications connector be-
comes disconnected or the PC power is turned OFF dur-
ing protocol data transfer. Use the CX-Protocol to transfer
of the protocol data again.
Start of
11
Port 2 Protocol Macro Execution Error Flag
sequence
The flag turns ON when the protocol macros are not
supported (error code 1), there is a sequence number
error (error code 2), an attempt was made to write data
receive data at an illegal address (error code 3), or a
protocol data syntax error occurred (error code 4).
12
13
Port 1 Protocol Macro Execution Error Flag
Same as IR 20011.
PC Setup Error Flags
Power ON
Bit 15 turns ON if a Setup error occurs in the PC Setup
settings for the Board.
14
15
Bit 14 will turn ON if the error is for port 1.
Bit 13 will turn ON if the error is for port 2.
Correct the PC Setup.
The defaults will be used for the settings causing th error.
80
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-6
Word
Bits
Name and Function
Classifi-
cation
Set
Reset
IR 201
Transmis- When error Start of
sion error occurs sequence
00 to 03 Port 1 Error Code (Transmission Error Status)
When an error occurs during transmissions for a protocol
macro, an error code will be output to these bits.
0: Normal operation 1: Parity error
2: Framing error
Error codes 3 to 7 are not possible for protocol macros.
These error codes are the same regardless of the serial
communications mode.
IR 20104 will also turn ON except when the error code
contains all zeros. SEND&RECEIVE retry processing will
be performed for any error.
If communications are recovered through protocol macro
retry processing, the error code will be cleared, but will be
maintained even if a different error occurs during the retry.
04
Port 1 Communications Error Flag
This flag turns ON when an error occurs in the
communications path between the communications port
and the external device or when communications
parameters are not set correctly.
The operation of this flag is the same regardless of the
serial communications mode.
Details on the error are output as an error code to
IR 20100 to IR 20103.
07
Port 1 Sequence Abort Completion Flag
Sequence When
status sequence is
aborted
This flag turns ON when a sequence has been aborted due
to ABORT in the next process or in the error process. It will
be OFF if an abort has not occurred.
Transmis- When error
sion error occurs
08 to 11 Port 2 Error Code (Transmission Error Status)
Same as bits IR 20100 to IR 20103, but works together
with IR 20112.
12
15
Port 2 Communications Error Flag
Same as bits IR 2014, but works together with IR 20108 to
IR 20111.
Port 2 Sequence Abort Completion Flag
Sequence When
status
sequence is
aborted
Save as IR 20107.
Sequence When
IR 202 00 to 07 Port 1 Repeat Counter PV (00 to FF hexadecimal)
status
repeat
count is
refreshed
The repeat counter variable N is set. The value is cleared
when the sequence execution starts.
The present value N varies according to the method used
to initialize the value. For resets, the variable N is set to 0
when the step is started, and the step is executed accord-
ing to the set number of times. For holds, the variable N for
the present value is held when the step is started, and the
step is executed according to the set number of times.
If the Repeat Counter Setting Value is set to read word
R ( ), and 0 is read, then 0 will be stored and this step will
be skipped (the next process setting will be ignored), and
the sequence will move to the next step (+ 1). For details,
refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
IR 203 00 to 07 Port 2 Repeat Counter PV (00 to FF hexadecimal)
Same as IR 20200 to IR 20207.
81
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-6
Word
Bits
00
Name and Function
Port 1 Tracing Flag
Classifi-
cation
Set
Reset
IR 204
Tracing
Start of
trace
Start of
sequence or
end of trace
According to instructions from the CX-Protocol, this flag is
turned ON while time-series data for send and receive
messages is being traced.
01
Port 2 Tracing Flag
Same as IR 20400.
Protocol
macro
status
When error Start of
08 to 11 Port 1 Protocol Macro Error Code
occurs
sequence
The list of error codes is provided at the end of this table
on page 85.
If error code 1, 2, 3, or 4 is stored, the Port 1 Protocol
Macro Execution Error Flag (IR 20111) will be turned ON,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and a
non-fatal error will occur.
When an error occurs, the error code is held until the next
sequence starts.
The error must be cleared from a Programming Console or
other Programming Device after the cause of the error has
been eliminated.
12 to 15 Port 2 Protocol Macro Error Code
Same as IR 20408 to IR 20411, but works together with
IR 20112.
IR 205
Sequence
status
00 to 03 Port 1 Executed Reception Case No. (code)
When
matrix is
received
Reception matrix case numbers 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) are
stored for which reception has been completed. The num-
ber is cleared when the sequence execution starts.
The Executed Reception Case No. is stored only when the
reception matrix is set using the RECEIVE or SEND&RE-
CEIVE command. If a reception matrix is not set, the case
number will be set to 0 (cleared) when another command
is executed.
04 to 07 Port 1 Completed Step Number
When step
is executed
Step numbers 0 to 15 (0 to F hex) are stored for the steps
for which execution has been completed.
15
IR 204 Port 1 Data Stored Flag
0: No data stored; 1: Data stored in IR 20408 to IR 20411
Protocol
macro
When error
occurs
IR 206
Sequence
status
00 to 03 Port 2 Executed Reception Case No. (code)
When
matrix is
received
Same as IR 20500 to IR 20503.
04 to 07 Port 2 Completed Step Number
When step
is executed
Same as IR 20504 to IR 20507.
IR 205 15
IR 204 Port 2 Data Stored Flag
0: No data stored; 1: Data stored in IR 20412 to IR 20415
Protocol
macro
When error
occurs
82
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-6
Word
Bits
00
Name and Function
Classifi-
cation
Set
Reset
IR 207
Port sta-
tus
User-set or After
STUP(––)
Port 1 Restart Bit
settings are
The communications port will be restarted when this bit is
turned ON by the user.
changed
and port
restarted
01
02
Port 2 Restart Bit
Same as IR 20700.
Tracing
From
From
Port 1 Continuous Trace Start/Stop Bit
CX-Protocol CX-Protocol
The CX-Protocol will start a continuous trace when the bit
is turned ON. The trace is ended when the bit is turned
OFF.
The CPU Unit will manipulate the Shot Trace Bit and
Continuous Trace Bit when trace operations are performed
from the CX-Protocol. Do not manipulate these bits directly
from a ladder diagram.
03
04
Port 2 Continuous Trace Start/Stop Bit
Same as IR 20702.
At end of
short trace
Port 1 Shot Trace Start/Stop Bit
The CX-Protocol will start a one-shot trace when the bit is
turned ON. The trace is ended when the bit is turned OFF.
The Serial Communications Board will be cleared when
the trace buffer becomes full.
The CPU Unit will manipulate the Shot Trace Bit and
Continuous Trace Bit when trace operations are performed
from the CX-Protocol. Do not manipulate these bits directly
from a ladder diagram.
05
Port 2 Shot Trace Start/Stop Bit
Same as IR 20704.
83
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-6
Word
Bits
08
Name and Function
Classifi-
cation
Set
Reset
IR 207
Port 1 Protocol Macro Executing Flag (instruction
Protocol
macro
status
At
At
execution)
instruction
execution
completion
of execution
This flag is turned ON when a PMCR(––) instruction (se-
quence) is executed. The flag will remain OFF if execution
fails.
When the sequence is completed and receive data is writ-
ten, the flag is turned OFF after all the receive data has
been written to I/O memory.
This flag is turned OFF when the sequence is completed
(either when it is ended by End, or when it is ended by
Abort).
When the scan response notification method is set for the
sequence, first a check is made to see if the received data
has been written to I/O memory before the Protocol Macro
Executing Flag is turned OFF.
Start of
sequence
09
10
Port 1 Transfer Step Error Processing Flag
Step error At compare
error after
This flag is turned ON when a step has ended abnormally.
It is turned OFF if the step ends normally as a result of a
retry.
reception
1: Step ended abnormally
0: Step ended normally
Port 1 Sequence END Completion Flag
Sequence End of
status
sequence
This flag is turned ON when a sequence is completed for
the next process or for an error process with an END com-
mand.
Setting END when a sequence has ended normally and
setting ABORT when the sequence has ended abnormally
enables this flag to be used to determine whether or not
the sequence execution has ended normally.
1: Sequence ended
0: Sequence not ended
11
Port 1 Forced Abort Bit
Abort
process-
ing
User-set
User-set
Protocol processing will be aborted when this bit is turned
ON. (Processing may be completed if the bit is turned ON
too late.)
12
13
Port 2 Protocol Macro Executing Flag (instruction
execution)
Protocol
macro
status
At
At
instruction
execution
completion
of execution
Same as IR 20708.
Start of
sequence
Port 2 Transfer Step Error Processing Flag
Same as IR 20709.
Step error At compare
error after
reception
14
15
Port 2 Sequence END Completion Flag
Same as IR 20710.
Sequence End of
status
sequence
Port 2 Forced Abort Bit
Same as IR 20711.
Abort
process-
ing
User-set
User-reset
84
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Error Codes
The contents of the error codes are shown in the following table.
Code
Error contents
Protocol macro
execution
0
No error
Executed
2
Sequence Number Error
Not executed
The sequence number specified by the
PMCR(––) instruction does not exist in the
Board.
Execution stops after
the error occurs.
3
4
Receive Data/Write Area Exceeded Error
When data is written or read to the CPU Unit, the
specified area range was exceeded.
Protocol Data Syntax Error
A code that cannot be executed occurs while the
protocol macro was executed. (Example: A
header occurs after a terminator.)
5
Protocol Macro Execution Error During Port
Initialization
Execution stops after
the error occurs.
This error occurs when the PMCR instruction is
executed while the port is being initialized (i.e.,
while the serial communications port is being
restarted or while the serial communications
mode in the PC Setup of the Serial
Communications Board is being modified using
the STUP instruction or the Programming
Device).
5-7 Using Protocol Macros
5-7-1 Executing Communications Sequences
Use the PMCR(––) instruction to execute communications sequences.
PMCR(––) Instruction Specifications
Control data
First send word
First receive data storage word
Control Data: C
15
00
C:
Digits 2 to 4 (bits 00 to 11):
Communications sequence number (000 to 999)
Digit 1 (bits 12 to 15): Port specifier
1: Port 1 (RS-232C)
2: Port 2 (RS-422A/485)
First Send Data Word: S
S specifies the first word of the words containing the data required for sending.
15
S
00
Number of send words
Send data
Total number of words including S
S+1
:
:
:
:
S+n
85
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
The number of send words in S+1 and the following words is stored in S. The
setting range is 0001 to 0129 (4 digits BCD). S is also included in the number of
words.
Note When there is no send data, set S to #0000. If any other constant or a word ad-
dress is set, an error will occur, the Error Flag (SR 25503) will turn ON, and
PMCR(––) will not be executed.
First Receive Data
Storage Word (D)
D specifies the first word of the area used to store the receive data.
If a word address is specified for D and a response is requested, the data
through the highest location received in the reception buffer will be stored in
memory starting at D+1. The number of words that was stored starting at D+1
will be stored in D. D is included in the number of words.
15
00
D
Number of receive words
Total number of
words including D
Receive data
:
D+1
:
:
:
D+n
The number of words of receive data in D+1 and the following words is stored in
D. The range is 0001 to 0129 (4 digits BCD). D is also included in the number of
words.
Note When there is no receive data, set D to to a dummy word address. If any constant
is set, an error will occur, the Error Flag (SR 25503) will turn ON, and PMCR(––)
will not be executed.
PMCR(––) Operation
When PMCR(––) is executed, the communications sequence specified in bits
00 to 11 of C is executed for the port specified in bits 12 to 15 of C (port 1 or 2).
If an operand is specified as a variable in the send message, data starting in S+1
for the number of words specified in S is used as the send data. If an operand is
specified as a variable in the receive message, data will be received in words
starting from D+1 and the number of words of received data will be automatically
stored in D.
Flags
Name
Address
ON
OFF
Error Flag
SR 25503
Indirectly addressed DM or EM word is
non-existent. (Content of ꢀDM/ꢀEM word is
not BCD, or the area boundary has been
exceeded.)
Other
times.
Another PMCR(––) instruction was already in
progress when the instruction was executed
(IR 20708 or IR 20712 is ON).
The port specifier was not 1 or 2.
Note: PMCR(––) will not be executed when
SR 25503 is ON.
86
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Operand Areas and Address Ranges
Area
IR and SR Areas
HR Area
C
S
D
IR 000 to IR 255
HR 00 to HR 99
AR 00 to AR 27
LR 00 to LR 63
IR 000 to IR 252
AR Area
LR Area
Timer and
TIM/CNT000 to TIM/CNT511
Counter Area
Data Memory
(DM) Area
DM 0000 to DM 6655
EM 0000 to EM 6143
DM 0000 to
DM 6143
Extended Data
Memory (EM)
Area
Indirect DM
address
*DM 0000 to *DM 6655
*EM 0000 to *EM 6143
Indirect EM
address
Constant Area
See description of #0000 to #FFFF
control data.
---
5-7-2 Ladder Program Structure
When creating a ladder program, note the following points.
• To ensure that a PMCR(––) instruction is not executed while another
PMCR(––) instruction is being executed, use the Protocol Macro Executing
Flag in an NC input condition.
• Use an OFF condition for the Protocol Macro Executing Flag and perform pro-
cessing to read the results of sequence execution, or perform processing
when a sequence ends in an error.
Programming Example
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Input condition
20708
PMCR
20708
A
DIFD (14)
A
Reading of sequence execution results
Processing of sequence errors
87
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
5-7-3 Ladder Program Example
The following diagram shows an example in which sequence number 000 (Pres-
ent Value Read) for a Temperature Controller (E5jK Read Protocol) is
executed using the protocol for an OMRON Temperature Controller connected
to port 2 (RS-422A/485) of a Serial Communications Board.
Connections
Serial Communications Board
32 Units max.
Specifies the Temperature Controller Unit No. ,
sends the PRESENT VALUE READ command
send data, and receives the present value set
in the response in the specified word.
Port 2
RS-422A/485
Send data
Receive data
Temperature
Controller E5jK Controller E5jK
Unit No. 00
Temperature
Temperature
Controller E5jK
Unit No. 31
Unit No. 01
32 Units max.
Send Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
First word of
send data
S
Number of send data words
(Undefined) Unit No.
Word
Contents (data format)
Data
S + 1
S
Number of send data words
(4-digit BCD)
0002 (fixed)
S + 1
Unit No.
(2-digit BCD)
00 to 31
Receive Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
Receive data
storage words
D
Number of receive data words
Present value
Word
Contents (data format)
Data
D + 1
D
Number of receive data words 0002
(4-digit BCD)
D + 1
Present value
(4-digit BCD)
Scaling
Lower limit to upper limit
88
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Operand Settings for the
Reading the present value of E5jK Unit No. 03 and storing it in DM 0201
PMCR(––) Instruction
C: Control data
PMCR
#0000
1
0
0
0
D00100
D00200
0000: Sequence No. 000
Port 1
S: First send data word
S:
DM 0100
DM 0101
Number of send data words = 2
Unit No. = 03
S+1:
D: First receive data storage word
D:
DM 0200
DM 0201
Present value
D+1:
Number of receive data words = 2
Present value is stored.
(4-digit BCD)
89
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Ladder Programming
Example
The following diagram shows an example in which sequence number 000
(PRESENT VALUE READ) of a Temperature Controller (E5jK Read System) is
executed using the PMCR(––) instruction. If the sequence has been completed
normally, the present value that has been read is transferred to another word.
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Input condition
000000
20708
If input condition IR 00000 is ON and the Protocol
PMCR
Macro Executing Flag IR 20708 is OFF, then sequence
No. 000 is executed for Serial Communications Board
port 1 and the present value is stored in DM 0201 and
#1000
DM 0100
after.
DM 0200
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
20708
If Protocol Macro Executing Flag IR 20708 turns OFF,
DIFD (14) 00100
IR 00100 turns ON (and remains ON for one cycle).
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Step Error
Processing Flag
Input condition
000100
20708
20709
If Protocol Macro Executing Flag IR 20708 is OFF and
MOV (21)
Step Error Processing Flag IR 20709 is OFF when
IR 00100 turns ON, then the data received in DM 0201 is
moved to DM 0300.
DM 0201
Step Error
Processing Flag
DM 0300
20709
If IR 00100 is ON (sequence end) and Step Error Pro-
FAL (06) 01
cessing Flag IR 20709 is ON, the sequence has ended
abnormally and a FAL(06) instruction (FAILURE ALARM
AND RESET instruction) is executed.
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
IR 20708
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
re-executed
00100
One cycle
Present value in DM 0201
moved to DM 0300
When sequence ended
normally:
Step Error Processing
Flag IR 20709
FAL instruction executed
When sequence ended
abnormally:
Step Error Processing
Flag IR 20709
Precaution on Reception Failures for PMCR(––)
The reception buffer is cleared to all zeros just before the communications se-
quence is executed. If programming is included in the ladder diagram to periodi-
cally read, it should be designed to read the data only when receptions are suc-
cessful, and not when the contents of the buffer has been cleared to all zeros.
The above ladder programming shows one way to achieve this.
90
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Transmission Methods
Although the following two transmission methods are commonly used, only half-
duplex transmissions are supported for CQM1H protocol macros.
Half-duplex: Data can be sent only one direction at a time.
A
B
Or
A
B
Full-duplex: Data can be sent in both directions at the same time.
A
B
The use of half-duplex transmissions presents some restrictions. Data received
from just before the SEND operation through the end of the SEND operation
cannot be received as receive data for the next RECEIVE operation because the
reception buffer is cleared just before a sequence is executed and at the end of
the SEND operation (i.e., for the SEND and SEND&RECEIVE commands).
Transmission
mode
Reception buffer cleared
Data reception
Character trace
Half-duplex
Just before sequence execution
and at the end of SEND operation of RECEIVE operation or between the
for SEND or SEND&RECEIVE
commands
Between end of SEND operation and end All characters while
tracing is being
performed
end of SEND operation and just before
beginning of next SEND operation
An example timing chart for the above situation is shown below.
Sequence execution
Receive
Send
Receive
Reception buffer cleared
Data received
See note 1.
Character trace
Note 1. Data received before the completion of the SEND operation will be lost, but it
will be included in the character trace.
2. There is a time lag between the completion of data send processing and the
end of the SEND operation. This time lag is time t1 and is shown in the fol-
lowing table. If the response from the external device is too quick, any re-
ceive data entering between the end of sending data for the SEND operation
and the completion of the SEND operation will not be received.
SEND operation
Data send processing
t1
Quick response
Time lag (see table)
Data not received here
Data reception
Reception buffer cleared
91
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Time Lag t1
Baud rate (b/s)
Lag time (ms)
1,200
2,400
4,800
9,600
19,200
30
15
8
5
3
Note The lag time shown above is an approximate value. It may become longer de-
pending on the protocol macro processing.
Error Flags for Overrun, Framing, and Parity Errors
When an overrun, framing, or parity error is detected during a protocol macro,
the receive data will be stored in the reception buffer along with error informa-
tion. The error flags will operate as described next.
Receive Data with Error Information that Matches Expected Receive Mes-
sages
The expected receive message received for the RECEIVE operation is found in
the reception buffer and handled as receive data. If the receive data contains
error information, the corresponding error flags are turned ON.
The following example shows reception of 100 bytes of data that matches an
expected receive message.
Error flags ON
Parity errors
100 bytes
Receive Data with Error Information that Does Not Match Expected Re-
ceive Messages
If there is no expected receive message that matches the receive data, the data
is discarded and the error flags are not affected. The trace information will con-
tain any error information entering the reception buffer up to the capacity of the
trace data.
The following example illustrated what happens when there is no expected re-
ceive message that matches the receive data.
Discarded
Error flags are not changed.
In the following ladder programming, sequence number 000 (E5jK Digital Con-
troller Read) is executed through PMCR(––) to read the PV from the Digital Con-
92
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
troller. When sequence execution has been completed, the PV is transferred to
words to store it.
Protocol Macro Exe-
cuting Flag
20708
Execution
condition
00000
PMCR
If IR 20708 is OFF when the execution condition
#1000
turns ON, sequence #000 is executed and the PV is
stored in DM 0201.
DM 0100
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
20708
DM 0200
When IR 20708 changes from ON to OFF, IR 00100
DIFD (14) 00100
will turn ON for one cycle.
Protocol Macro Transfer Step Error
Executing Flag Processing Flag
00100
20708
20709
MOV
(21)
DM 0201
DM 0300
If IR 00100 is ON, IR 20708 is OFF, and IR 20709 is
OFF, the PV in DM 0201 is moved to DM 0300.
Transfer Step Error
Processing Flag
20709
If IR 00100 is ON and IR 20709 is ON, an error will
have occurred in the sequence and a non-fatal error
is generated.
FAL (07) 01
Protocol Macro Exe-
cuting Flag
(IR 20708)
1
0
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
executed
1
0
IR 00100
1 cycle
Sequence
executed nor-
mally:
Transfer Step Error
Processing Flag
(IR 20709)
PV in DM 0201
moved to DM 0300
1
0
Error in
FAL executed
sequence
execution:
Transfer Step Error
Processing Flag
(IR 20709)
1
0
Processing When a Sequence Ends Abnormally
As shown in the following examples, if END is set when a sequence ends nor-
mally and ABORT is set when a sequence ends abnormally, it is possible to de-
termine whether each sequence has ended normally or abnormally by using the
Sequence End Completion Flag and the Sequence Abort Completion Flag.
93
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Example 1
Example 2
Sequence
Sequence
Step No. 00
Step No. 00
Error
Error
Sequence ended
abnormally
Step No. 01
Step No. 01
Step No. 02
Sequence ended
abnormally
Se-
quence
ended
Error
Error
abnor-
mally
Sequence ended
normally
Sequence ended
normally
Sequence ended
normally
When the Sequence Ends Normally
Protocol Macro
When the Sequence Ends Normally
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Executing Flag
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
re-executed
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
re-executed
Sequence End
Completion Flag
Sequence End
Completion Flag
Error processing
for step No. 00
Step Error
Processing
Flag
Step Error
Processing
Flag
When the Sequence Ends Abnormally
When the Sequence Ends Abnormally
Protocol Macro
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Executing Flag
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
re-executed
Sequence
executed
Sequence
completed
Sequence
re-executed
Sequence Abort
Completion Flag
Sequence Abort
Completion Flag
Error processing
for step No. 00
Step Error
Processing
Flag
Step Error
Processing
Flag
Note The Step Error Processing Flag is used to see whether error processing has been executed
for an individual step in a sequence, and not for the overall steps. Therefore, as shown in Ex-
ample 2 above, after executing error processing during a sequence (step No. 00), the flag will
remain ON, even if the next step ends normally. Care is therefore required because it is not
always possible to use this flag to determine whether the overall sequence has ended abnor-
mally.
94
Using Protocol Macros
Section 5-7
Precautions on Using the Force Abort Bit
The Protocol Macro Executing Flag will turn OFF as soon as the Forced Abort Bit
is turned ON from the ladder program. The Forced Abort Bit must remain ON for
at least 15 ms longer than the CPU Unit cycle time. Thus, the sequence will not
be aborted if the Forced Abort Bit is turned OFF as soon as the Protocol Macro
Executing Flag turns OFF.
If only the Protocol Macro Execution Flag is used in an NC condition for
PMCR(––), PMCR(––) will be executed during abort processing, and system er-
ror (FAL 9C) will occur. Wait at least 15 ms longer than the cycle time after turning
ON the Forced Abort Bit before executing the next protocol macro.
In the following example, the Forced Abort Bit is turned ON and an interlock is
created for the PMCR(––) instruction for 30 ms before the Forced Abort Bit is
turned OFF.
Execution Protocol Macro Forced Abort
condition Executing Flag Bit
PMCR
Abort
condition
T000
A
A
A
TIMH
000
#0003
T000
20711
Forced Abort Bit
Abort
condition
A
T000
1 cycle
30 ms
Forced Abort
Bit (IR 20711)
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
(IR 20708)
95
SECTION 6
No-protocol Communications
This section provides information required to use no-protocol communications on a Serial Communications Board port.
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Using No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-1 TRANSMIT – TXD(––) and RECEIVE – RXD(––) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-2 TXD(––) Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-3 RXD(––) Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4-4 Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
100
101
102
102
104
104
105
97
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-1
6-1 Overview
Data can be sent or received without a protocol and without conversion by con-
necting an external device to the RS-232C port and executing the TXD(––) or
RXD(––) instruction from the ladder program. Start and end codes can be at-
tached to the data or the amount of data to be received can be specified.
The communications frame cannot be specified for no-protocol communications
in the way it can be for protocol macros. Retry processing, data conversion, and
procedural branching according to received data are also not possible. No-pro-
tocol communications are thus good for communicating with bar code readers
and other external devices with RS-232C ports that do not required command-
response procedures. Data is sent in one direction only, using TXD(––) to send
data from the port or RXD(––) to read data received on the port.
Note When TXD(––) is executed in No-protocol Mode, data from I/O memory is sent
from the port without conversion. When TXD(––) is executed in Host Link mode
(for slave-initiated communications), the contents of the specified words in I/O
memory is converted to ASCII before being sent.
No-protocol
Specifications
The specifications of no-protocol communications are given in the following
table.
Item
Messages
(communications
frame)
Specification
One of the following.
Data only
Start code + data
Data + end code
Start code + data + end code
Data + CR + LF
Start code + data + CR + LF
Settings are made in the PC Setup: Start code enable, end
code enable, start code, end code, number of receive bytes
(when end code is disabled)
Start code
End code
Disabled or 00 to FF Hex
Disabled, 00 to FF Hex, or
CR+LF
Number of receive bytes
1 to 256 bytes if transmission
ends in data (data only or start
code + data)
Message
TXD(––) in ladder program
transmissions
Message
RXD(––) in ladder program
receptions
Maximum
message length
256 bytes including start code and end codes (253 bytes
without start/end codes) for either sending or receiving
Data conversion
None
None
Communications
protocol
Transmission
delay
0 to 99,990 ms (set in PC Setup in units of 10 ms)
The transmission delay is from the beginning of TXD(––)
execution until execution of the next TXD(––) can be started.
Reception counter The number of bytes received at the port can be counted from
0 to 256 bytes.
98
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-1
Send/Receive Message Frames
End code
Yes
Start code
No
CR+LF
No
Data
Data
ED
Data
CR+LF
256 bytes max.
256 bytes max.
Data
256 bytes max.
Data
Yes
ST
CR+LF
ST
ED
Data
ST
256 bytes max.
256 bytes max.
256 bytes max.
• Only the first start code is valid if there is more than one start code.
• Only the first end code is valid if there is more than one end code.
• Use CF+LF if using an end code may cause receptions to be interrupted be-
cause the end code exists in the receive data.
• A transmission delay can be set for PC-initiated communications as a mini-
mum interval between sending commands to the host.
The delay is not used in sending the first command. The delay will affect oth-
er commands only if the time set for the transmission delay has not expired
when the next command is ready to be sent.
If the delay time has already expired when the next command is ready, the
command will be spent immediately. If the delay time has not expired, the
command will be delayed until the time set for the transmission delay has
expired.
The operation of the transmission delay for PC-initiated communications is
illustrated below.
Transmission delay
Command sent
Transmission delay
Command sent
Transmission delay
Command sent
Command sent
Time
1st TXD(––)
command
2nd TXD(––)
command
3rd TXD(––)
command
4th TXD(––)
command
Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for details on TXD(––) and RXD(––).
99
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-2
6-2 Application Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC.
2. Mount the Board.
3. Connections
Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422 cables. The TERM
and WIRE switches on the front panel of the Board must be set if the Board is
connected using the RS-422A/485 port.
The CPU Unit can be connected to a Programming Console, the CX-Pro-
grammer, or the CX-Protocol as required.
4. Turn ON power.
5. Set the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board.
Use a Programming Console, the CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to
set the settings in the PC Setup between DM 6500 and DM 6559.
Note The settings stored in these words are read constantly; the PC does
not need to be restarted or reset when changes are made to the set-
tings. They will be updated automatically as soon as they are
changed.
The following table shows the settings for using STX as the start code,
CR+LF as the end code, and no transmission delay.
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Setting
Function
DM 6555 DM 6550
00 to 03 0 Hex
Standard port settings
(1 start bit, 7-bit data, even parity,
2 stop bits, 9,600 bps)
04 to 11 ---
Not used.
12 to 15 1 Hex
Serial communications mode
No-protocol
DM 6556 DM 6551
00 to 07 00 Hex
08 to 15 00 Hex
Baud rate setting disabled.
Frame format setting disabled.
DM 6557 DM 6552 00 to 15 0000
(BCD)
Transmission delay: 0 ms
0000 to 9999 (BCD): Set in units
of 10 ms
DM 6558 DM 6553
00 to 07 ---
Not used.
08 to 11 1 Hex
12 to 15 2 Hex
Start code enabled
End code enabled as CR+LF
0: Disable (number of receive
bytes set)
1: Set (specified end code)
2: CR, LF
DM 6559 DM 6554
00 to 07 02 Hex
08 to 15 00 Hex
Start code: STX
Number of receive bytes
(Disabled when end code is set.)
6. Write and execute the ladder program. Use TXD(––) to send data to an ex-
ternal device and RXD(––) to receive data from an external device.
100
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-3
6-3 Connections
The connection examples in this section show only the basic connection dia-
grams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in ac-
tual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-pair cables. Refer to 2-3
Wiring for actual wiring methods.
Connecting to a Bar
Code Reader via
RS-232C
The following diagram shows the connections between an OMRON V500-se-
ries Bar Code Reader and the RS-232C port on the Serial Communications
Board.
Serial Communications Board
V520-RH21-6
(D-sub, 9-pin female connector)
Bar Code Reader
V509-W012 Cable
Signal
Pin
Pin
Signal
Serial Communications Board
V520-RH21-6
Bar Code Reader
V509-W012
Cable
100 VAC
5-V external
power supply
(e.g., 82S-0305)
Note If the external device has a FG terminal, connect the shield wire to ground at both
the external device and the Serial Communications Board to prevent faulty op-
eration.
101
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-4
6-4 Using No-protocol Communications
6-4-1 TRANSMIT – TXD(––) and RECEIVE – RXD(––)
This section describes using TXD(––) and RXD(––) for no-protocol communica-
tions.
TRANSMIT – TXD(––) in No-protocol Mode
TXD(––)
S
C
N
First source word
Control word
Number of bytes
(4 digits BCD, 0000 to 0256)
Control Word: C
15
00
0
0
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Not used. (Set to 0.)
Port 0: RS-232C port on CPU Unit
1: Port 1 on Serial Communications Board
2: Port 2 on Serial Communications Board
Not used. (Set to 0.)
The specified number of bytes will be read starting from S and transmitted
through the specified port.
• Up to 256 bytes of data can be sent each time the instruction is executed.
• The bytes of source data shown below will be sent in the following order.
If most significant bytes first is specified (0): 12345678..
If least significant bytes first is specified (1): 21436587..
MSB LSB
S
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
S+1
S+2
S+3
Communications parameters are set in the PC Setup settings for the Serial
Communications Board. Refer to information in the CQM1H Programming
Manual on serial communications and TXD(––) for details.
102
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-4
RECEIVE – RXD(––) in No-protocol Mode
RXD(––)
First destination word
Control word
D
C
N
Number of bytes
(4 digits BCD, 0000 to 0256)
Control Word: C
15
00
0
0
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Not used. (Set to 0.)
Port 0: RS-232C port on CPU Unit
1: Port 1 on Serial Communications Board
2: Port 2 on Serial Communications Board
Not used. (Set to 0.)
The specified number of bytes are read from the specified port as specified in the
control word and stored starting at D.
• Up to 256 bytes of data can be read each time the instruction is executed.
• The bytes of received data will be received in the following order.
Digit 0 = 0
Digit 0 = 1
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
D
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
D
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+1
D+2
D+3
• If the value of N is larger than the number of receive bytes, only the number of
bytes actually received will be read into memory.
• Communications parameters for the Serial Communications Board are set in
the PC Setup. Refer to the CQM1H Programming Manual for details.
103
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-4
6-4-2 TXD(––) Communications Procedure
Confirm that the Transmission Enabled Flag is ON before executing TXD(––).
The Port 1 Transmission Enabled Flag is IR 20105 and the Port 2 Transmission
Enabled Flag is IR 20113. The Transmission Enabled Flag will turn OFF while
TXD(––) is being executed and will turn ON when the send has been completed.
C: Control Word
15
00
TXD(––)
0
0
First source word
Control word
S
C
N
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Number of bytes
(4 digits BCD, 0000 to 0256)
Not used. (Set to 0.)
Port 0: RS-232C port on CPU Unit
1: Port 1 on Serial Communications Board
2: Port 2 on Serial Communications Board
Not used. (Set to 0.)
Note Do not let TXD(––) be executed unless the Transmission Enabled Flag is ON.
6-4-3 RXD(––) Communications Procedure
The Reception Completed Flag will turn ON when data reception has been com-
pleted. The Port 1 Reception Completed Flag is IR 20106 and the Port 2 Recep-
tion Completed Flag is IR 20114.
When RXD(––) is executed, the receive data is stored in the specified data with-
out any start or end code and the Reception Completed Flag is turned OFF.
Reception is started when the start code is received. If the start code is disabled,
then data is received continually.
Reception is completed when the end code is received. If the end code is dis-
abled, then reception is completed when the specified number of bytes or
259 bytes have been received.
C: Control Word
15
00
RXD(––)
0
0
First destination word
Control word
D
C
N
Byte order
0: Most significant bytes first
1: Least significant bytes first
Number of bytes
(4 digits BCD, 0000 to 0256)
Not used. (Set to 0.)
Port 0: RS-232C port on CPU Unit
1: Port 1 on Serial Communications Board
2: Port 2 on Serial Communications Board
Not used. (Set to 0.)
The following flags and status information are available in the IR area. All bits are
cleared when RXD(––) is executed.
104
Using No-protocol Communications
Section 6-4
Port 1
IR 20100 to IR 20103 IR 20108 to IR 20111 Error Code
0: Normal operation
1: Parity error
Port 2
Function
2: Framing error
3: Overrun error
IR 20104
IR 20107
IR 20112
IR 20115
Communications Error Flag
Reception Overflow Flag (Turns ON
when data is received again before
the previous data is read with
RXD(––).)
IR 20200 to IR 20215 IR 20300 to IR 20315 Reception counter
Provides the number of bytes of
data received in 4-digit BCD (0 to
256).
The Port 1 Restart Bit (IR 20700) and Port 2 Restart Bit (IR 20701) can be turned
ON to initialize the serial communications ports. These bits will be turned OFF
automatically after the ports have been initialized.
6-4-4 Application Example
This example shows how to send data from DM 0100 to DM 0104 (each word
contains 3454) to a computer and then store data received from the computer
starting at DM 0200.
Conditions
PC Settings
The following settings are made in the PC Setup before executing the program.
Communications mode: No-protocol
Port settings:
Start code:
End code:
Other:
Standard
None
CR + LF
Default settings
Computer Settings
Set the same communications parameters as the PC and prepare the programs
to send and receive data.
Ladder Programming
00100
DIFU (13)
TXD
00101
Transmission
Enabled Flag
00101
DM0100
#0100
Reception
Competed Flag
#0010
20106
RXD
DM0200
#0100
#0256
1, 2, 3...
1. When IR 00100 turns ON, the contents of DM 0100 to DM 0104 will be sent
with most significant bytes first from port 1 on the Serial Communications
Board if IR 20105 is ON (Transmission Enabled Flag).
The following data will be received at the computer:
34543454345434543454CRLF
2. When IR 20106 (Reception Competed Flag) turns ON, 256 bytes of data re-
ceived on port 1 on the Serial Communications Board will be read and
stored starting at DM 0200 with most significant bytes first.
105
SECTION 7
Communications for 1:1 Data Links
This section provides information required to create 1:1 Data Links through a Serial Communications Board port.
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-1 Starting Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Using 1:1 Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
109
109
110
111
107
Overview
Section 7-1
7-1 Overview
If two PCs are linked one-to-one by connecting them together through RS-232C
or 4-wire RS-422A/485 cable, they can share up to 64 words of their LR areas.
The 1:1 Data Links are the same as normal Data Links in that data is not shared
bidirectionally, i.e., the link words written by one PC are transferred to the other
PC.
One of the following three ranges of words can be set to be linked:
LR 00 to LR 63, LR 00 to LR 31, or LR 00 to LR 15
A 1:1 Data Link communications system can be created between the CQM1H
and another CQM1H, or between the CQM1H and the CQM1, C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HS, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or SRM1(-V2).
One of the PCs is set as a 1:1 Data Link master and the other as a 1:1 Data Link
slave. The linked words are separated into two groups of words, and the words
written by each PC is transferred to the other PC, as illustrated in the following
diagram.
For example, if LR 00 to LR 63 are linked, the status of LR 00 to LR 31 written by
the master CQM1H will be transferred to LR 00 to LR 31 of the slave CQM1H,
and the status of LR 32 to LR 63 written by the slave CQM1H will be transferred
to LR 32 to LR 63 of the master CQM1H.
CQM1H or
other C-series PC
CQM1H or other C-series PC
Link
RS-232C
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H or
other C-series PC
CQM1H or
other C-series PC
LR 00
LR 00
Master area
(sent)
Master area
(received)
to
to
LR 31
LR 32
LR 31
LR 32
to
Slave area
(received)
Slave area
(sent)
to
LR 63
LR 63
The words in the LR area that will be linked are set in the PC Setup as shown in
the following table.
PC Setup Setting
Port 1
Port 2
Bits
Function
Setting
Master words
Slave words
DM 6555
DM 6550
04 to 07 Link words for 1:1 link
0 Hex: LR 00 to LR 63
1 Hex: LR 00 to LR 31
2 Hex: LR 00 to LR 15
LR 00 to LR 31 LR 32 to LR 63
LR 00 to LR 15 LR 16 to LR 31
LR 00 to LR 07 LR 08 to LR 15
7-1-1 Starting Data Links
Connect two PCs one-to-one through RS-232C or 4-wire RS-422A/485 cable,
make the proper settings in the PC Setup, and turn ON the power supplies. The
1:1 Data Link will start automatically.
108
Using 1:1 Data Links
Section 7-2
7-1-2 Specifications
Item
Specification
Connection
method
Connection of 2 PCs through their RS-232C ports (prepared
cable).
Note RS-422A/485 ports can also be connected if a 4-wire con-
nection method is used.
Applicable PCs
CQM1H, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, or
SRM1(-V2), C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS
There are restrictions in the number of words that can be
linked for some PCs.
Number of nodes
linked
2
Number of words
linked
64 words, LR 00 to LR 63
32 words, LR 00 to LR 31
16 words, LR 00 to LR 15
32 words sent per node
16 words sent per node
8 words sent per node
Linked words
One of three groups listed above
PC Setup in master PC
Link word setting
Order of allocation Words allocated to master PC first and then to slave PC.
Startup method
Automatic startup after turning ON power to master and slave
PCs.
Status flags
None
7-2 Application Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC.
2. Mount the Board.
3. Connections
Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422 cables. The TERM
and WIRE switches on the front panel of the Board must be set if the Board is
connected using the RS-422A/485 port.
The CPU Unit can be connected to a Programming Console, the CX-Pro-
grammer, or the CX-Protocol as required.
4. Turn ON power.
5. Set the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board.
Use a Programming Console, the CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to
set the settings in the PC Setup between DM 6550 and DM 6559.
Note The settings stored in these words are read constantly; the PC does
not need to be restarted or reset when changes are made to the set-
tings. They will be updated automatically as soon as they are
changed.
The following table shows the master PC settings for a 1:1 Data Link for LR 00 to
LR 63.
109
Overview
Section 7-3
Port 1
Port 2
Bits
00 to 07
08 to 11
Setting
---
Function
DM 6555
DM 6550
Not used.
0 Hex
Link words for 1:1 Data Link
0: LR 00 to LR 63 (default)
1: LR 00 to LR 31
2: LR 00 to LR 15
12 to 15
3 Hex
Communications mode
2: 1:1 Data Link slave
3: 1:1 Data Link master
DM 6556
DM 6557
DM 6558
DM 6559
DM 6551
DM 6552
DM 6553
DM 6554
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
00 to 15
---
---
---
---
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
6. Write and executed the ladder program.
The Always ON Flag (SR 25313) can be use to program instructions such as
MOV(21) to write data to be sent to the other PC to the sending words in the
LR area and to read data received from the other PC in the receiving words
in the LR area.
7-3 Connections
The connection examples in this section show only the basic connection dia-
grams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in ac-
tual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-pair cables. Refer to 2-3
Wiring for actual wiring methods.
CQM1H
CQM1H
Signal
Pin
Pin
Signal
Connector edge
Connector edge
D-sub, 9-pin male
connector on cable
D-sub, 9-pin male
connector on cable
110
Using 1:1 Data Links
Section 7-4
7-4 Using 1:1 Data Links
This section provides an example of using 1:1 Data Links.
Conditions
The following settings are made in the PC Setup before executing the program.
Master PC Settings
Communications mode: 1:1 Data Link master
Link words:
LR 00 to LR 15
Slave PC Settings
Communications mode: 1:1 Data Link slave
Ladder Programming
Master PC
Slave PC
Always ON Flag
Always ON Flag
MOV (21)
001
MOV (21)
MOV (21)
001
LR00
LR08
MOV (21)
LR08
LR00
100
100
When the programs in the two PCs are executed, the status of input word IR 001
of both PCs will be transferred to the other PC and will be output to output word
IR 100.
111
SECTION 8
NT Link Communications
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use 1:N-mode and 1:1-mode NT Links to Program-
mable Terminals (PTs).
8-1 Overview of NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1 NT Links — 1:N Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2 NT Links — 1:1 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Application Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
114
114
116
117
113
Connections
Section 8-1
8-1 Overview of NT Links
This section explains the application of a Serial Communications Board for an
NT Link in either 1:N or 1:1 mode. For details on the operation of the PT, refer to
the operation manual for the PT.
Note In an NT Link using 1:N mode, a PC can be connected to either one or more than
one PTs. There is no difference in functionality determined by the number of PTs
connected. The 1:1 mode, however, uses a different communications protocol
from the 1:N mode and these two modes are not compatible.
8-1-1 NT Links — 1:N Mode
A PC can be connected to one or more Programmable Terminals (PTs) using an
RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port. The I/O memory of the PC is allocated as a Sta-
tus Control Area and a Status Notification Area for the PT, as well as to objects,
such as touch switches, lamps, and memory tables. This enables the status of
the I/O memory in the PC to be controlled and monitored by operations from the
PT, without the use of ladder programming in the PC. One PC can be connected
to up to eight PTs.
The user does not need to be aware of the 1:N NT Links commands. All that is
necessary is to allocate PC memory for the PTs.
Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board
1:N connections
1:1 connection
PT
PT
PT
8-1-2 NT Links — 1:1 Mode
Although the functionality of an NT Link in 1:1 mode is the same as an NT Links in
1:N mode, only one PT can be connected to the PC. The 1:1 mode is not compat-
ible with the 1:N mode as a communications protocol.
Serial Communications Board
1:1 connection
PT
8-1-3 Precautions
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the serial port on the PT to a 1:N NT Link whenever the Serial Commu-
nications Board is set to a 1:N NT Link, and set the serial port on the PT to a
1:1 NT Link whenever the Serial Communications Board is set to a 1:1 NT
Link. The Serial Communications Board will not be able to communicate if
the PT port is set to a different mode.
2. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30/30C, and NT620S/620C/625C cannot be used
if the cycle time of the PC is 800 ms or longer. This is true in both 1:1 and 1:N
mode (even when a 1:1 connection is used in 1:N mode).
114
Connections
Section 8-1
3. The Programming Console functions of the PT (Expansion Mode) cannot be
used when connected to Serial Communications Board ports. They can be
used only by connecting to the peripheral port or RS-232C port on the CPU
Unit. This is true in both 1:1 and 1:N mode.
4. When using 1:N-mode NT Links, set a unique unit number for each PT con-
nected to the same PC. If the same unit number is set for more than one PT,
malfunctions will occur.
5. The number of PTs that can be connected to one port in 1:N mode is limited
by the CPU Unit’s cycle time when a Serial Communications Board is used,
as shown in the following diagrams. Although some communications will be
possible even if these restrictions are exceeded, communications errors will
occur depending on the PT operating conditions and communications load.
Always abide by these restrictions when using 1:N mode.
Example for NT31/NT631(C) PTs
Priority
Registered
PTs per port
CPU Unit’s cycle time (ms)
Priority Not
Registered
PTs per port
CPU Unit’s cycle time (ms)
115
Connections
Section 8-2
6. With some PTs, timeout settings can be changed to eliminate some of the
communications errors. Refer to the operation manual for the PT for details.
This is true in both 1:1 and 1:N mode.
7. If more PTs are required by the system than allowed by the above restric-
tions in 1:N mode, connect the PTs in smaller groups to different ports.
8-2 Application Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC.
2. Mount the Board.
3. Connections
Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422 cables. The TERM
and WIRE switches on the front panel of the Board must be set if the Board is
connected using the RS-422A/485 port.
The CPU Unit can be connected to a Programming Console, the CX-Pro-
grammer, or the CX-Protocol as required.
4. Turn ON power.
5. Set the PC Setup settings for the Serial Communications Board.
Use a Programming Console, the CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to
set the settings in the PC Setup between DM 6550 and DM 6559.
Note The settings stored in these words are read constantly; the PC does
not need to be restarted or reset when changes are made to the set-
tings. They will be updated automatically as soon as they are
changed.
NT Link Settings for 1:N Mode
The following table shows the settings for connecting more than one PT
when the highest PT unit number is 5.
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Setting
Function
DM 6555 DM 6550
00 to 07 ---
Not used.
08 to 11 5 (BCD) Maximum Programmable
Terminal unit number
1 to 7 (BCD)
NT Link in 1:N mode
12 to 15 5 Hex
---
Communications mode
NT Link in 1:N mode
Not used.
DM 6556 DM 6551 00 to 15
DM 6557 DM 6552 00 to 15
DM 6558 DM 6553 00 to 15
DM 6559 DM 6554 00 to 15
Port Settings are always the same for 1:N-mode NT Links. Settings of the
start bits, stop bits, parity, and baud rate are not necessary and will be ig-
nored.
Set the communications mode to a 1:N-mode NT Link (5 Hex).
Up to 8 PTs can be connected in 1:N mode. Set the highest unit number of
the PTs to be connected as the maximum Programmable Terminal unit num-
ber.
NT Link Settings for 1:1 Mode
The following table shows the settings for a 1:1-mode NT Link.
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Setting
Function
DM 6555 DM 6550
00 to 11 ---
Not used.
12 to 15 4 Hex
Communications mode
NT Link in 1:1 mode
116
Connections
Section 8-3
Port 1
Port 2
Bit(s)
Setting
---
Function
Not used.
DM 6556 DM 6551 00 to 15
DM 6557 DM 6552 00 to 15
DM 6558 DM 6553 00 to 15
DM 6559 DM 6554 00 to 15
Port Settings are always the same for 1:1-mode NT Links. Settings of the
start bits, stop bits, parity, and baud rate are not necessary and will be ig-
nored.
Set the communications mode to a 1:1-mode NT Link (4 Hex).
6. Operate the system.
Refer to the operation manual for your PT for operating instructions.
8-3 Connections
The connection examples in this section show only the basic connection dia-
grams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in ac-
tual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-pair cables. Refer to 2-3
Wiring for actual wiring methods.
Direct 1:1 Connection from RS-232C to RS-232C Ports (1:1 or 1:N Mode)
Serial Communications
Board
PT
Signal Pin
Pin Signal
FG
FG
Hood
Hood
--
FG
SD
RD
RTS
CTS
5V
--
SD
RD
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Interface
RTS
CTS
5V
DSR
DTR
SG
--
SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
• Communications Mode: 1:1 or 1:N-mode NT Link
• OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
XW2Z-500T-1: 5 m
Direct 1:1 Connection from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports (1:1 or 1:N Mode)
Serial Communications
Board
Short piece
Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Functional ground
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
• Communications Mode: 1:1 or 1:N-mode NT Link
Note Serial Communications Board settings: Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire.
117
Connections
Section 8-3
1:N, 4-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports (1:N Mode)
Serial Communications
Board
PT
Signal
Signal
Pin
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
RS-422
A/485
Inter-
face
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
FG
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
Short bar
Signal
PT
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link
Note Serial Communications Board settings: Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire.
1:N, 2-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports (1:N Mode)
Serial Communications
Board
PT
Signal
Signal
Pin
RS-422A/
485 Inter-
face
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
FG
Terminal block
Short bar
Signal
PT
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
Terminal block
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link
Note Serial Communications Board settings: Terminating resistance ON, 2-wire.
118
SECTION 9
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the troubleshooting and maintenance procedures for the Serial Communications Boards.
9-1 Front-panel Indicator Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-2 Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-3 1:N NT Link Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3-2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4 Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4-1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4-2 Settings after Replacing the Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4-3 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
121
121
125
129
130
130
131
132
132
132
132
119
Board Replacement
Section 9-1
9-1 Front-panel Indicator Error Displays
Indicators
Possible cause
Remedy
Board
RDY
CPU Unit
ERR/ALM
Lit
Not lit
The Serial Communications Board has
started normally.
---
Not lit
Lit
The Serial Communications Board is faulty If the ERR and ALM indicators light when
(hardware self-diagnostic function).
Board watchdog timer error: IR 20000 will
turn ON.
the Serial Communications Board is
mounted to another CPU Unit, replace the
Serial Communications Board.
A bus error has occurred.
Firmly secure the Serial Communications
Board to the CPU Unit.
An initialization recognition error has
occurred (the Serial Communications
Board is not correctly recognized by the
CPU Unit).
Not lit
Not lit
The CPU Unit is not receiving normal
power supply.
Check the power supply voltage and
supply the correct electric power to the
Unit.
The Serial Communications Board is not
correctly secured to the CPU Unit.
Firmly secure the Serial Communications
Board.
The Serial Communications Board is faulty.
If all the indicators are not lit when the
Serial Communications Board is mounted
to another CPU Unit, replace the Serial
Communications Board.
An error (such as a CPU Unit WDT error)
has occurred in the CPU Unit.
Eliminate the cause of the error. If the error
persists, replace the CPU Unit.
Lit
Lit
The Serial Communications Board is faulty. If all the indicators are lit when the Serial
Communications Board is mounted in
another CPU Unit, replace the Serial
Communications Board.
A bus error has occurred.
Check the operating environment and
eliminate the cause of the error.
Firmly secure the Serial Communications
Board.
Lit
Flashing
Flashing
An error has occurred in the CPU Unit.
(Cause of error eliminated, but error not
cleared.)
Eliminate the cause of the error. If the error
persists, replace the CPU Unit.
Flashing
A protocol data write error has occurred or If the indicator status remains the same
protocol data has been destroyed.
(Protocol data error: IR 20002)
when the protocol data is retransmitted,
replace the Serial Communications Board.
Connector may have become loose or the Transfer protocol data to the Serial
PC power supply may have turned OFF
while transferring protocol data.
Communications Board.
Conduct a loopback test. If an error
occurs, replace the Serial Communications
Board.
There is no protocol data.
The communications circuit is faulty.
Correct the protocol data and transfer it to
(Board Identification Error Flag: IR 20001) the Serial Communications Board.
A protocol data syntax error has occurred. Try executing a normal sequence for the
(Protocol macro error code: 4)
serial port where the error is occurring or
switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode
and remove the cause of the error.
Correct the PC Setup settings.
A PC Setup error has occurred.
(PC Setup Error Flags: IR 20013 to
IR 20015)
120
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial Communications
Board Error Information
For Serial Communications Boards, refer to the following error flags. When an
error occurs, the corresponding flag is turned ON. All of these flags represent
non-fatal errors.
Word
Bit
Name
Probable cause
Possible remedy
IR 200
00
Serial Communications Board The Board has failed.
Hardware Error Flag
Secure the Board firmly in the
slot or try it in a different CPU
Unit. If the problem persists,
replace the Board.
01
02
Port Identification Error Flag
(hardware error)
There is a problem with the
communications port.
Replace the Board.
Protocol Data Error Flag
A checksum error was found in
the protocol data.
Retransfer the protocol data.
If the problem persists,
replace the Board.
12/11
15
Protocol Macro Execution
Error Flag (Port 1/2)
An error occurred when the
Take countermeasures
PMCR instruction was executed. according to the error codes
stored in bits 08 to 11 (port 1)
or bits 12 to 15 (port 2) in
word 204.
Check the settings for the
Board in the PC Setup and
restart the Board.
PC Setup Error Flag
There is an error in the settings in
the PC Setup.
Error in settings for port12.
Error in settings for port 2.
14
13
Port 1 PC Setup Error Flag
Port 2 PC Setup Error Flag
Slot 1 Inner Board Error Flag
SR 254 15
Turns ON when an error occurs
in the slot 1 Inner Board. The
error code for slot 1 is stored in
AR 0400 to AR 0407.
See remedies for AR 04.
AR 04
00 to 07
Slot 1 Inner Board Error Code
01: Hardware error
Secure the Board firmly in the
slot or try it in a different CPU
Unit. If the problem persists,
replace the Board.
The Board has failed (watchdog
timer error). IR 20000 will also be
ON.
02: Hardware error
The Board has failed.
10: Serial Communications
Board error
Refer to the errors in IR 200.
See remedies for IR 20000,
IR 20001, IR 20002, IR
20011, IR20012, and
IR 20015.
When a fatal error occurs, the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will light.
When a non-fatal error occurs, the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash.
Refer to the indicator error displays.
Note The ERR/ALM indicator will continue to flash even after the cause of a non-fatal
error has been removed for the Serial Communications Board. The indicator can
be stopped by clearing the error from a Programming Console or other Program-
ming Device. Press the FUN Key and then the MONITOR Key from the Pro-
gramming Console. Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for the CX-
Programmer procedure.
9-2 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve transmission and reception problems.
9-2-1 Host Link Communications
Serial com-
munications
mode
Indicator
status
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
121
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial com-
munications
mode
Indicator
status
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial commu- ---
nications mode
is not set to
---
Bits 12 to 15 (Serial Serial communica- Set bits 12 to 15 of
Communications
Mode) of
tions mode is not
set correctly.
DM 6555/DM 6550 to
0 Hex. (Host Link).
Host Link.
DM 6555/DM 6550
are set to a value
other than 0 Hex.
Serial commu- The COMMj
nications mode indicators do
---
---
Cables are incor-
rectly connected.
Check the wiring.
is set to Host
Link.
not flash at all.
(Communica-
tions have not
been electrical-
ly established.)
The RS-422A/485
port setting (2-wire rect wiring setting.
or 4-wire) is incor-
rect (WIRE).
Reset the port to the cor-
Wire all nodes using the
4-wire method.
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E
are incorrectly
wired or set.
Commands are not Reset the serial commu-
being set from the
host.
nications port at the host,
and rewrite the program.
There is a hard-
ware error.
Replace the Serial Com-
munications Board.
The COMMj
indicators are
flashing, but
the response
has not been
returned to the
host. (Commu-
nications have
been electrical-
ly established.)
There is no
transmission
error.
IR 20100 to
IR 20103 or
IR 20108 to
IR 20177 are
0 Hex.
The PC Setup set- Reset the settings in the
tings for the Host PC Setup for the Host
Link unit No., Host Link unit No., Host Link
Link transmission transmission delay and
delay, or other set- other settings so that they
tings do not match match the settings at the
the settings for the host device.
remote device.
Correct the command
The command for- frame (header, Host Link
mat and data
Unit No., terminator, etc.)
and the program.
length of the data
sent from the host
are incorrect.
---
Cables are incor-
rectly connected.
Check the wiring and
switch settings, and cor-
rect if necessary.
The RS-422A/485
port setting (2-wire
or 4-wire) is incor-
rect (WIRE).
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E
are incorrectly
wired or set.
---
This is a transmis-
sion circuit hard-
ware error.
Conduct a loopback test
in serial communications
mode to check the trans-
mission lines. If an error
occurs during the test, re-
place the Serial Commu-
nications Board.
The send delay
time setting is too
long.
Reset the parameters in
the PC Setup correctly.
122
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial com-
munications
mode
Indicator
status
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial commu- The COMMj
nications mode indicators are
There is a
transmission IR 20100 to
error.
The error code in
The communica-
tions conditions
and baud rate do
not match the set-
tings at the host.
Review the PC Setup, the
host’s settings, and pro-
gram (such as commands
and frame format) based
on the response and the
error code.
is set to Host
Link. (Contin-
ued)
flashing, but
the response
has not been
returned to the
host.
IR 20103 for port 1
or IR 20108 to
IR 20111 for port 2
is 1 (parity error), 2
(framing error), or 3
(overrun error).
There is noise in-
terference.
Use shielded twisted-pair
cables.
Lay power lines separate-
ly using ducts.
Review the installation
environment to reduce
noise interference.
The COMMj
indicators are
flashing, and
an error re-
sponse has re-
turned to the
host.
There is no
transmission IR 20103 or
error.
IR 20100 to
A command was
sent from the host
with incorrect pa-
rameters.
Review the host’s settings
and program (such as pa-
rameter settings) based
on the response contents.
IR 20108 to
IR 20111 are
0 Hex.
There is a
transmission IR 20100 to
error.
The error code in
The communica-
tions conditions
Review the PC Setup, the
host’s settings and pro-
gram (such as commands
and frame format) based
on the response, and the
error code in IR 20100 to
IR 20103 or IR 20108 to
IR 20111.
IR 20103 for port 1 and baud rate do
or IR 20108 to not match the set-
IR 20111 for port 2 tings at the host.
is 1 (parity error), 2
(framing error), or 3
(overrun error).
The COMMj
indicators are
flashing, but
sometimes
there is no re-
sponse re-
turned.
There is an
intermittent
transmission
error.
The error code in
IR 20100 to
IR 20103 for port 1 able range, and the
The baud rate is
outside the allow-
Review the PC Setup.
Review the host’s settings
and program (such as
baud rate and frame for-
mat).
or IR 20108 to stop bits do not
IR 20111 for port 2 match, causing the
is 1 (parity error), 2 bits to be out of
(framing error), or 3 alignment.
(overrun error).
Terminating resist- Cables are incor-
Check the wiring.
ance switch
rectly connected.
(TERM) status
The RS-422A/485
port 2-wire/4-wire
terminating resist-
ance setting is in-
correct.
Turn ON the terminating
resistance of the Serial
Communications Board
and the last node by us-
ing the terminating resist-
ance switch. Turn OFF
the terminating resistance
of other nodes.
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E
are incorrectly
wired or the termi-
nating resistance is
incorrectly set.
The error code in
IR 20100 to
Transmission er-
rors are occurring
Use shielded twisted-pair
cables.
IR 20103 for port 1 that are caused by
Lay power lines separate-
ly using ducts.
or IR 20108 to
IR 20111 for port 2
is not 0.
noise interference.
Review the installation
environment to reduce
noise interference.
123
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial com-
munications
mode
Indicator
status
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Host Link,
slave-initiated
communica-
tions
The COMMj
indicators are
flashing, but
there is no re-
sponse from
the host.
A transmis-
sion error
has not been
detected at
the host.
---
There is a hard-
ware error in the
reception circuit.
Conduct a loopback test
in serial communications
mode to check the trans-
mission lines. If an error
occurs during the test, re-
place the Serial Commu-
nications Board.
---
---
Cables are incor-
rectly wired.
Check the wiring and cor-
rect.
There is a hard-
ware error in the
reception circuit.
Conduct a loopback test
in serial communications
mode to check the trans-
mission lines. If an error
occurs during the test, re-
place the Serial Commu-
nications Board.
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E
are incorrectly
wired or set.
---
---
Check the program at the
host. When unsolicited
communications are used
with Host Link mode,
there must be a response
returned from the host for
every command sent from
the Serial Communica-
tions Board.
Communications
parameters and
baud rate settings
The communica-
tions conditions
and baud rate do
Reset the parameters in
the PC Setup and at the
host correctly.
in the PC Setup do not match the set-
not correspond with tings at the host.
the settings at the
host.
124
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
9-2-2 Protocol Macros
Serial
commu-
nications
mode
Indicator
display
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial com- ---
munica-
tions mode
is not set to
protocol
---
Bits 12 to 15 (Serial Serial communications
Set bits 12 to 15 of
Communications
Mode) of
mode is not set correctly. DM 6555/DM 6550 to
6 Hex. (protocol mac-
ros).
DM 6555/DM 6550
are set to a value
other than 6 Hex.
macro.
Serial com- The
The PMCR(––)
instruction was
executed, but
IR 20708 or
IR 20708 or
The program is incor-
rect.
Set IR 20708 or
munica-
COMMj
IR 20712 (Protocol
Macro Executing
Flag) is set as a NO
execution condition
for PMCR(––).
IR 20712 (Protocol Mac-
ro Executing Flag) as a
NC execution condition
for PMCR(––).
tions mode indicators
is set to
protocol
macro.
do not
flash at all. IR 20712 (Pro-
(Commu-
nications
has not
tocol Macro Ex-
ecuting Flag)
did not turn ON.
The Error Flag
(SR 25503) is ON.
The problem cause is
one of the following:
– The data range for the operand settings for er-
PMCR(––) instruction C rors.
operand is incorrect.
Check the PMCR(––)
instruction C, S, and D
been elec-
trically es-
tablished.)
– The number of data
words in the S or D op-
erand exceeds 129.
The error code in
IR 20408 to
IR 20411 or
The sequence number
Set bits 00 to 11 of the
specified in bits 00 to 11 PMCR(––) instruction C
of the PMCR(––) instruc- operand to a value be-
tion C operand is a value tween 000 and 999
IR 20412 to
IR 20415 is 2 Hex
other than 000 Hex to
BCD.
(Sequence Number 999 BCD.
Error).
Check whether the com-
munications sequence
number is correct.
The specified commu-
nications sequence
number does not exist in
the protocol data.
The error code in
IR 20408 to
IR 20411 or
IR 20412 to
IR 20415 is 3 Hex
The data range of the
specified area is exceed- reduce the size of the
ed when data is being
written to or read from
the I/O memory of the
Specify another area, or
data to be sent or re-
ceived.
(Receive Data Write CPU Unit.
Range Overflow Er-
ror)
125
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial
commu-
nications
mode
Indicator
display
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial com- The
The PMCR(––) The error code in
The protocol data in the
Serial Communications
Board is incorrect.
Use CX-Protocol to cor-
rect and transfer the pro-
tocol data.
munica-
COMMj
instruction is
executed, but
IR 20708 or IR
IR 20408 to
IR 20411 or
IR 20412 to
tions mode indicators
is set to
protocol
macro.
do not
flash at all.
(Commu-
nications
have not
been elec-
trically es-
tablished.)
20712 (Protocol IR 20415 is 4 Hex
Macro Execut-
ing Flag) does
not turn ON.
(Protocol Data Syn-
tax Error).
IR 20708 or
Send processing is
The send wait time spe- Use CX-Protocol to
cified in communications check whether the send
sequence step units is
IR 20712 (Pro- not executed.
tocol Macro Ex-
ecuting Flag)
wait time is correctly set.
too long.
turns ON when
the PMCR(––)
instruction is
executed, but
data cannot be
sent or received
properly.
Serial com-
munica-
tions mode
IR 20708 or
IR 20711 or
Forced Abort Bit is force- Release the Forced
IR 20712 (Pro- IR 20715 (Forced
tocol Macro Ex- Abort Bit) are ON.
ecuting Flag)
set.
Abort Bit
is set to
protocol
momentarily
macro.
turns ON when
the PMCR(––)
instruction is
executed, but it
does not re-
main ON.
IR 20708 or
IR 20712 (Pro- running and does
tocol Macro Ex- not end (the words
ecuting Flag)
remains ON
when the
The sequence is
Protocol macro data is
not set correctly.
Use CX-Protocol trans-
mission line trace to
check whether the proto-
col data and PC Setup
settings are correct.
The PC Setup settings
such as the baud rate
and frame format differ
from those of the remote
node.
allocated in the CIO
Area is in receive
status).
PMCR(––)
instruction is
executed with-
out setting the
monitoring time
for individual
sequences
Send data has
already been
transmitted, but
there is no re-
sponse from
the remote
The contents of the The baud rate is outside Review the PC Setup
words allocated in
settings in the PC
the allowable range, or
there are bit errors due
settings.
Review the remote node
settings and the program
(including the baud rate,
frame format, and so
on).
Setup do not match to mismatched stop bits
those of the remote and so on.
node.
node.
The error code in
IR 20100 to
IR 20103 for port 1
or IR 20108 to
IR 20111 for port 2
is not 0.
The wiring is faulty.
Check the wiring.
The setting of the
2/4-wire switch for the
RS-422A/485 port does
not match the actual wir- and the last node. Turn
Turn ON the terminating
resistances of the Serial
Communications Board
ing (WIRE).
OFF the terminating re-
sistances of other
nodes.
Wiring of adapters (e.g.,
NT-AL001-E) is faulty.
---
Hardware failure.
Replace the Serial Com-
munications Board.
126
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Serial
commu-
nications
mode
Indicator
display
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial com- The
A transmission
error occurs.
The PC Setup settings
such as the baud rate
and frame format differ
from those of the remote
node. The baud rate is
outside the allowable
range, or there are bit er-
rors due to mismatched
stop bits and so on.
Review the PC Setup
settings.
The error code in
IR 20100 to
IR 20103 for port 1
or IR 20108 to
IR 20111 for port 2
is not 0.
munica-
tions mode
is set to
protocol
macro.
COMMj
indicators
are flash-
ing, but the
Serial
Review the remote node
settings and the program
(including the baud rate,
frame format, and so
on).
(Contin-
ued)
Commu-
nications
Board can-
not perform
commu-
The settings in the
PC Setup do not
match those of the
remote node.
Data is re-
---
Because response from Check the settings of the
the remote node is re- remote node and review
ceived too fast, the data programming (i.e., the
received from the time
the data send proces-
sing was completed until
the Send operation was
completed is discarded.
nications or
a commu-
nications
error
sometimes
occurs.
ceived through
CX-Protocol
transmission
line trace, but
the protocol
macros behave
as if no data is
received.
timing of sending re-
sponse data).
The remote
node some-
times returns
no response to
sent data. Re-
sponse may be
received by
performing re-
tries.
---
The transmission timing Set or increase the
is too fast for the remote transmission wait time
node to receive data.
(time to await data trans-
mission) in step units.
The
A transmission The error code in
The wiring is faulty.
Check the wiring.
COMMj
indicators
are flash-
ing, but the
Serial
Commu-
nications
Board can-
not perform
commu-
nications or
a commu-
nications
error
error some-
IR 20100 to
The RS-422A/485 port
terminating resistance
setting is incorrect.
Turn ON the terminating
resistance of the Serial
Communications Board
and the last node by us-
ing the terminating resis-
tance switch. Turn OFF
the terminating resis-
tance of other nodes.
times occurs.
IR 20103 for port 1
or IR 20108 to
IR 20111 for port 2
is not 0.
Adapters such as the
NT-AL001-E are incor-
rectly wired, or the termi-
nating resistance setting
is incorrect.
A communications error Use shielded twisted
frequently occurs due to pair cables.
noise and so on.
House the communica-
tions cables in a different
duct from those for pow-
er lines and so on.
sometimes
occurs.
Review the operating
environment to prevent
noise problems.
Note The following table shows the measures to correct error codes provided in
IR 20408 to IR 20411 for port 1 and IR 20412 to IR 20415 for port 2.
Error Indicator
code
Error details
Cause
Remedy
0 Hex No display Normal
1 Hex No display Reserved
---
---
---
---
127
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
Error
code
Indicator
Error details
Cause
Remedy
2 Hex No display Sequence
number error
The
Correct the communications sequence
number.
communications
sequence number
specified in bits 00
to 11 of the
Use CX-Protocol to register the
specified communications sequence
number.
PMCR(––)
instruction’s C
operand is not
registered.
3 Hex ERR/ALM Receive data
: Flashing write range
overflow error
The data range of
the specified area
is exceeded when
data is being
written to or read
from the I/O
For operand specification:
Check the PMCR(––) instruction S and
D operand specifications.
For direct specification of link words:
Use CX-Protocol to check the specified
range.
memory of the
CPU Unit.
4 Hex ERR/
ALM:
Protocol data
syntax error
There is a code
that cannot be
executed during
Check the following items and correct
the problem.
Flashing
• Check whether the total specified
number of link words in the area (O1,
O2, I1, I2) exceeds 128.
protocol execution.
• The same area with link word
specification is used by both ports 1
and 2.
• A write instruction with constant
specification is specified.
• An EM Area read/write instruction is
specified as an interrupt notification.
• There are more than 30 write
attributes set for one message.
• The length of a send/receive message
is set to 0 bytes.
• The length of a send/receive message
is longer than 127 bytes.
• No messages are registered for matrix
reception.
• Both RTS/CTS flow control and
Xon/Xoff flow control are set for the
same transmission line.
5 Hex ERR/
ALM:
Protocol macro The PMCR
execution error instruction was
Check if the PMCR instruction was
executed during any one of the following
Flashing
during port
executed while the processes.
initialization
port was being
initialized.
• While the serial communications port
was being restarted.
• While the serial communications mode
in the PC system setup of the Serial
Communications Board was being
modified using the STUP instruction.
• While the serial communications mode
in the PC system setup of the Serial
Communications Board was being
modified using the Programming
Device.
128
Board Replacement
Section 9-2
9-2-3 1:N NT Link Mode
Serial commu-
nications
mode
Indicator
display
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial commu-
nications mode
is not set to NT
Link.
---
---
Bits 12 to 15
Serial communica-
Set bits 12 to 15 (Serial
Communications Mode) of
DM 6555/ DM 6550 to
5 Hex.
(Serial Commu- tions mode is not
nications Mode) set correctly.
of DM 6555/
DM 6550 are
set to a value
other than
5 Hex.
Serial commu-
nications mode
is set to NT
Link.
The COMMj
indicators do
not flash at all.
(Communica-
tions have not
been electrical-
ly established.)
---
---
---
There is a hardware Conduct a loopback test in
error.
serial communications
mode to check the trans-
mission lines. If an error
occurs during the test, re-
place the Serial Commu-
nications Board.
The SD and
---
There is a setting
Correct the PT serial port
COMMj indi-
cators are
error for the PT seri- settings.
al port.
flashing, but the
Serial Commu-
nications Board
cannot commu-
nicate with the
Programmable
Terminal (PT).
The I:N NT Link unit Review the NT Link unit
number of the PT is number of the PT.
incorrect.
The same 1:N NT
Link unit number
has been set for
more than one PT
The maximum al-
Review the PC Setup set-
lowable NT Link unit tings.
number is incorrect-
ly set for the sys-
tem.
Cables are incor-
rectly connected.
Review the wiring or
switch settings.
The RS-422A/485
port setting (2-wire
or 4-wire) is incor-
rect.
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E are
incorrectly wired or
set.
A communications
error frequently oc-
curs due to noise,
etc.
Review the wiring and
installation environment.
There is a PT hard- Replace the PT.
ware error.
129
Board Replacement
Section 9-3
Serial commu-
nications
mode
Indicator
display
Status
information,
etc.
I/O memory
Cause
Remedy
Serial commu-
nications mode indicators are
The COMMj
---
---
Cables are incor-
rectly connected.
Review the wiring or
switch settings.
is set to NT
Link.
flashing, but a
communica-
tions error
sometimes oc-
curs in the PT.
The RS-422A/485
port setting (2-wire
or 4-wire) is incor-
rect.
Check whether the termi-
nating resistances of the
host computer and the last
node are set to ON, and
the terminating resistances
of other nodes are set to
OFF.
Adapters such as
the NT-AL001-E are
incorrectly wired or
set.
A communications
error frequently oc-
curs due to noise,
etc.
Review the wiring and
installation environment.
Increase the number of re-
tries for the PT as re-
quired.
The communica-
tions monitoring
Increase the communica-
tions monitoring time for
time for the PT is in- the PT.
sufficient.
The load on the PC Lighten the load on the
is too high.
PC.
Reduce the number of PTs
connected to each serial
port by using other ports
for some of the PTs.
Adjust the timeout and
retry settings in the PT.
Note The PT serial port must be set for a 1:N NT Link. The PT will not be able to com-
municate with a Serial Communications Board if the PT is set for a 1:1 NT Link.
9-3 Cleaning and Inspection
Use the cleaning and inspection methods described here for daily maintenance
of the devices.
9-3-1 Cleaning
To keep the Serial Communications Board in optimum condition, regularly clean
the Serial Communications Board as follows:
• Wipe the surface of the Serial Communications Board daily with a soft, dry
cloth.
• If any dirt cannot be removed with a dry cloth, moisten the cloth with a mild de-
tergent diluted to 2%, and squeeze out any excess moisture before wiping the
Serial Communications Board.
• Do not adhere materials, such as gum, vinyl, or tape to the Serial Communica-
tions Board for long periods of time. Doing so may cause stains on the device.
Remove any adhered materials when cleaning the Serial Communications
Board.
Note Never use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use
chemically treated cloths.
130
Board Replacement
Section 9-3
9-3-2 Inspection
To keep the Serial Communications Board in optimum condition, regular inspec-
tions must be performed. Normally, inspect the devices once every six months or
every year. Inspect the devices at more regular intervals when they are being
used in environments subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or high dust
levels.
Materials for Inspection
Prepare the following materials before performing any inspections.
Materials Required Daily
For daily inspection, a Phillips screwdriver, flat-blade screwdriver, tester (or digi-
tal voltmeter), industrial strength alcohol, and all-cotton cloth are required.
Materials Required Occasionally
For some inspections, a synchroscope, a pen oscilloscope, a temperature
gauge, and a hygrometer will be required.
Inspection Items
Inspect the following items to check whether the Serial Communications Board
is operating within the specified criterion. If the Serial Communications Board is
not within the criterion, improve the ambient operating environment and readjust
the device.
Item
Details
Criterion
Inspection
materials
Operating
environment
Check the ambient temperature
and the temperature inside the
control panel.
0 to 55°C
Temperature
gauge
Check the ambient humidify and 10% to 90% RH Hygrometer
the humidity inside the control
panel.
(no
condensation or
icing)
Check for accumulated dust.
No dust
Visual
inspection
Installation
Check that the Serial
Communications Board is
mounted securely.
Board must be
mounted
securely.
---
Check for loose screws on the
communications cables.
Screws must be Phillips
securely
screwdriver
tightened.
Check for damaged
communications cables.
Cables should
be fully intact.
Visual
inspection
131
Board Replacement
Section 9-4
9-4 Board Replacement
A malfunction of the Serial Communications Board may affect the operation of
remote communications devices, so be sure to perform repairs or replace the
faulty Board promptly. Make sure a spare Serial Communications Board is avail-
able to replace a faulty one, so that functionality can be restored without delay.
9-4-1 Precautions
Observe the following precautions when replacing the Serial Communications
Board.
• Always turn OFF the power to the PC before replacing the Serial Communica-
tions Board.
• Be sure to check that the Serial Communications Board replacing the faulty
one is not defective.
• If the defective Serial Communications Board is to be dispatched to the
manufacturer for repair, be sure to include documentation stating the nature of
the fault in as much detail as possible, and send to your nearest OMRON
branch or sales office, listed at the back of this manual.
If the contacts are defective, clean the contacts with a clean all-cotton cloth
moistened with industrial-strength alcohol. Remove any cloth particles before
mounting the Serial Communications Board.
Note Turn OFF the power to all serial external devices when replacing the Serial Com-
munications Board to prevent malfunctions.
9-4-2 Settings after Replacing the Board
After replacing the Serial Communications Board, make sure that wiring and set-
tings, such as hardware switch settings, the settings for the Serial Communica-
tions Board in the PC Setup, and protocol macro data are the same as the Serial
Communications Board that was replaced.
Note 1. If the CPU Unit is to be replaced, transfer to the replacement CPU Unit the
contents of the Holding Areas and DM Area required for operation before
starting operation. If the relationship between the DM Area and Holding
Area and the program is not maintained, unexpected malfunctions may re-
sult.
2. The PC Setup of the Serial Communications Board is saved in the DM Area
of the CPU Unit. If the CPU Unit is to be replaced, either transfer the PC Set-
up data to the CX-Programmer or CX-Protocol before replacing the CPU
Unit or reset the PC Setup.
9-4-3 Replacement Procedure
Standard System Protocols, Host Link Communications, No-protocol Communications, 1:1 Data
Links, or NT Links
1, 2, 3...
1. Turn OFF the power to the PC to which the Serial Communications Board to
be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices.
2. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Commu-
nications Board to be replaced, and also remove the Serial Communica-
tions Board.
3. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board to the same settings of
the Serial Communications Board being replaced before mounting, as fol-
lows:
• Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
• The 2/4-wire switch (WIRE)
132
Board Replacement
Section 9-4
4. Turn ON the power of the PC to which the replacement Serial Communica-
tions Board is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices, and
start operating the system.
5. Check from the indicators and status display that the system is operating
normally.
Protocol Macros Designed with CX-Protocol
1, 2, 3... 1. Connect Programming Console or CX-Protocol to the PC to which the re-
placement Serial Communications Board is mounted, and switch to PRO-
GRAM mode.
2. Save the protocol macro data using the CX-Protocol. Refer to the CX-Proto-
col Operation Manual (W344) for details.
3. Turn OFF the power to the PC to which the Serial Communications Board to
be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices.
4. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Commu-
nications Board to be replaced, and also remove the Serial Communica-
tions Board.
5. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board to the same settings of
the Serial Communications Board being replaced before mounting, as fol-
lows:
• Terminating resistance switch (TERM)
• The 2/4-wire switch (WIRE)
6. Turn ON the power of the PC to which the replacement Serial Communica-
tions Board is mounted, and to all serially connected external devices, and
start operating the system.
7. Switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode, and using the CX-Protocol, trans-
fer the protocol macro data to the Serial Communications Board.
8. Switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode, and start operating the system.
9. Check from the indicators and status display that the system is operating
normally.
Note 1. The protocol macro data for the Serial Communications Board is stored in
the flash memory of the Serial Communications Board.
2. When protocol macro data designed with the CX-Protocol is used, a backup
of the protocol macro data created from the CX-Protocol must be trans-
ferred to the Serial Communications Board after replacing.
3. The PC Setup of the Serial Communications Board is allocated to the DM
Area saved in the battery backup of the CPU Unit, and if the user-designed
macro data is not used, the PC Setup can be used as before, simply by set-
ting the hardware.
133
Appendix A
Introduction
Appendices B to N provide information on the standard system protocols provided with the CX-Protocol, the Serial
Communications Boards. Refer to 5-7 Using Protocol Macros for details on using PMCR(––).
Using Standard System Protocols
Standard system protocols can be executed merely by specifying the sequences number to be executed in the
second operand of PMCR(––) and settings the data described in the appendices in the proper format starting at
the word specified with the third operand of PMCR(––). The data received as a response to executing the se-
quence will be automatically stored starting at the word specified with the fourth operand of PMCR(––).
Procedure
1, 2, 3...
1. Set the port number (1 or 2) and the sequence number as BCD values in the first operand of
PMCR(––).
2. Specify the address of the first word containing the data required for the sequence as the second
operand (S: First word of send data) of PMCR(––).
3. Specify the address of the first word where respond data is to be stored as the third operand (D:
First receive data storage word) of PMCR(––). Unless there is a reason to specify otherwise, set
0000 Hex in D at the initial value.
Example
The following data would be used to execute sequence number 600 in the CompoWay/F Master Protocol for a
transmission with ASCII conversion.
PMCR(––)
Communications port: 1 (BCD)
Communications sequence number: 600 (BCD)
1600
S
D
S: Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Node number
SRC
(Undefined)
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
S+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0128 BCD
S+1
S+2
S+3
(Undefined)
Node No. (2 digits 00 to 99
BCD)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
(2 digits Hex)
Set the command code for the required
service
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the next byte
after the command code until the byte just
before the ETX. 0000 to 0492
S+4
on
Send data (4-digit Hex)
The data specified in hexadecimal here will
be converted to ASCII and the number of
bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
135
Introduction
Appendix A
D: Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Response code
Receive data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
D+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128 BCD
D+1
Response code (4 digits Hex)
The response code will be stored in
hexadecimal form.
D+2
on
Receive data (4-digit Hex)
The data from just after the response code
until just before the ETX will be converted
from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored here.
Standard System Protocols
The following 13 standard system protocols are provided with the CX-Protocol
and the Serial Communications Boards.
Protocol name
Function
CompoWay/F
Master
Protocol for sending CompoWay/F commands as a Master to OMRON CompoWay/F slave
components and receiving responses.
E5jK Digital
Controller Read
Protocol for controlling an E5jK Digital Controller via the Board. Procedures for reading the MV
the operating parameter settings
E5jK Digital
Controller Write
Protocol for controlling an E5jK Digital Controller via the Board. Procedures for writing set points
and operating parameters.
E5ZE Temperature Protocol for controlling an E5ZE Temperature Controller via the Board. Procedures for reading
Controller Read measured temperature and operating parameter settings.
E5ZE Temperature Protocol for controlling an E5ZE Temperature Controller via the Board. Procedures for writing
Controller Write control temperatures and operating parameters.
E5jJ Temperature Protocol for controlling a E5jJ Temperature Controller via the Board. Procedures for writing set
Controller points, reading output amounts, and reading/writing operating parameters.
ES100j Controller Protocol for controlling an ES100j Controller via the Board. Procedures for writing adjustment
parameters, reading operation amounts, and writing/reading operating parameters.
Intelligent Signal
Processor
Protocol for controlling a Intelligent Signal Processor via the Board. Procedures for writing
comparison values and reading display values are set.
V500/V520 Bar
Code Reader
Protocol for controlling a Bar Code Reader via the Board. Procedures for controlling the Bar Code
Reader in remote mode, reading the data that has been read by the Bar Code Reader, and
reading/writing operating parameters.
3Z4L Laser
Micrometer
Protocol for controlling a Laser Micrometer via the Board. Procedures for controlling the Laser
Micrometer in remote mode, reading measured data, and writing/reading operating parameters.
F200/F300/F350
Visual Inspection
Systems
Protocol for controlling a Visual Inspection System via the Board. Procedures for controlling the
Visual Inspection System in remote mode, reading measured values, and writing/reading
operating parameters.
V600/V620 ID
Controllers
Protocol for controlling an ID Controller via the Board. Procedures for performing Read/Write
operations of the ID Controller and writing/reading operating parameters.
Hayes modem AT
commands
Protocol for controlling a Hayes modem (AT commands) via the Board. Procedures for initialization
of the modem, dialing, data transmission, switching to escape mode, and disconnecting the line.
Note Some of the standard system protocols do not allow communications with 32 nodes for one execution of a
sequence (for 1:N connections). For example, it’s not possible when the number of Units in send data is 1 to
25 for unit numbers 00 to 31 (e.g., in the temperature controller read sequences). This restriction is due to a
limit in the number of words that can be transferred between the CPU Unit and the Serial Communications
Board. These sequences, however, allow the unit numbers of connected devices to be specified in the send
data. You can thus set different unit numbers in the send data and execute PMCR(––) for the same se-
quence as many times as required for all unit numbers.
136
Appendix B
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is used to send CompoWay/F commands with the CS1-series PC serving as
the host (master).
CompoWay/F
CompoWay/F is a protocol used by many OMRON components for serial communications. A host computer of a
PC can function as a host (master) to send CompoWay/F commands (message frames) to OMRON components,
which function as slaves. The components will return responses to these commands. Using CompoWay/F com-
mands, the host can read/write data, settings, and operating status to control the operation of the components.
CompoWay/F has the following features.
• The same message frame format is used, eliminating the need for special protocols for each component. The
same commands can thus be used for serial communications with all CompoWay/F components.
• The CompoWay/F protocol conforms to OMRON’s standard FINS command protocol, providing compatibility
with other networks and more flexible expansions in the future.
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is provided as a standard system protocol to enable the CQM1H-series PC to
executed read/write sequences for CompoWay/F commands.
System Configuration for Standard System Protocol
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H-series PC: Host
CompoWay/F response
OMRON CompoWay/F component: Slave
RS-232C
CompoWay/F command
RS-422A/485 Connections
CQM1H-series PC: Host
CompoWay/F response
RS-422A/485
CompoWay/F command
OMRON CompoWay/F components: Slaves
137
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Communications Specifications
Item
Specification
Transmission path Multipoint
connections
Communications
Synchronization
Baud rate
RS-232C, RS-422A/485, 4-wire half-duplex, 2-wire half-duplex
Start-stop
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200 bps
Default: 9,600 bps
Transmitted code
Data length
ASCII
7 bits or 8 bits (Default: 7 bits)
Note: A 7-bit code is used with 0 added to the beginning.
Stop bits
1 bit or 2 bits (Default: 2 bits)
Error detection
Horizontal parity (none, even, or odd) (Default: Even)
BCC (block check character)
*1: Start-stop Sync Data Configuration for Protocol Macros
LRC, 1 byte, equivalent to binary
Transmission Procedure
The PC or host computer serving as the master sends a command and the component serving as the slave returns
a response for the command message contained in the command. One response message is returned for each
command message. The movement of command and response messages is shown below.
Command message
Master (PC or host computer)
Slave (component)
Response message
Command and Response Formats
Note In the following diagrams “Hex” indicates hexadecimal values. Values in quotation marks, such as “00” indi-
cate ASCII characters.
Command Format
Node No.
2 bytes
Text
Data
Subaddress
Command
”00”
”0”
1 byte
2 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
1 byte
Response Format
Node No.
2 bytes
Subaddress End code
Response
Text
”00”
”00”
Data
(See note.)
1 byte
2 bytes
2 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Note 1. Data is not saved in the response if there is a command frame error (i.e., if the end code is not 00 or 0F).
2. Other values are possible for the subaddress and SID.
138
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Command Frame Contents
Item
Meaning
STX
A code, 02 Hex, indicating the beginning of a communications
frame (text). This code must always be set as the first byte.
Node number
The node number identifies the source of the command frame.
Specify “XX” to broadcast a transmission. There will be no response
made to a broadcast.
Subaddress
SID
Set “00” for most components. Other values must be set for special
components.
Set “0” for most components. Other values must be set for special
components.
Command and text
MRC and SRC
The command and required text are placed here. Refer to the
command codes and text for individual sequences.
The command code specifies the service being used. Refer to the
command codes and text for individual sequences.
ETX
BCC
A code, 03 Hex, indicating the end of text.
The block check character (horizontal parity, 1 byte). The character
is an exclusive OR of all data from just after the STX to the ETX.
Response Frame Contents
Item
Meaning
STX
A code, 02 Hex, indicating the beginning of a communications
frame (text). This code must always be set as the first byte.
Node number
The node number identifies the source of the command frame. “XX”
is specified to broadcast a transmission. There will be no response
made to a broadcast.
Subaddress
SID
“00” for most components. Other values must be set for special
components.
“0” for most components. Other values must be set for special
components.
End code (See note.)
The results of executing the command frame.
Note: The response code (MRES and SRES) indicates the results
for the command code; the end code indicates the results for the
command frame. These are not the same.
Response and text
The response and requested text are placed here. Refer to the
response and text for individual sequences.
MRES and SRES The response code specifies the results of processing the service
requested by the command code. Refer to the response codes and
text for individual sequences.
ETX
BCC
A code, 03 Hex, indicating the end of text.
The block check character (horizontal parity, 1 byte). The character
is an exclusive OR of all data from just after the STX to the ETX.
139
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Note The end codes are described in the following table.
End code
Name
Meaning
“00”
Normal end
The command frame was processed normally without any
of the following errors.
“0F”
“10”
“11”
“12”
Command error
Parity error
The specified command could not be executed. Refer to
the response code for more information.
A parity error was detected for one of the characters that
was received.
Framing error
Overrun error
A framing error was detected for one of the characters
that was received.
A overrun error was detected for one of the characters
that was received.
“13”
BCC error
The BCC for the receive frame was incorrect.
“14”
Format error
An illegal command or illegal character was received in
the command and text (characters other than ASCII 0 to 9
or A to F).
“16”
Subaddress error
Frame length error
The receive frame contained an illegal subaddress.
The receive frame was too long.
“18”
Example
The command and response frames for a K3Nj-series Intelligent Signal Processor are shown below.
Command Frame
Subaddress
Node No.
Text
Command
SID
Data
Command
code
Data contents
Command
Command
code
Data contents
VARIABLE AREA READ
VARIABLE AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA READ
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
“01” “01” Variable type Address
“00”
No. of
elements
“01” “02” Variable type Address
“00”
No. of
elements
Write data
Write data
“02” “01” Parameter
Address
Address
No. of elements
type
“02” “02” Parameter
No. of elements
type
PROCESSOR STATUS READ
“05” “03”
CONTROLLER STATUS READ “06” “01”
ECHOBACK TEST
“08” “01” Text data
“30” “05” Command code
OPERATION COMMAND
Response Format
Node No.
Subaddress
End code
Response
Text
Data
Response
code
Command
code
140
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Example: VARIABLE AREA READ
The following command and text are used to read the present value, maximum value, minimum value, and status
of the Intelligent Signal Processor.
Command and Text
No. of
elements
Variable
type
First read address
4 bytes
2 bytes
2 bytes
2 bytes
4 bytes
1, 2, 3...
1. Variable Type
Variable type
“C0”
Contents
Present value, maximum value, minimum value, status ,
and comparison value
2. First Read Address
Specify the address of the data to be read in 4 digits Hex.
3. Number of Elements: 4 Digits Hex
Number of elements
Process
Read the data and end normally.
“0001”
Note If “0000” is specified, nothing will be read and a normal end will be returned. A parameter error will occur for
any settings other than “0000” and “0001.”
Response Text
Response code
4 bytes
Read data
8 bytes
2 bytes 2 bytes
1, 2, 3...
1. Response Code: MRES, SRES
Response code
Meaning
“0000”
“1001”
“1002”
“1100”
“1101”
“1103”
“2203”
Normal end
Command too long
Command too short
Parameter error
Area type error
First address range error
Operating error
2. Read Data
The specified data is returned in 8 digits of hexadecimal data.
141
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Sequences
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol provides six communications sequences that can be used for the following:
• Converting to ASCII data or not converting to ASCII data
• Sending to a specified Unit or broadcasting
• Specifying from the command code or specifying from the subaddress and SID.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the CompoWay/F Master Protocol.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
600
Send with ASCII conver- Converts the specified data beginning with
Yes
Yes
sion, with response
the command code to ASCII and sends it
to the specified Unit. The response is con-
verted to hexadecimal and stored starting
at the specified word.
601
602
Broadcast with ASCII
conversion, no response No responses are received.
A broadcast version of sequence No. 600.
Yes
Yes
No
Send with no conversion Sends specified data beginning with the
and with response
Yes
command code to the specified Unit. The
response is stored starting at the specified
word. This is the same as sequence No.
600 without data conversion and can be
used when conversion is not required.
603
604
Broadcast with no con-
version and no response No responses are received.
A broadcast version of sequence No. 602.
Yes
Yes
No
General-purpose send
with no conversion and
with response
Sends specified data beginning with the
Yes
subaddress and SID to the specified Unit.
The response is stored starting at the spe-
cified word. This sequence can be used
whenever it is necessary to specify the
subaddress or SID.
605
General-purpose broad- A broadcast version of sequence No. 604.
Yes
No
cast with no conversion
and no response
No responses are received.
Sequence No. 600 can be used for the normal CompoWay/F Master function (ASCII conversion, specification
from command code).
Refer to the communications specifications for the OMRON CompoWay/F component to which the command is
being sent and set the command code and required data starting at the words specified for the 3rd operand of
PMCR(260).
The relationship between the CompoWay/F command and response frames and the operands of PMCR(260) is
described next.
142
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
CompoWay/F Message Frames and PMCR(260) Operands
The relationship between the CompoWay/F command and response frames and the operands of PMCR(260) is
shown below, using communications sequence No. 600 as an example.
Command Frame
No. of
elements
Variable
type
First read
address
Node No.
Subaddress
Command
Send data
PMCR(260) Instruction
Communications port: 1
Send/receive sequence number:
600 (0258 Hex)
PMCR(260)
#1600
Number of send data words
S
S
D
(Undefined)
Node number
S+1
S+2
S+3
S+4
S+5
S+6
Number of send bytes
Send data
Response Frame
Receive data
Read data
Node No.
Subaddress
End code
Response code
Response code
Receive data
PMCR(260) Instruction
PMCR(260)
#1600
S
D
Number of receive data words
Response code
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
Receive data
Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response:
(Sequence No. 600)
This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code to ASCII and sends it to the specified
Unit. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
143
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Node No.
MRC
SRC
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0128
+1
+2
+3
(Undefined)
Node No. (2 digits 00 to 99
BCD)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
(2 digits Hex)
Set the command code for the required
service
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the next byte
after the command code until the byte just
before the ETX.
0 to 984 decimal
+4
on
Send data (4-digit Hex)
The data specified in hexadecimal here will
be converted to ASCII and the number of
bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the
data is converted to ASCII data before being sent.
2. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data is sent starting from the send data word with
the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 4-byte units.
Send data words
Send frame
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
“56” “78” “12” “34”
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Response code
Receive data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128
+1
Response code (4 digits Hex)
The response code will be stored in
hexadecimal form.
+2
on
Receive data (4-digit Hex)
The data from just after the response code
until just before the ETX will be converted
from ASCII to hexadecimal and stored
here.
Note When ASCII data is converted to hexadecimal data, data is stored starting from the receive data word with
the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 4-byte units.
Receive frame
Receive data words
4
0
5
1
6
2
7
3
“01” “23” “45” “67”
144
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Example: The following example illustrates reading the present value from a K3Nj-series Intelligent Signal Proc-
essor.
CS1-series PC
CompoWay/F response
Read data = present value
Intelligent Signal Processor
K3Nj-jjjj-FLK1/2/3/4/5/6
CompoWay/F command
VARIABLE AREA READ
Command code: 01 01
First read address
Sequence No. 600 (Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response) is used. The specified data beginning with the
command code is converted ASCII and sent to the Intelligent Signal Processor with the specified node number.
The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
The command frame for reading the present value for a K3Nj-jjjj-FLK1/2/3/4/5/6 Intelligent Signal Proces-
sor (command code 01 01) is shown below. The following data is specified in the operands for PMCR(260).
• Rightmost byte of S+1: Node number (2 digits BCD)
• S+2: Command code: MRC + SRC = “0101”
• S+4 on: Send data = Variable type + first read address + 00 + number of elements.
Command code
MRC SRC
Send data
STX
Node No.
Subad-
dress
SID
ETX
BCC
Variable First read Always
No. of
elements
type
address
(Note)
00
1
1
(02Hex) (×10 ) (×10 ) 00
0
01
01
C0
0000
00
0001
(03Hex)
Data in shaded portions is specified in the PMCR(260) instruction.
Note A first read address of 0000 specifies the present value. An address of 0001 specifies the maximum value;
0002, the minimum value; and 0003, the status.
The response frame is shown below. The response code and receive data are stored according to the operands for
PMCR(260) as follows:
• D+1: Response code
• D+2 and on: Receive data
Command code
MRC SRC
01 01
Response code
Note 1
Receive
data
STX
Node No.
Subad-
dress
End
code
ETX
BCC
Read data
(Note 2)
1
1
(02 Hex) (×10 )
(×10 )
00
00
0000
(03 Hex)
Data in shaded portions is stored at the location specified by the operand in the PMCR(260) instruction.
Note 1. Response Codes
Response code
“0000”
Meaning
Normal end
“1001”
“1002”
“1100”
“1101”
“1103”
“2203”
Command too long
Command too short
Parameter error
Area type error
First address range error
Operating error
2. The read data is returned as 4-digit hexadecimal as follows: F0019999 to 00099999 Hex.
145
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
The 2nd and 3rd operands of the PMCR(260) instruction are specified as follows.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0007
+1
+2
(Undefined)
Node No. (2 digits 0000 Hex
BCD)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
0101 Hex
(2 digits Hex)
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Send data (12 digits Hex)
0012 (BCD)
C000 Hex
0000 Hex
0001 Hex
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
EX is stored at reception (0004)
+1
Response code (4 digits Hex)
Receive data (8 digits Hex)
The response code will be stored in
hexadecimal form.
The normal end response code is 0000.
The 4 bytes of read data.
+2
+3
Broadcast with ASCII Conversion, No Response
(Sequence No. 601)
This sequence converts the specified data beginning with the command code to ASCII and broadcasts it. No re-
sponses are received.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
MRC
SRC
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0128
---
+1
+2
(Undefined)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
(2 digits Hex)
Set the command code for the required
service
+3
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the next byte
after the command code until the byte just
before the ETX.
0 to 984 decimal
+4
on
Send data (4-digit Hex)
The data specified in hexadecimal here will
be converted to ASCII and the number of
bytes specified in S+3 will be sent.
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the
data is converted to ASCII data before being sent.
146
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
2. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data is sent starting from the send data word with
the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 4-byte units.
Send data words
Send frame
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
“56” “78” “12” “34”
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
Send with No Conversion and with Response
(Sequence No. 602)
This sequence sends the specified data beginning with the command code to the specified Unit. The response is
stored starting at the specified word. No conversions are performed on the send and receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Node No.
MRC
SRC
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0128
+1
+2
+3
(Undefined)
Node No. (2 digits 00 to 99
BCD)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
(2 digits Hex)
Set the command code for the required
service
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the next byte
after the command code until the byte just
before the ETX.
0 to 492 decimal
+4
on
The data specified in hexadecimal here is
not converted and the number of bytes
specified in S+3 is sent.
Send data
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Response code
Receive data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128
+1
Response code (4 digits Hex)
The response code will be stored in
hexadecimal form.
+2
on
The data from just after the response code
until just before the ETX is stored here
without conversion.
Receive data (Hex)
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
147
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response
(Sequence No. 603)
This sequence broadcasts the specified data beginning with the command code No responses are received and
no conversions are performed on the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
MRC
SRC
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0128
---
+1
+2
(Undefined)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
SRC
(2 digits Hex)
Set the command code for the required
service
+3
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the next byte
after the command code until the byte just
before the ETX.
0 to 492 decimal
+4
on
The data specified in hexadecimal here is
not converted and the number of bytes
specified in S+3 is sent.
Send data
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
148
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
General-purpose Send with No Conversion and with Response
(Sequence No. 604)
This sequence sends the specified data beginning with the subaddress and SID to the specified Unit. The re-
sponse is stored starting at the specified word. No conversions are performed on the send and receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Node No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Subaddress
SID
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006 to 0128
+1
+2
+3
+4
Always 00 Hex
Node No. (2 digits 00 to 99
BCD)
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
Subaddress (2
digits Hex)
Specify the subaddress of the device being
communicated with.
Always 00 Hex
SID (1 digit Hex)
Set the service ID of the required service
(e.g., retries).
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the MCR until
the byte just before the ETX.
0 to 490 decimal
+5
on
The data specified in hexadecimal here is
not converted and the number of bytes
specified in S+4 is sent.
Send data
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Response code
Response data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128
+1
Response code (4 digits Hex)
The response code will be stored in
hexadecimal form.
+2
on
The data from just after the response code
until just before the ETX is stored here
without conversion.
Receive data
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
149
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
General-purpose Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response
(Sequence No. 605)
This sequence broadcasts the specified data beginning with the subaddress and SID. No responses are received
and no conversions are performed on the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Subaddress
SID
Number of send bytes
Send data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006 to 0128
---
+1
+2
Always 0000 Hex
MRC
(2 digits Hex)
Subaddress (2
digits Hex)
Specify the subaddress of the device being
communicated with.
+3
+4
Always 00 Hex
SID (1 digit Hex)
Set the service ID of the required service
(e.g., retries).
Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD)
Number of data bytes from the MCR until
the byte just before the ETX.
0 to 490 decimal
+5
on
The data specified in hexadecimal here is
not converted and the number of bytes
specified in S+4 is sent.
Send data
+0
+1
+3
+5
+2
+4
+6 etc.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
None. (Specify a dummy value for the operand, such as #0000.)
150
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
Connections
Connection methods between a Serial Communications Board and the K3Nj-series Intelligent Signal Processor
are shown below.
RS-232C
• RS-232C connections are one-to-one.
• The max. cable length is 15 m. Use an RS-232C optical interface (Z3RN) when extending the transmission line
beyond 15 m.
• Use shielded, twisted-pair cable.
Intelligent
Signal
Processor
Serial
Communications
Board
RS-232C
RS-232C
Abbrevi- Pin
Pin Abbrevi-
No. ation
MAX232C or equivalent
ation
No.
FG
1
1
FG
SG
SG
SD
9
2
3
4
5
7
7
2
3
4
5
6
TX
SD
RD
RD
RX
RTS
CTS
DSR
RTS
CTS
DSR
DTR
8
20 DTR
K3Nj-jjjj-FLK1
Shield
Intelligent
Signal
Processor
Serial
Communications
Board
RS-232C
RS-232C
MAX232C or equivalent
Abbrevi- Pin
Pin Abbrevi-
No. ation
ation
No.
9
2
3
SG
SD
5
3
2
SG
SD
TX
RX
RD
RD
4
5
7
RTS
CTS
DSR
RTS
CTS
DSR
7
8
6
4
8
DTR
DTR
Shield
1/
Shell
K3Nj-jjjj-FLK4
FG
151
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
Appendix B
RS-422 4-wire Connections
• RS-422 connections can be one-to-one, or one-to-N when a 3G2A9-AL001 Link Adapter is used. A maximum of
32 Serial Communications Boards can be connected in one-to-N systems.
• The total cable length can be 500 m max.
• Use shielded, twisted-pair cable.
• Be sure to turn ON the terminating resistance switches at the device at each end of the transmission line.
Serial
Communications
Intelligent Signal
Board
RS-422
Processor
SN751177N or equivalent
Abbreviation
Terminal
block switch
Ab-
brevi-
ation
220 Ω
Pin
No.
Shell
6
8
1
2
220 Ω
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch
to the 4-wire setting.
Shield
The terminator (220 Ω) is set with the terminal block switch.
*2: Turn ON the terminat-
ing resistance switch.
RS-485 2-wire Connections
• RS-485 connections can be one-to-one or one-to-N. A maximum of 32 Serial Communications Boards can be
connected in one-to-N systems.
• The total cable length can be 500 m max.
• Use shielded, twisted-pair cable.
• Be sure to turn ON the terminator switches only in the devices at each end of the transmission line.
Serial
Communications
Board
Intelligent Signal Processor
Turn OFF all terminal block
switches except at the end-station.
SN751177N or equivalent
RS-485
Abbreviation
Terminal
block
switch
Ab-
brevi-
ation
Termi-
nal
220 Ω
Shell
1
2
+
Shield
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch
to the 2-wire setting.
Intelligent Signal
Processor end-station
*2: Turn ON the terminat-
ing resistance switch.
Terminal
block switch ON
Ab-
brevi-
ation
Termi-
nal
220 Ω
+
Terminal block switch ON at the end station.
Shield
Note SYSMAC BUS Wired Remote I/O devices cannot be connected.
152
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
The E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for the Con-
troller connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications sequence
name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
000
001
Read process value
Reads the process value.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read set point during SP ramp
Reads the set point during SP
ramp.
Yes
002
003
004
005
Read MV
Reads the MV (heating, cooling).
Reads the set point.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read set point
Read alarm value
Reads alarm value 1, 2.
Read proportional band, integral
time, and derivative time
Reads the proportional band, inte-
gral (reset) time, and derivative
(rate) time
006
007
008
009
Read cooling coefficient
Read dead band
Reads the cooling coefficient.
Reads the dead band.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read manual reset value
Read hysteresis
Reads the manual reset value.
Reads the hysteresis (heating,
cooling).
010
011
Read control period
Reads the control period (heating,
cooling).
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read SP ramp time unit and set
value
Reads the SP ramp time unit and
SP ramp set value.
012
013
Read LBA detection time
Reads the LBA detection time.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read MV at stop and PV error
Reads the MV at stop and the MV
at PV error.
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
Read MV limits
Reads the MV limits.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read input digital filter
Read alarm hysteresis
Read input shifts
Reads the input digital filter.
Reads the alarm 1, 2 hysteresis.
Reads the input shift limits.
Reads parameters in level 0.
Reads parameters in level 1.
Reads parameters in level 1.
Reads parameters in level 2.
Reads parameters in level 2.
Read level 0 parameters
Read level 1 parameters 1
Read level 1 parameters 2
Read level 2 parameters 1
Read level 2 parameters 2
General-purpose read
Reads the value of the specified
parameter.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd or 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 2nd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set a dummy word (e.g., DM 0000) address for the 3rd operand (D).
153
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Connection Configuration
The connection configuration for using the E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol is shown below.
RS-232C Connection
E5jK
CQM1H
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-232C port
→
Serial Communications Board
RS-232C: D-sub 9 pin female
E5jK
RS-232C: Terminal block
Signal name
Pin No.
Terminal No. Signal name
Shielded cable
Note 1. The communications configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m.
2. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater) for the cable.
RS-485 Connection
CQM1H
E5jK
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-485 port
→
→
E5jK
Up to 31 Units can be connected.
E5jK
→
Note 1. The communications configuration is a one-to-one configuration or a one-to-N configuration. In the one-
to-N configuration, up to 32 units including the Serial Communications Board can be connected.
2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for the cable (AWG28i or great-
er).
3. Connect a terminator only at both ends of the transmission path. For instance, in the example shown
below, connect a terminator to the Serial Communications Board and Unit No.30 and do not connect any
154
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
terminator to units No.0 to No.29. Use a resistance of 120Ω (1/2W) for the terminators (the total resis-
tance of both ends must be 54Ω or more).
Serial Communications Board
RS-485: D-sub
9 pin female
Pin No.
Shielded cable
E5CK (No. 0)
E5CK (No. 30)
RS-485: Terminal block
RS-485: Terminal block
Terminal No.
Terminal No.
A<B: [1] Mark
A>B: [0] Space
Terminator (120
ꢀ
ꢁ
1
/
2
W
)
Read Process Value (Sequence No. 000)
Reads the process value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Process value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Process value (4 digits BCD)
Scaling lower limit to upper limit
Read Set Point during SP Ramp (Sequence No. 001)
Reads the set point during the SP ramp and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Set point during SP ramp
155
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Set point during SP ramp
(4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
Read MV (Sequence No. 002)
Reads the MV (manipulated variable) for heating and cooling and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
MV (heating)
MV (cooling)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
+2
MV (heating) (4 digits BCD)
F050 to 1050, 0000 to 1050 for
heating/cooling control
F indicates a negative value.
MV (cooling) (4 digits BCD)
F050 to 1050
F indicates a negative value.
Read Set Point (Sequence No. 003)
Reads the set point and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Set point
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
Read Alarm Value (Sequence No. 004)
Reads alarm value 1 and alarm value 2 and stores the results in the specified words.
156
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
+1
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
+2
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time
(Sequence No. 005)
Reads the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Proportional band
Integral time
Derivative time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004
+1
+2
+3
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Read Cooling Coefficient (Sequence No. 006)
Reads the cooling coefficient and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
157
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Cooling coefficient
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
Read Dead Band (Sequence No. 007)
Reads the dead band and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Dead band
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Dead band (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Read Manual Reset Value (Sequence No. 008)
Reads the manual reset value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Manual reset value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Manual reset value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
158
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Read Hysteresis (Sequence No. 009)
Reads the hysteresis for heating and for cooling and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
Hysteresis (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0001 to 9999
Hysteresis (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
Read Control Period (Sequence No. 010)
Reads the control period for heating and for cooling and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
Control period (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
0001 to 0099
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
Read SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 011)
Reads the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
159
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
+2
SP ramp time unit (4 digits BCD)
SP ramp set value (4 digits BCD)
0000: s, 0001: hr
0000 to 9999
Read LBA Detection Time (Sequence No. 012)
Reads the LBA (loop break alarm) detection time and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
LBA detection time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
LBA detection time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
160
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Read MV at Stop Time and at PV Error (Sequence No.013)
Reads the MV at stop time and at PV error and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
MV at stop time
MV at PV error
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
MV at stop time (4 digits BCD)
F050 to 1050
F indicates a negative value.
A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
A indicates a negative value.
+2
MV at PV error (4 digits BCD)
F050 to 1050
F indicates a negative value.
Read MV Limits (Sequence No. 014)
Reads the MV upper limit, MV lower limit, and MV change rate limit and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004
+1
+2
MV upper limit (4 digits BCD)
MV lower limit + 1 to 1050
0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
MV lower limit (4 digits BCD)
F050 to MV upper limit –1
F indicates a negative value values.
A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
A indicates a negative value.
+3
MV change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
161
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Read Input Digital Filter (Sequence No. 015)
Reads the input digital filter and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Input digital filter
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Input digital filter (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Read Alarm Hysteresis (Sequence No. 016)
Reads the alarm 1 hysteresis and alarm 2 hysteresis and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
Alarm 1 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0001 to 9999
Alarm 2 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
Read Input Shift Limits (Sequence No. 017)
Reads the input shift upper limit and input shift lower limit and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
162
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
+2
Input shift upper limit (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Read Level 0 Parameters (Sequence No. 018)
Reads parameters in level 0 (process value, set point during SP ramp, MV (heating), MV (cooling), and set point)
from multiple units and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive
data storage
words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Process value
Set point during SP ramp
MV (heating)
1st unit
MV (cooling)
Set point
~
~
Process value
Set point during SP ramp
MV (heating)
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
8th unit (max.)
MV (cooling)
Set point
163
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 5 + 1
+1
+2
1st unit
Process value (4 digits BCD)
Scaling lower limit to upper limit
Set point lower limit to upper limit
1st unit
Set point during SP ramp
(4 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
MV (heating) (4 digits BCD)
F050 to 1050
F indicates a negative value.
0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling
control
+4
+5
1st unit
MV (cooling) (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1050
1st unit
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
D
D
D
+40
(max.)
8th unit
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
Read Level 1 Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 019)
Reads parameters in level 1 (alarm value 1, alarm value 2 , alarm value 3, proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time) from multiple units and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive
data storage
words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of receive data words
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Alarm value 3
1st unit
Proportional band
Integral time
Derivative time
~
~
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Alarm value 3
Proportional band
Integral time
+43
+44
+45
+46
+47
+48
8th unit (max.)
Derivative time
164
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 6 + 1
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
1st unit
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
1st unit
Alarm value 3 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
1st unit
Proportional band
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
+5
+6
1st unit
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
1st unit
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+48
(max.)
8th unit
0000 to 3999
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
Read Level 1 Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 020)
Reads parameters in level 1 (cooling coefficient, dead band, manual reset value, hysteresis (heating), hysteresis
(cooling), control period (heating), and control period (cooling)) from multiple units and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
165
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
Number of receive data words
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
Manual reset value
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
1st unit
~
~
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
+50
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
Manual reset value
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
8th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 7 + 1
+1
+2
1st unit
0001 to 9999
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Dead band (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
+3
+4
1st unit
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0001 to 9999
1st unit
Hysteresis (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
+5
+6
1st unit
0001 to 9999
0001 to 0099
Hysteresis (cooling) (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Control period (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
+7
1st unit
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
D
D
D
+56
(max.)
8th unit
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
166
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Read Level 2 Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 021)
Reads parameters in level 2 (SP ramp time unit, SP ramp set value, LBA detection time, MV at stop, MV at PV
Error, MV upper limit, MV lower limit, and MV change rate limit) from multiple units and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Number of receive data words
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
LBA detection time
MV at stop
1st unit
MV at PV error
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
~
~
+57
+58
+59
+60
+61
+62
+63
+64
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
LBA detection time
MV at stop
8th unit (max.)
MV at PV error
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
167
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 8 + 1
1st unit
0000: s, 0001: hr
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
F050 to 1050
SP ramp time unit (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
SP ramp set value (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
LBA detection time (4 digits BCD)}
1st unit
MV at stop (4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
A indicates a negative value.
+5
1st unit
F050 to 1050
F indicates a negative value.
MV at PV error (4 digits BCD)
A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
A indicates a negative value.
+6
+7
1st unit
MV upper limit (4 digits BCD)
MV lower limit + 1 to 1050
0000 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
1st unit
MV lower limit (4 digits BCD)
F050 to MV upper limit –1
F indicates a negative value.
A050 to 1050 for heating/cooling control
A indicates a negative value.
+8
1st unit
MV change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
D
D
D
+64
8th unit
(max.)
MV change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
Read Level 2 Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 022)
Reads parameters in level 2 (input digital filter, alarm 1 hysteresis, alarm 2 hysteresis, alarm 3 hysteresis, input
shift upper limit, and input shift lower limit) from multiple units and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
168
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of receive data words
Input digital filter
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
1st unit
Alarm 3 hysteresis
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
~
~
Input digital filter
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
Alarm 3 hysteresis
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
+43
+44
+45
+46
+47
+48
8th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 6 + 1
1st unit
0000 to 9999
Input digital filter (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Alarm 1 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
+3
+4
+5
+6
1st unit
Alarm 2 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0001 to 9999
1st unit
Alarm 3 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Input shift upper limit (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+48
(max.)
8th unit
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
169
Appendix C
E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol
General-purpose Read (Sequence No. 023)
Reads the specified parameter and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
(Undefined)
+2
Parameter No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Parameter No. (2 digits BCD)
Refer to the manual for the E5jK.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Read data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Read data (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
Note To read parameters in the setup mode or extended mode, execute Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075) in
advance.
170
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
The E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the Controller
connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
050
051
052
Write set point
Writes the set point.
Yes
No
No
No
Write alarm value
Writes alarm value 1, 2.
Yes
Write proportional band,
integral time, and deriva-
tive time
Writes the proportional band, integral
time, and derivative time.
Yes
053
054
055
056
057
Write cooling coefficient
Write dead band
Writes the cooling coefficient.
Writes the dead band.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Write manual reset value
Write hysteresis
Writes the manual reset value.
Writes the hysteresis (heating, cooling)
Write control period
Writes the control period (heating, cool-
ing)
058
Write SP ramp time units
and set value
Writes the SP ramp time unit and SP
ramp set value.
Yes
No
059
060
Write LBA detection time
Writes the LBA detection time.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Write MV at stop time and Writes the MV at stop and the MV at PC
PV error
error.
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
Write MV limits
Writes the MV limits.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Write input digital filter
Write alarm hysteresis
Write input shift values
Write level 0 parameters
Writes the input digital filter.
Writes alarm 1, 2 hysteresis.
Writes the input shift values.
Writes parameters in level 0.
Write level 1 parameters 1 Writes parameters in level 1.
Write level 1 parameters 2 Writes parameters in level 1.
Write level 2 parameters 1 Writes parameters in level 2.
Write level 2 parameters 2 Writes parameters in level 2.
General-purpose write
Writes the value of the specified parame-
ter.
071
Switch to level 0 (software Switches the setting level to level 0.
reset)
Yes
No
072
073
Run/stop
Initiates Run or Stop.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Remote/local
Switches the mode to remote or local
mode.
074
075
076
Execute/cancel AT
Switch to level 1
Software reset
Executes or cancels AT.
Switches the setting level to level 1.
Resets the E5jK.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd or 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 2nd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set a dummy word (e.g., DM 0000) address for the 3rd operand (D).
171
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5jK Digital Controller Read Protocol.
Write Set Point (Sequence No. 050)
Writes the set point.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
set point
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Alarm Value (Sequence No. 051)
Writes alarm value 1 and alarm value 2.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
+2
+3
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
+3
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 999
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time
(Sequence No. 052)
Writes the proportional band, integral time, and derivative time.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Proportional band
Integral time
+2
+3
+4
Derivative time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 (fixed)
+1
+2
+3
+4
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
172
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Cooling Coefficient (Sequence No. 053)
Writes the cooling coefficient.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Cooling coefficient
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
Data
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Dead Band (Sequence No. 054)
Writes the dead band.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Dead band
Offset
Contents (data format)
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Dead band (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Manual Reset Value (Sequence No. 055)
Writes the manual reset value.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Manual reset value
Offset
Contents (data format)
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Manual reset value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Hysteresis (Sequence No. 056)
Writes the hysteresis for heating and for cooling.
173
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Hysteresis (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
+3
Hysteresis (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Control Period (Sequence No. 057)
Writes the control period for heating and for cooling.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Control period (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
+3
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 058)
Writes the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
SP ramp time unit (4 digits BCD)
0000:
0001:
Minutes
Hours
+3
SP ramp set value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
174
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write LBA Detection Time (Sequence No. 059)
Writes the LBA detection time.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
LBA detection time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
LBA detection time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write MV at Stop Time and at PV Error (Sequence No. 060)
Writes the MV at stop time and the MV at PV error.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
MV at stop time
MV at PV error
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
+3
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
MV at stop time (4 digits BCD)
MV at PV error (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1050
0000 to 1050
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write MV Limits (Sequence No. 061)
Writes the MV upper limit, MV lower limit, and MV change rate limit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
MV upper limit
data
+1
Unit No.
+2
+3
+4
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
MV upper limit (4 digits BCD)
MV lower limit +1 to 1050
Heating/cooling control time: 0000 to 1050
+3
+4
MV lower limit (4 digits BCD)
0000 to MV upper limit –1
MV change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
175
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Input Digital Filter (Sequence No. 062)
Writes the input digital filter.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Input digital filter
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Input digital filter (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Alarm Hysteresis (Sequence No. 063)
Writes the alarm 1 hysteresis and alarm 2 hysteresis.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Alarm 1 hysteresis
Alarm 2 hysteresis
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Alarm 1 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
+3
Alarm 2 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Input Shift Value (Sequence No. 064)
Writes the input shift upper limit and input shift lower limit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
+3
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Input shift upper limit (4 digits BCD)
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
176
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Level 0 Parameters (Sequence No. 065)
Writes parameters (set points) in level 0 to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
Set point
Set point
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+16
8th unit (max.)
Set point
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Set point lower limit to upper limit
Set point lower limit to upper limit
D
D
D
+17
8th unit
(max.)
Set point (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
177
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Write Level 1 Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 066)
Writes parameters in level 1 (alarm value 1, alarm value 2, alarm value 3, proportional band, integral time, and
derivative time) to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Alarm value 3
Proportional band
Integral time
1st unit
Derivative time
~
~
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
+57
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Alarm value 3
Proportional band
Integral time
8th unit (max.)
Derivative time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 7 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
1st unit
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
1st unit
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
1st unit
Alarm value 3 (4 digits BCD)
A999 to 9999
F indicates a negative value and A
indicates –1.
+6
+7
+8
1st unit
0001 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+57
(max.)
8th unit
0000 to 3999
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
178
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Write Level 1 Parameter 2 (Sequence No. 067)
Writes parameters in level 1 (cooling coefficient, dead band, manual reset value, hysteresis (heating), hysteresis
(cooling), control period (heating), and control period (cooling)) to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
Manual reset value
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
1st unit
~
~
+58
+59
+60
+61
+62
+63
+64
+65
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Cooling coefficient
Dead band
Manual reset value
Hysteresis (heating)
Hysteresis (cooling)
Control period (heating)
Control period (cooling)
8th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 8 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
+6
1st unit
0001 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 1000
0001 to 9999
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Dead band (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Manual reset value (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Hysteresis (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
+7
+8
+9
1st unit
Hysteresis (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0001 to 0099
0001 to 0099
1st unit
Control period (heating)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+65
(max.)
8th unit
Control period (cooling)
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
179
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Write Level 2 Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 068)
Writes parameters in level 2 (SP ramp time unit, SP ramp set value, LBA detection time, MV at stop time, MV at PV
error, MV upper limit, MV lower limit, and MV change rate limit) to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
LBA detection time
MV at stop
1st unit
MV at PV error
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
~
~
+65
+66
+67
+68
+69
+70
+71
+72
+73
(Undefined)
Unit No.
SP ramp time unit
SP ramp set value
LBA detection time
MV at stop
8th unit (max.)
MV at PV error
MV upper limit
MV lower limit
MV change rate limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 9 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
1st unit
0000 to 0001
SP ramp time unit (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
0000 to 9999
SP ramp set value (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
0000 to 9999
LBA detection time (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
MV at stop (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1050
1st unit
0000 to 1050
MV at PV error (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
MV upper limit (4 digits BCD)
MV lower limit +1 to 1050
0000 to MV upper limit –1
0000 to 1000
1st unit
MV lower limit (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
MV change rate limit (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+73
(max.)
8th unit
MV change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
180
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Write Level 2 Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 069)
Writes parameters in level 2 (input digital filter, alarm 1 hysteresis, alarm 2 hysteresis, alarm 3 hysteresis, input
shift upper limit, and input shift lower limit) to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Input digital filter
alarm 1 hysteresis
alarm 2 hysteresis
alarm 3 hysteresis
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
1st unit
~
~
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
+57
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Input digital filter
alarm 1 hysteresis
alarm 2 hysteresis
alarm 3 hysteresis
Input shift upper limit
Input shift lower limit
8th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 7 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
1st unit
0000 to 9999
0001 to 9999
Input digital filter (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Alarm 1 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
+5
+6
1st unit
Alarm 2 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0001 to 0099
1st unit
Alarm 3 hysteresis
(4 digits BCD)
+7
+8
1st unit
000 to 9999
000 to 9999
Input shift upper limit (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+57
(max.)
8th unit
000 to 9999
Input shift lower limit (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
181
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
General-purpose Write (Sequence No. 070)
Writes the specified parameter.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(Undefined)
Parameter No.
Write data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
+3
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Parameter No. (2 digits BCD)
Write data (4 digits BCD)
Refer to the manual of E5jK.
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note To write parameters in the setup mode or extended mode, execute Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075) in
advance.
Switch to Level 0 (Software Reset) (Sequence No. 071)
Resets the operation of the E5jK and waits until communications are enabled. This sequence can be executed
for multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note When this sequence is executed, a software reset command is issued and the operation of the E5jK is
reset (equivalent to turning on the power supply). About five seconds will be required until communications
are enabled.
182
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Run/Stop (Sequence No. 072)
Switches the mode to Run or Stop according to the command code. This sequence can be executed for multiple
units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
Command code
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
Command code
~
~
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+16
8th unit (max.)
Command code
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
0000: Run
0001: Stop
Command code (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+17
(max.)
8th unit
0000: Run
0001: Stop
Command code (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Remote/Local (Sequence No. 073)
Switches to remote operation or local operation according to the command mode. This sequence can be executed
for multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
Command code
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
Command code
~
~
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+16
8th unit (max.)
Command code
+17
183
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
0000: Local
0001: Remote
Command code (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+17
(max.)
8th unit
0000: Local
0001: Remote
Command code (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Execute/Cancel AT (Sequence No. 074)
Executes or cancels AT (autotuning) according to the command code. This sequence can be executed for multiple
units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
Command code
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
Command code
~
~
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+16
8th unit (max.)
Command code
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
0000: Stop
0001: Execute AT 40%
0002: Execute AT 100%
Command code (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+17
(max.)
8th unit
0000: Stop
0001: Execute AT 40%
0002: Execute AT 100%
Command code (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
184
Appendix D
E5jK Digital Controller Write Protocol
Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075)
Switches the setting level to level 1 (setup mode, extended mode). This sequence can be executed for multiple
units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Software Reset (Sequence No. 076)
Resets the operation of the E5jK (equivalent to turning on the power supply). This sequence can be executed for
multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
~
~
(Undefined)
+9
Unit No.
(max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
+2 to 9 Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Communications with the E5jK are disabled for about five seconds after this sequence is executed.
185
Appendix E
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for the
Temperature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Note All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory banks.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications sequence
name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
100
101
102
103
Read set point
Reads the set points.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read process value
Read output value
Reads the process values.
Reads the output values.
Yes
Yes
Read set point, process value,
and output value
Reads the set points, process val-
ues, and output values.
Yes
104
Read proportional band, integral
time, and derivative time
Reads the proportional bands, in-
tegral times, and derivative times.
Yes
Yes
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
Read control period
Read output mode
Read alarm mode
Reads the control periods.
Reads the output modes.
Reads the alarm modes.
Reads the alarm temperatures.
Reads the hysteresis.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read alarm temperature
Read hysteresis
Read operation status
Read error status
Reads the operation status.
Reads the error status.
Read setting unit
Reads the setting units.
Read input shift value
Read manual reset value
Read ramp value
Reads the input shift values.
Reads the manual reset values.
Reads the ramp values.
Read present set point
Read output value limits
Reads the present set points.
Reads the output value limits.
Read output value change rate
limit
Reads the output value change
rate limits.
119
120
121
122
123
Read HB alarm and HS alarm val- Reads the HB alarm and HS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
id channels
alarm valid channels.
Read heater burnout/SSR failure
detection currents
Reads the heater burnout/SSR
failure detection currents.
Read heater current and SSR
leakage current
Reads the heater currents and
SSR leakage currents.
Read dead band/overlap band
Reads the dead bands and over-
lap bands.
Read cooling coefficient
Reads the cooling coefficients.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd or 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 2nd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set a dummy word (e.g., DM 0000) address for the 3rd operand (D).
187
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Connections
This section shows connections for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
E5ZE
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
Signal
Pin abbrevi-
No. ation
Signal name
Ab-
brevi-
ation
Signal direction
Pin No.
Signal ground or common
return line
SG
–
7
Send data
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
NC
Output
Input
Output
Input
Input
Output
–
2
Receive data
3
Request to send
Clear to send
4
5
Data set ready
6
Data terminal ready
Disabled (Do not connect.)
20
1, 8 to 19, 21 to 25
Serial Communications
Board
RS-232C: D-sub
9-pin female
LT1181CS or
equivalent
E5ZE
RS-232C: D-sub
9-pin female
Signal Pin
name No.
Pin Signal
No. name
Shielded cable
Note 1. The maximum communications cable length is 15 m. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28 or
greater) for the cable.
2. Use a 25-pin D-sub Plug (OMRON XM2A-2501).
3. Use XM2S-2511 Hood (OMRON) or an equivalent.
188
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
RS422/485 Connections
• RS-485
Pin No.
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction
1
2
3
4
5
Disabled (Do not connect.)
Disabled (Do not connect.)
Signal ground
–
–
–
–
SG
B
–
Terminal B (+ side)
I/O
I/O
Terminal A (– side)
A
Turn off the communications switch
to disconnect terminating resistance.
SN751177N or
equivalent
Terminating
resistance
240 Ω
Serial Communications
Board
E5ZE
RS-485: D-sub
9-pin female
RS-485: Terminals
Signal
name
Signal
Ter-
Pin No.
name
minal
Shielded cable
E5ZE
RS-485: Terminals
Shielded cable
Terminating
resistance
Ter-
minal
Signal
name
Terminating
resistance
Note Terminal block pins 1 and 2 cannot be connected. If these blocks are used, operation of the E5ZE may fail.
189
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
• RS-422A
Pin No.
Signal name
Receive data B
Receive data A
Abbreviation
RDB
Signal direction
1
2
3
4
5
Input
Input
–
RDA
Signal ground
Send data B
Send data A
SG
SDB
Output
Output
SDA
Turn off the communications switch
to disconnect terminating resistance.
Serial Communications
Board
RS-422A: D-sub
9-pin female
E5ZE
SN751177N or
equivalent
Terminating
resistance
RS-422A:
Terminating
Terminals
Signal Pin No.
name
resistance
Ter-
minal
Signal
name
Terminating
resistance
Shielded cable
Terminating
resistance
Terminal
block
Terminating
resistance
Shielded cable
Ter-
Signal
minal name
240Ω
Terminating
resistance
190
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Switch Settings
This section shows the switch settings for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
Communications Parameter DIP Switch
Pins 3 and 4: Terminating resistance
Pins 1 and 2: RS-422A/RS-485
Factory defaults: All OFF
Pins
Parameter
RS-422A
RS-485
3 and 4 Terminating
resistance
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1 and 2 RS-422A or RS-485
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Unit Number Switch
Setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Unit No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
Y Factory defaults
Baud Rate DIP Switch
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Factory default: 9,600 bps
(pin 1 ON, pin 2 OFF)
Baud rate
(bps)
19,200
9,600
4,800
2,400
Pins 1 and 2
ON
ON
ON
ON
Read Set Point (Sequence No. 100)
Reads the set points and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
191
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
~
~
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
+15
Channel 7
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+1
+2
Channel 0
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
Channel 0
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
D
D
D
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer the manual for the E5ZE.
+15
+16
Channel 7
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
Channel 7
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Read Process Value (Sequence No. 101)
Reads the process values and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
+15
Channel 7
+16
192
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+1
+2
Channel 0
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
Channel 0
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
D
D
D
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+15
+16
Channel 7
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
Channel 7
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Read Output Values (Sequence No. 102)
Reads the output values of the control outputs and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Output value
Channel 0
Cooling output value
Output value
Channel 1
Cooling output value
~
~
Output value
+15
Channel 7
Cooling output value
+16
193
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
+3
+4
Channel 0
Output value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 0
Cooling output value (4 digits BCD)
Channel 1
Output value (4 digits BCD)
Channel 1
Cooling output value (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Output value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Cooling output value (4 digits BCD)
Read Set Point, Process Value, and Output Value
(Sequence No. 103)
Reads the set points, process values, and output values and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to OF
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
Output value
Channel 0
~
~
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
Output value
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
Channel 7
194
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0041
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
Channel 0
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Channel 0
0000 to 1000
Output value (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
Channel 7
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
Channel 7
Process value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Process value (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Channel 0
0000 to 1000
Output value (4 digits BCD)
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time
(Sequence No. 104)
Reads the proportional bands (constant P), integral times (constant I), and derivative times (Constant D) and
stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Constant P
Channel 0
Constant I
Constant D
~
~
+22
+23
+24
Constant P
Constant I
Constant D
Channel 7
195
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0025
+1
+2
+3
Channel 0
Constant P (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Channel 0
Constant I (4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Constant D (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+22
+2 3
+24
Channel 7
Constant P (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Channel 7
Constant I (4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Constant D (4 digits BCD)
Read Control Period (Sequence No. 105)
Reads the control periods and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Control period
Channel 0
Cooling control period
Control period
Channel 1
Cooling control period
~
~
Control period
+15
Channel 7
Cooling control period
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
Channel 0
Control period (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
Channel 0
Cooling control period
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Control period (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
0001 to 0099
Channel 7
Cooling control period
(4 digits BCD)
196
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Output Mode (Sequence No. 106)
Reads the output modes (normal/reverse) and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
Number of receive data words
+0
+1
(Undefined)
Set code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
Read Alarm Mode (Sequence No. 107)
Reads the alarm modes and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Alarm 1 set code
Channel 0
Channel 1
Alarm 2 set code
Alarm 1 set code
Alarm 2 set code
~
~
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Alarm 1 set code
Alarm 2 set code
+15
Channel 7
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C
00 to 0C
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C
00 to 0C
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
197
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Alarm Temperatures (Sequence No. 108)
Reads the alarm temperatures and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
~
~
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 1 digit)
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
+29
+30
+31
+32
Channel 7
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0033
0000 to 9999
+1
+2
+3
+4
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0009
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 0
0000 to 0009
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative number.
D
D
D
+29
+30
+31
+32
Channel 7
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 7
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0009
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 07
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0009
F indicates a negative number.
198
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Hysteresis (Sequence No. 109)
Reads the hysteresis and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Hysteresis
Channel 0
Cooling hysteresis
Hysteresis
Channel 1
Cooling hysteresis
~
~
Hysteresis
+15
Channel 7
Cooling hysteresis
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
Channel 0
Hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
Channel 0
Cooling hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Channel 7
Cooling hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
Read Operation Status (Sequence No. 110)
Reads the operation status of the E5ZE and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Status code
Channel 0
Status code
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Status code
Channel 7
199
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Status code (4 digits Hex)
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
Channel 1
Status code (4 digits Hex)
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Status code (4 digits Hex)
0000 to FFFF
Read Error Status (Sequence No. 111)
Reads the contents of errors if they have occurred and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Status code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
Status code (4 digits BCD)
0000 to FFFF
Read Setting Unit (Sequence No. 112)
Reads the setting units and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Set code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Set code (4 digits BCD)
0000: unit of 1
0001: unit of 0.1
200
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Input Shift Value (Sequence No. 113)
Reads the input shift values and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Input shift value
Channel 0
Input shift value
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Input shift value
Channel 7
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a negative number.
Channel 1
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a negative number.
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a negative number.
Read Manual Reset Value (Sequence No. 114)
Reads the manual reset value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Manual reset value
Channel 0
Manual reset value
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Manual reset value
Channel 7
201
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
Channel 1
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
Read Ramp Value (Sequence No. 115)
Reads the ramp values and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Ramp value
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Channel 0
Time unit
(Undefined)
Ramp value
(Undefined)
Channel 1
Time unit
~
~
(Undefined)
Time unit
Ramp value
(Undefined)
+15
Channel 7
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
000 to 999
+1
+2
Channel 0
Ramp value (3 digits BCD)
Channel 0
S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
Time unit (one ASCII character)
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Ramp value (3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Channel 7
Time unit (one ASCII character)
S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
202
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Present Set Point (Sequence No. 116)
Reads the present set points during ramp operation and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Present set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Present set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
~
~
+15
Present set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Present set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 7
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+1
Channel 0
Present set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
+2
Channel 0
Present set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
D
D
D
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+15
+16
Channel 7
Present set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
F indicates a negative value.
Channel 7
Present set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Read Output Value Limit (Sequence No. 117)
Reads the output value limits and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
203
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Output value lower limit
Output value upper limit
Channel 0
Channel 7
Cooling control output value lower limit
Cooling control output value upper limit
~
~
+29
+30
+31
+32
Output value lower limit
Output value upper limit
Cooling control output value lower limit
Cooling control output value upper limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0033
+1
Channel 0
Output value lower limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+2
+3
+4
Channel 0
Output value upper limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 0
Cooling control output value upper
limit (4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Cooling control output value upper
limit (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+31
+32
Channel 7
Cooling control output value upper
limit (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Cooling control output value upper
limit (4 digits BCD)
Read Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 118)
Reads the output value change rate limits and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Output value change rate limit
Output value change rate limit
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Output value change rate limit
Channel 7
204
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Output value change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
Channel 1
Output value change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Output value change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
Read HB Alarm and HS Alarm Valid Channels
(Sequence No. 119)
Reads the valid or invalid channels for HB alarms and HS alarms and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Set code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
Set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
Read Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Currents
(Sequence No. 120)
Reads the heater burnout and SSR failure detection currents and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
205
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
+15
Channel 7
+16
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
Channel 0
Heater burnout detection current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
Channel 0
SSR failure detection current
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Heater burnout detection current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
Channel 7
SSR failure detection current
(4 digits BCD)
Read Heater Current and SSR Leakage Current
(Sequence No.121)
Reads the heater currents and SSR leakage currents and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Heater current
Channel 0
SSR leakage current
Heater current
Channel 1
SSR leakage current
~
~
Heater current
+15
Channel 7
SSR leakage current
+16
206
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0017
+1
+2
Channel 0
Heater current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
Channel 0
SSR leakage current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
D
D
D
+15
+16
Channel 7
Heater current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
Channel 7
SSR leakage current
(4 digits BCD)
Note The read data will be 0000 for all channels for which HB and HS alarms are not enabled and for all channels
for which control is stopped.
Read Dead Band/Overlap Band (Sequence No. 122)
Reads the dead bands/overlap bands and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Dead band/overlap band
Channel 7
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a number.
Channel 1
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a number.
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
F indicates a number.
207
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
Appendix E
Read Cooling Coefficient (Sequence No. 123)
Reads the cooling coefficients and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Cooling coefficient
Channel 0
Cooling coefficient
Channel 1
~
~
+8
Cooling coefficient
Channel 7
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0009
+1
+2
Channel 0
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0100
0000 to 0100
Channel 1
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
Channel 7
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0100
208
Appendix F
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the Tem-
perature Controller connected via a RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable from the PC via the Serial Communications
Board.
Note 1. Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
2. All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory banks.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol.
Ladder interface
Send word Receive
Sequence
No.
Communications sequence name
Function
allocation
word
allocation
150
151
152
Write set point (setting unit 1)
Write set point (setting unit 0.1)
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 1.
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 0.1.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Write proportional band, integral time, and Writes the proportional bands, integral times,
derivative time
and derivative times.
153
154
155
156
Write control period
Writes the control periods.
Writes the output modes.
Writes the alarm modes.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Write output mode
Write alarm mode
Write alarm temperature (setting unit 1)
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting
unit of 1.
157
Write alarm temperature (setting unit 0.1)
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting
unit of 0.1.
Yes
No
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
Write hysteresis
Writes the hysteresis.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Start autotuning
Starts autotuning.
Cancel autotuning
Cancels autotuning.
Write setting unit
Writes the setting units.
Writes the input shift values.
Writes the manual reset values.
Writes the ramp values.
Writes the manual output values.
Writes the output value limits.
Write output value change rate limits.
Saves settings.
Write input shift value
Write manual reset value
Write ramp value
Write manual output value
Write output value limit
Write output value change rate limit
Save settings
Initialize settings
Initializes settings.
Write HB alarm and HS alarm valid chan-
nels
Writes the HB alarm and HS alarm valid chan-
nels.
171
Write heater burnout and SSR failure
detection currents
Writes the heater burnout and SSR failure
detection currents.
Yes
No
172
173
174
175
176
Write dead band/overlap band
Write cooling coefficient
Start control
Writes the dead bands/overlap bands.
Writes the cooling coefficients.
Starts temperature control.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Stop operation or control
Start manual operation
Stops temperature control or manual operation.
Starts manual operation.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd or 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 2nd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set a dummy word (e.g., DM0000) address for the 3rd operand (D).
209
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1) (Sequence No. 150)
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 1 (4 digits).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Set point
(Undefined)
Set point
Channel 0
Channel 1
(Undefined)
~
~
Set point
+16
+17
Channel 7
(Undefined)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Channel 0
Set point
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Set point
(4 digits BCD)
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
Not used
---
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note When the setting unit for the set point is 0.1 (5 digits), use Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1), Sequence
No.151.
210
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1) (Sequence No. 151)
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 0.1 (5 digits).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
+16
+17
Channel 7
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
Channel 0
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
+3
Channel 0
Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
D
D
D
Varies according to the temperature sensor
type. Refer to the manual for the E5ZE.
+16
+17
Channel 7
Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Set point (rightmost 1 digit)
(1 digit BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note When the setting unit for the set point is 1 (4 digits), use Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1), Sequence No.150.
211
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time
(Sequence No. 152)
Writes the proportional bands (constant P), integral times (constant I), and derivative times (constant D).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Constant P
Constant I
Constant D
Channel 0
Channel 7
~
~
Constant P
Constant I
Constant D
+23
+24
+25
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0026 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Constant P (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+3
+4
Channel 0
Constant I (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Channel 0
Constant D (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+23
+24
+25
Channel 7
Constant P (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 3999
0000 to 3999
Channel 7
Constant I (4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Constant D (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
212
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Control Period (Sequence No. 153)
Writes the control periods and cooling control periods.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Control period
Cooling control period
Control period
Channel 0
Channel 1
Cooling control period
~
~
Control period
+16
Channel 7
Cooling control period
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Control period (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
+3
Channel 0
Cooling control period
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
+4
+5
Channel 1
Control period (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
0001 to 0099
Channel 1
Cooling control period
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Control period (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0099
0001 to 0099
Channel 7
Cooling control period
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
213
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Output Mode (Sequence No. 154)
Writes the output mode (normal/reverse).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(Undefined)
Write code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
00 to FF
Write code (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Alarm Mode (Sequence No. 155)
Writes the alarm modes for alarm 1 and alarm 2.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Alarm 1 set code
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set code
Alarm 1 set code
Alarm 2 set code
Channel 1
~
~
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Alarm 1 set code
alarm 2 set code
+16
Channel 7
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
00 to 0C
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex)
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C
00 to 0C
00 to 0C
Channel 1
Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex)
Channel 1
Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Alarm 1 set code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0C
00 to 0C
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set code (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
214
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 1) (Sequence No. 156)
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 1 (4 digits)
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Alarm 1 set value
(Undefined)
Channel 0
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set value
(Undefined)
~
~
Alarm 1 set value
(Undefined)
+30
+31
+32
+33
Alarm 2 set value
(Undefined)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0034 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+3
+4
Not used
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+5
Not used
D
D
D
+32
+33
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Not used
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
215
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 0.1) (Sequence No. 157)
Writes the alarm temperatures using a setting unit of 0.1 (5 digits)
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
Channel 0
Channel 7
~
~
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digit)
+30
+31
+32
+33
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0034 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Alarm 1 set value (leftmost 1 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0009
0000 to 9999
0000 to 0009
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+32
+33
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set value (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 0009
Channel 7
Alarm 2 set value (leftmost 1 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
216
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Hysteresis (Sequence No. 158)
Writes the hysteresis for control outputs for ON/OFF control.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Hysteresis
Cooling hysteresis
Hysteresis
Channel 0
Channel 1
Cooling hysteresis
~
~
Hysteresis
+16
Channel 7
Cooling hysteresis
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Cooling hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Channel 1
Hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
Channel 1
Cooling hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Channel 7
Cooling hysteresis (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Start Autotuning (Sequence No. 159)
Starts autotuning (AT).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(Undefined)
Channel
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
0 to 7
Channel (Channel) No. (1 digit BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
217
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Cancel Autotuning (Sequence No. 160)
Cancels Autotuning (AT) for all channels.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Setting Unit (Sequence No. 161)
Writes the setting unit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Write code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Write code (4 digits BCD)
0000: unit of 1
0001: unit of 0.1
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Input Shift Value (Sequence No. 162)
Writes the input shift values.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Input shift value
Unit No.
Channel 0
Input shift value
Input shift value
Input shift value
Input shift value
Input shift value
Input shift value
Input shift value
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
218
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
+3
+4
Channel 1
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
Channel 2
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
+9
Channel 6
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
Channel 7
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Manual Reset Value (Sequence No. 163)
Writes the manual reset values.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Manual reset value
Unit No.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Manual reset value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+3
+4
Channel 1
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 2
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
+9
Channel 6
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Manual reset value
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
219
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Ramp Value (Sequence No. 164)
Writes the ramp values.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Time unit
(Undefined)
Time unit
Unit No.
Ramp value
(Undefined)
Ramp value
(Undefined)
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
(Undefined)
Time unit
Ramp value
(Undefined)
+16
Channel 7
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Ramp value (3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Time unit (one ASCII character)
S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
000 to 999
Channel 1
Ramp value (3 digits BCD)
Channel 1
Time unit (one ASCII character)
S: Second M: Minute H: Hour
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Ramp value (3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Channel 7
Time unit (one ASCII character)
S: Seconds; M: Minutes; H: Hours
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Manual Output Value (Sequence No. 165)
Writes the manual output values for control output in manual operation.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Output value
Cooling output value
Output value
Channel 0
Channel 1
Cooling output value
~
~
Output value
+16
Channel 7
Cooling output value
+17
220
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Output value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+3
Channel 0
Cooling output value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+4
+5
Channel 1
Output value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 1
Cooling output value
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Output value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Cooling output value
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Output Value Limit (Sequence No. 166)
Writes the output value limits that restrict the values of the control outputs.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Output value lower limit
Unit No.
Output value upper limit
Cooling output value lower limit
Cooling output value upper limit
Channel 0
Channel 7
~
~
Output value lower limit
Output value upper limit
+30
+31
+32
+33
Cooling output value lower limit
Cooling output value upper limit
221
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0034 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Output value lower limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
Output value upper limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 0
Cooling output value lower limit
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 0
Cooling output value upper limit
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+32
+33
Channel 7
Cooling output value lower limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Cooling output value upper limit
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 167)
Writes the output value change rate limits that restrict the rates of change in the control value output.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Output change rate limit
Unit No.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
Output change rate limit
222
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Output change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
+3
+4
Channel 1
Output change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 2
Output change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
+9
Channel 6
Output change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 1000
0000 to 1000
Channel 7
Output change rate limit
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Save Settings (Sequence No. 168)
Saves the settings.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Initialize Settings (Sequence No. 169)
Initializes all the settings to the factory defaults.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
223
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write HB and HS Alarm Valid Channels (Sequence No. 170)
Writes the valid or invalid channels of HB alarm and HS alarm.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(Undefined)
Write code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
00 to FF
Write code (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Current
(Sequence No. 171)
Writes the currents for detecting heater burnouts and SSR failures.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
Channel 0
Channel 1
~
~
Heater burnout detection current
SSR failure detection current
+16
Channel 7
+17
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0018 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Heater burnout detection current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
+3
+4
+5
Channel 0
SSR failure detection current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
Channel 1
Heater burnout detection current
(4 digits BCD)
Channel 1
SSR failure detection current
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+16
+17
Channel 7
Heater burnout detection current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0500
0000 to 0500
Channel 7
SSR failure detection current
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
224
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Write Dead Band/Overlap Band (Sequence No. 172)
Writes the dead bands or overlap bands for control outputs during heating/cooling control.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Dead band/overlap band
Unit No.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Dead band/overlap band
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
+3
+4
Channel 1
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Channel 2
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
+9
Channel 6
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0999
0000 to 0999
Channel 7
Dead band/overlap band
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Cooling Coefficient (Sequence No. 173)
Writes the cooling coefficients for the cooling proportional bands for heating/cooling control.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Cooling coefficient
Unit No.
Channel 0
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
Cooling coefficient
225
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
00 to 0F
Channel 0
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0100
+3
+4
Channel 1
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0100
0000 to 0100
Channel 2
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+8
+9
Channel 6
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0100
0000 to 0100
Channel 7
Cooling coefficient (4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Start Control (Sequence No. 174)
Starts temperature control for all channels in the specified Unit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Stop Operation or Control (Sequence No. 175)
Stops temperature control or manual operation for all channels of the specified Unit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
226
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
Appendix F
Start Manual Operation (Sequence No. 176)
Starts manual operation based on the output values that were set for all channels of the specified Unit.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 0F
+1
Unit No. (2 digits Hex)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
227
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
The E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol performs various settings and controls in remote mode for the Tem-
perature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
Structure of the Protocol
The following table shows the structure of the E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
200
201
202
Select remote mode
Select local mode
Select backup mode
Switches the Controller to remote mode.
Switches the Controller to local mode.
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Switches from set point write mode to back-
up mode.
Yes
203
Select RAM write
mode
Switches from set point write mode to RAM
write mode.
Yes
No
204
205
Save set point
Saves the set point.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Write parameters 1
Writes the set point, alarm value 1, alarm
value 2, and heater burnout alarm value.
206
Write parameters 2
Writes the proportional band, integral time,
and derivative time.
Yes
No
207
208
Write input shift value
Read parameters 1
Writes the input shift value.
Yes
Yes
No
Reads the set point, alarm value 1, alarm
value 2, and heater burnout alarm value.
Yes
209
210
Read parameters 2
Reads the proportional band, integral time,
and derivative time.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read input shift value
Reads the input shift value and writes it in
IOM.
211
212
Read output value
Read process value
Reads the output value and stores it in IOM.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reads the process value and stores it in
IOM.
213
214
Read set point limit
Read heater current
Read initial status
Reads the set point limits and stores them in
IOM.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reads the heater current and stores it in
IOM.
215
216
Reads the initial status and stores it in IOM.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
General-purpose write Writes the specified parameter by setting a
header code.
217
General-purpose read Reads the specified parameter by setting a
header code.
Yes
Yes
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd or 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Set the constant 0000 for the 2nd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set a dummy word (e.g., DM 0000) address for the 3rd operand (D).
229
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Connections
The connections for using the E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
E5jJ
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
Signal name
Abbreviation
SG
Signal direction
Pin No.
Signal ground or common
return line
–
25, 27
Send data
SD
RD
Output
Input
26
28
Receive data
Serial Communications
Board
E5AJ
RS-232C: D-sub
9-pin female
RS-232C:
Terminal Block
MAX232C or
equivalent
Signal
Pin
Termi-
nal
Signal
name
name
No.
Shielded
cable
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m.
2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater).
RS422A/485 Connections
CQM1H
E5jJ
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-422A/485 port
→
RS-422A/485
E5jJ
→
RS-422A/485
Up to 32 units can be
connected.
E5jJ
→
RS-422A/485
230
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
• RS-422A
Signal name
Abbreviation
SDA
Signal direction
Pin No.
Send data A
Output
Output
Input
Input
–
26
25
28
29
27
Send data B
SDB
Receive data A
Receive data B
Signal ground
RDA
RDB
SG
Serial Communications
Board
RS-422A: D-sub
9-pin female
SN751177N or
equivalent
E5AJ
RS-422A:
Terminating
resistance
Signal Pin
name No.
Terminal Block
Termi-
nal
Signal
name
Terminating re-
sistance 240 Ω
Terminating resis-
tance (240 Ω) is
connected via the
terminator switch.
Shielded cable
Terminating
E5AJ
resistance
(terminator)
RS-422A:
Terminal Block
Shielded cable Termi-Signal
nal
name
Terminator switch
• RS-485
Signal name
Terminal A
Abbreviation
Signal direction
Pin No.
26, 28
A
I/O
I/O
–
Terminal B
B
25, 29
27
Signal ground
SG
SN751177N
or equivalent
Serial Communications
Board
RS-485: D-sub
9-pin female
E5AJ
Terminating
Terminal Block resistance
RS-485:
Terminat-
ing resis-
tance
Signal Pin
name No.
Termi-
nal
Signal
name
Shielded cable
Terminating resis-
tance (240 Ω) is
connected via the
terminator switch.
Terminator switch
E5AJ
RS-485:
Terminal Block
Signal
name
Termi-
nal
Shielded cable
231
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a one-to-N configuration. Using a one-to-N configura-
tion, up to 32 units can be connected including the Serial Communications Board.
2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater).
3. Connect terminating resistance to the devices only at both ends of the transmission path.
4. The total terminating resistance at both ends must be at least 100 Ω for RS-422A or 54 Ω for RS-485.
Select Remote Mode (Sequence No. 200)
Switches the Controller to remote mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
Data
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Select Local Mode (Sequence No. 201)
Switches the Controller to local mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Select Backup Mode (Sequence No. 202)
Switches from the set point write mode to backup mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Select RAM Write Mode (Sequence No. 203)
Switches from set point write mode to RAM write mode.
232
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Save Set Point (Sequence No. 204)
Saves the set point.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 205)
Writes the set point, alarm value 1, alarm value 2, and a heater burnout alarm value to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
set point
Alarm value 1
1st unit
Alarm value 2
Heater burnout alarm value
~
~
+122
+123
+124
+125
+126
(Undefined)
set point
Unit No.
25th unit (max.)
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
Heater burnout alarm value
233
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 5 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0025
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
+6
1st unit
set point (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
1st unit
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Heater burnout alarm value 2
(4 digits BCD)
+7
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
D
D
D
+126
(max.)
25th unit
Heater burnout alarm value 2
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 206)
Writes the proportional bands, integral times, and derivative times to multiple units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Proportional band
Integral time
1st unit
Derivative time
~
~
+122
+123
+124
+125
(Undefined)
Proportional band
Unit No.
31th unit (max.)
Integral time
Derivative time
234
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 4 + 2
+1
+2
+3
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
0001 to 0031
00 to 31
1st unit
0000 to 9999
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+6
1st unit
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999
00 to 31
1st unit
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+125
(max.)
31th unit
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Input Shift Value (Sequence No. 207)
Writes the input shift value.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Input shift value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None
235
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Read Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 208)
Reads the set points, alarm values 1, alarm values 2, and heater burnout alarm values for multiple units and stores
the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
~
~
(max.)
+26
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0025
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+26
25th unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Set point
Alarm value 1
Alarm value 2
1st unit
Heater burnout alarm value
~
~
Set point
Alarm value 1
+97
+98
25th unit (max.)
Alarm value 2
+99
Heater burnout alarm value
+100
236
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 4 + 1
+1
1st unit
Set point (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
+2
+3
+4
+5
1st unit
Alarm value 1 (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
1st unit
Alarm value 2 (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
1st unit
Heater burnout alarm value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
2nd unit
Set point (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
D
D
D
+100
(max.)
25th unit
Heater burnout alarm value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Read Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 209)
Reads the proportional bands, integral times, and derivative times for multiple units and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
~
~
(max.)
+32
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units+ 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0031
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+32
31th unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
237
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Proportional band
Integral time
1st unit
Derivative time
~
~
+91
+92
+93
Proportional band
Integral time
31th unit (max.)
Derivative time
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 3 + 1
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Integral time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
1st unit
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Proportional band (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+93
(max.)
31th unit
Derivative time (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Read Input Shift Value (Sequence No. 210)
Reads the input shift value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Input shift value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Input shift value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
238
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Read Output Value (Sequence No. 211)
Reads the output value and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Output value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Output value
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Read Process Value (Sequence No. 212)
Reads the process value and status data and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Process value
Status data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
Process value (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
+2
Status data (4 digits Hex)
0000 to 9999
Read Set Point Limit (Sequence No. 213)
Reads the set point limits and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
239
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Set point lower limit
Set point upper limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
Set point lower limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
+2
Set point upper limit
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Read Heater Current (Sequence No. 214)
Reads the heater current and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Heater current
Status data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
Heater current
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
+2
Status data (4 digits Hex)
0000 to 0011
Read Initial Status (Sequence No. 215)
Reads the initial status and stores the results in the specified word.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
240
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
(Undefined) Status
(Undefined) Alarm 1 type Alarm 2 type Input type
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
+2
Status (2 digits Hex)
00 to 99
Alarm 1 type (1 digit Hex)
Alarm 2 type (1 digit Hex)
Input type (1 digit BCD)
0 to 9
0 to 9
0 to 9
General-purpose Write (Sequence No. 216)
Writes the parameter specified by setting a header code.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Header code (ASC)
+2
+3
+4
(Undefined)
Send data
Data code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Header code (two ASCII characters)
Header codes that can be set
MB, WS, W%, WW, WB, WN, WV
+3
+4
Data code (2 digits BCD)
Write data (4 digits BCD)
01 to 02
0000 to 9999
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
General-purpose Read (Sequence No. 217)
Reads the parameter specified by setting a header
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Header code (ASC)
(Undefined)
Data code
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Header code (two ASCII characters)
Header codes that can be set
RS, R%, RW, RB, RN, RV, RO
+3
Data code (2 digits BCD)
01 to 02
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Receive data
241
Appendix G
E5jJ Temperature Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Read data (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
When the left digit is –1, A is set and when
it is –, F is set.
Note The completion code is not included in the read data.
242
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
The ES100j Digital Controller Protocol controls in remote mode and reads various settings from the Controller
connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
Structure of the Protocol
The structure of the ES100
j
Digital Controller Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Transmission
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
250
251
Read event data
Read time signals
Reads events 1 to 10 in the variable area.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reads time signals 1 to 10 in the variable
area.
Yes
252
253
Read error detection
data
Reads error groups 1 to 15 in the variable
area.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read heater burnout
data
Reads the heater burnout alarm.
254
255
256
257
Read PV data
Read SP data
Read MV
Reads PV data in the variable area.
Reads SP data in the variable area.
Reads the MV in the variable area.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Read control monitor
data
Reads control monitor data (SP, PV, and MV)
in the variable area.
258
259
260
Read adjustment pa-
rameters
Reads adjustment parameters in the param-
eter area.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Write adjustment pa-
rameters
Writes adjustment parameters in the param-
eter area.
Read PID control pa-
rameters 1
Reads PID parameters No. 1 to 4 from the
PID control parameters in the parameter
area.
Yes
261
Read PID control pa-
rameters 2
Reads PID parameters No. 5 to 8 from the
PID control parameters in the parameter
area.
Yes
Yes
262
263
264
265
266
Write PID control pa-
rameters 1
Writes PID parameters No. 1 to 4 from PID
control parameters in the parameter area.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Write PID control pa-
rameters 2
Writes PID parameters No. 5 to 8 from PID
control parameters in the parameter area.
Read local SP
Reads the local SP in the program parame-
ter area.
Yes
No
Write local SP
Writes local SP in the program parameter
area.
Read program param- Reads local SP, step time, PID No. wait
eters
Yes
code, and events 1 to 10 set values in the
program parameter area.
267
Write program parame- Writes the local SP, step time, PID No., wait
Yes
No
ters
code, and event 1 to 10 set values in the
program parameter area.
268
269
270
Remote setting mode Switches the setting mode to remote setting.
Local setting mode Switches the setting mode to local setting.
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
External setting mode Switches the setting mode to external set-
ting.
271
272
Run command
Reset (stop)
Starts control.
Stops control.
Yes
Yes
No
No
243
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Sequence
No.
Transmission
sequence name
Function
Ladder interface
Send word
allocation
Receive word
allocation
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
Auto mode
Switches the control mode to auto.
Switches the control mode to a manual.
Executes A.T.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Manual mode
Execute A.T.
Cancel A.T.
Cancels A.T.
Change pattern No.
Change bank No.
Changes the pattern No.
Changes the bank No.
Read controller status Reads the controller status.
General-purpose com- Sends specified data and stores the received
mand
data in the specified words.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Receive word allocation:
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
Connections
Connections for using the ES100
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
j
Digital Controller Protocol are shown below.
ES100j
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-232C port
→
Serial Communications Board
ES100j-j01
j
RS-232C: D-sub
9-pin female
RS-232C:
Terminal Block
Signal name
Pin No.
Terminal
Signal name
17
16
15
Shielded cable
244
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
RS-422A/485 Connections
CQM1H
ES100j
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-422A/485 port
→
RS-422A/485
ES100j
→
RS-422A/485
Up to 32 units can be
connected.
ES100j
→
RS-422A/485
• RS-422A
Serial Communications Board
ES100j-j04
j
RS-422A: D-sub
9-pin female
RS--422
Terminal Block
Terminal
Signal name
Signal name
Pin No.
Shielded cable
Next
ES100
• RS-485
Serial Communications Board
ES100j-j04
j
RS-485: D-sub
9-pin female
RS--485
Terminal Block
Terminal
Pin No.
Shielded cable
Next
ES100
245
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Switch Settings
There are two switches located on the board on the left of the Unit. Set SW1 to the interface: RS-422A or RS-485.
Set SW2 to the center on all terminating Units and to the same setting as SW1 on all other Units.
422← S →485
422← S →485
Read Event Data (Sequence No. 250)
Reads events 1 to 10 in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send+0
Number of send data words
Number of units
data
+1
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
+2
+3
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+26
Unit No.
25th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0025
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+26
25th unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Event 1
Event 3
Event 5
Event 7
Event 9
Event 2
Event 4
Event 6
Event 8
Event 10
1st unit
~
~
Event 1
Event 3
Event 5
Event 7
Event 9
Event 2
Event 4
Event 6
Event 8
Event 10
+121
+122
+123
+124
+125
25th unit (max.)
246
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units x 5 + 1
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
1st unit
Event data 1 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 2 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
1st unit
Event data 3 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 4 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
1st unit
Event data 5 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 6 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
1st unit
Event data 7 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 8 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
1st unit
Event data 9 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 10 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
D
D
D
+125
(max.)
25th unit
Event data 9 (2 digits Hex)
Event data 10 (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
Read Time Signal (Sequence No. 251)
Reads time signals from 1 to 10 in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
(Undefined)
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+26
Unit No.
25th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0025
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+26
25th unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
247
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Time signal 1
Time signal 3
Time signal 5
Time signal 7
Time signal 9
Time signal 2
Time signal 4
Time signal 6
Time signal 8
Time signal 10
1st unit
~
~
Time signal 1
Time signal 3
Time signal 5
Time signal 7
Time signal 9
Time signal 2
Time signal 4
Time signal 6
Time signal 8
Time signal 10
+121
+122
+123
+124
+125
25th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 5 + 1
+1
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Time signal 1 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 2 data (2 digits Hex)
+2
+3
+4
+5
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Time signal 3 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 4 data (2 digits Hex)
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Time signal 5 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 6 data (2 digits Hex)
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Time signal 7 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 8 data (2 digits Hex)
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Time signal 9 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 10 data (2 digits Hex)
D
D
D
+125
(max.)
25th unit
Time signal 9 data (2 digits Hex)
Time signal 10 data (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
Read Error Detection Data (Sequence No. 252)
Reads error groups from 0 to 15 in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+17
Unit No.
16th unit (max.)
248
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+17
16th unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Number of receive data words
Error group 0
Error group 2
Error group 4
Error group 6
Error group 8
Error group 10
Error group 12
Error group 14
Error group 1
Error group 3
Error group 5
Error group 7
Error group 9
Error group 11
Error group 13
Error group 15
1st unit
~
~
Error group 14
Error group 15
16th unit (max.)
+128
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 8 + 1
+1
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Error group 0 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 1 data (2 digits Hex)
+2
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Error group 2 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 3 data (2 digits Hex)
D
D
+7
+8
+9
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Error group 12 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 13 data (2 digits Hex)
1st unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Error group 14 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 15 data (2 digits Hex)
2nd unit
00 to FF
00 to FF
Error group 0 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 1 data (2 digits Hex)
D
D
+128
(max.)
16th unit
Error group 14 data (2 digits Hex)
Error group 15 data (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
00 to FF
249
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Read Heater Burnout Data (Sequence No. 253)
Reads the heater burnout alarm in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
1st unit
(Undefined)
Heater burnout alarm
Heater burnout alarm
Heater burnout alarm
Heater burnout alarm
2nd unit
3rd unit
4th unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
~
~
(Undefined)
Heater burnout alarm
32nd unit (max.)
+32
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units +1
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
00 to FF
Heater burnout alarm (2 digits Hex)
2nd unit
00 to FF
Heater burnout alarm (2 digits Hex)
3rd unit
00 to FF
Heater burnout alarm (2 digits Hex)
4th unit
00 to FF
Heater burnout alarm (2 digits Hex)
D
D
D
+32
(max.)
32nd unit
Heater burnout alarm (2 digits Hex)
00 to FF
250
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Read PV Data (Sequence No. 254)
Reads the PV data for the variable type “analog data” in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
1st unit
2nd unit
~
~
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
+63
32nd unit
+64
251
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 1
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
2nd unit
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+63
+64
32nd unit
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
32nd unit
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Read SP Data (Sequence No. 255)
Reads the SP data for the variable type “analog data” in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
252
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
1st unit
2nd unit
~
~
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
+63
32nd unit
+64
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 1
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
2nd unit
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+63
+64
32nd unit
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
32nd unit
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Read MV Data (Sequence No. 256)
Reads the MV for the variable type “analog data” in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
253
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive
data storage
words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
MV (rightmost 4 digits)
MV (leftmost 4 digits)
1st unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits)
MV (leftmost 4 digits)
2nd unit
~
~
MV (rightmost 4 digits)
MV (leftmost 4 digits)
+63
32nd unit
+64
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 1
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
2nd unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+63
+64
32nd unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
32nd unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
Read Control Monitor Data (Sequence No. 257)
Reads the control monitor data (SP/PV/MV) in the variable area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+22
Unit No.
21st unit (max.)
254
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0021
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+22
21st unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of receive data words
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
MV (rightmost 4 digits)
1st unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits)
~
~
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
MV (rightmost 4 digits)
+121
+122
+123
+124
+125
+126
21st unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
1st unit
Number of units ꢁ 6 + 1
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
SP data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
SP data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
1st unit
PV data (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
PV data (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+5
+6
1st unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
1st unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+125
+126
21st unit
MV (rightmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
21st unit
MV (leftmost 4 digits) (4 digits BCD)
255
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Read Adjustment Parameters (Sequence No. 258)
Reads the adjustment parameters in the parameter area and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
256
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(rightmost 4 digits)
Fixed SP
+2
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+3
Control output 1 pulse cycle
Control output 2 pulse cycle
Fuzzy strength
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
Cooling coefficient
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
+25
+26
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
+41
+42
Heater burnout alarm setting
Position-proportional dead band
Switching output hysteresis
ON/OFF count alarm setting
ON/OFF control hysteresis
Manual reset
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
SP setting lower limit
SP setting upper limit
SP rise rate limit
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
SP fall rate limit
MV rate-of-change limit
Secondary loop fixed SP
Secondary loop P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
Secondary loop I
Secondary loop D
Secondary loop manual reset
257
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0043
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1 to 2
+3 to 4
Fixed SP (8 digits BCD)
Control output 1 pulse cycle
(8 digits BCD)
+5 to 6
Control output 2 pulse cycle
(8 digits BCD)
+7 to 8
Fuzzy strength (8 digits BCD)
+9 to 10
+11 to 12
Cooling coefficient (8 digits BCD)
Heater burnout alarm setting
(8 digits BCD)
+13 to 14
+15 to 16
+17 to 18
+19 to 20
Position-proportional dead band
(8 digits BCD)
Switching output hysteresis
(8 digits BCD)
ON/OFF count alarm setting
(8 digits BCD)
ON/OFF control hysteresis
(8 digits BCD)
+21 to 22
+23 to 24
Manual reset (8 digits BCD)
SP setting lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+25 to 26
SP setting upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
+27 to 28
+29 to 30
+31 to 32
+33 to 34
SP rise rate limit (8 digits BCD)
SP fall rate limit (8 digits BCD)
MV rate-of-change limit (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop fixed SP
(8 digits BCD)
+35 to 36
+37 to 38
+39 to 40
+41 to 42
Secondary loop P (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop I (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop D (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop manual reset
(8 digits BCD)
258
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Write Adjustment Parameters (Sequence No. 259)
Writes the adjust parameters in the parameter area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
First word of
send data
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
(rightmost 4 digits)
+2
Fixed SP
+3
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+4
Control output 1 pulse cycle
Control output 2 pulse cycle
Fuzzy strength
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
+25
+26
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
+41
+42
+43
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
Cooling coefficient
Heater burnout alarm setting
Position-proportional dead band
Switching output hysteresis
ON/OFF count alarm setting
ON/OFF control hysteresis
Manual reset
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
SP setting lower limit
SP setting upper limit
SP rise rate limit
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
SP fall rate limit
MV change rate limit
Secondary loop fixed SP
Secondary loop P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
Secondary loop I
Secondary loop D
Secondary loop manual reset
259
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0044 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Fixed SP (8 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
+2 to 3
+4 to 5
Control output 1 pulse cycle
(8 digits BCD)
+6 to 7
Control output 2 pulse cycle
(8 digits BCD)
+8 to 9
Fuzzy strength (8 digits BCD)
+10 to 11
+12 to 13
Cooling coefficient (8 digits BCD)
Heater burnout alarm setting
(8 digits BCD)
+14 to 15
+16 to 17
+18 to 19
+20 to 21
Position-proportional dead band
(8 digits BCD)
Switching output hysteresis
(8 digits BCD)
ON/OFF count alarm setting
(8 digits BCD) value
ON/OFF control hysteresis
(8 digits BCD)
+22 to 23
+24 to 25
Manual reset (8 digits BCD)
SP setting lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+26 to 27
SP setting upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
+28 to 29
+30 to 31
+32 to 33
+34 to 35
SP rise rate limit (8 digits BCD)
SP fall rate limit (8 digits BCD)
MV rate-of-change limit (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop fixed SP
(8 digits BCD)
+36 to 37
+38 to 39
+40 to 41
+42 to 43
Secondary loop P (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop I (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop D (8 digits BCD)
Secondary loop manual reset
(8 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Read PID Control Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 260)
Reads PID parameters No. 1 to 4 from PID control parameters in the parameter area and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
260
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
PID No. 1 P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
PID No. 1 P
+2
PID No. 1 I
+3
PID No. 1 I
+4
PID No. 1 D
+5
PID No. 1 D
+6
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
PID No. 1 PV bias value
PID No. 1 PV bias value
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range upper limit
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
~
~
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
PID No. 4 PV bias value
PID No. 4 PV bias value
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0057
00000000 to 09999000
+1 to 2
+3 to 4
+5 to 6
+7 to 8
PID No. 1 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+9 to 10
+11 to 12
+13 to 14
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range
upper limit (8 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+43 to 44
+45 to 46
+47 to 48
+49 to 50
PID No. 4 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+51 to 52
+53 to 54
+55 to 56
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range
upper limit (8 digits BCD)
261
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Read PID Control Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 261)
Reads PID parameters No. 5 to 8 from the PID control parameters in the parameter area and stores the results in
the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
PID No. 5 P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
PID No. 5 P
+2
PID No. 5 I
+3
PID No. 5 I
+4
PID No. 5 D
+5
PID No. 5 D
+6
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
PID No. 5 PV bias value
PID No. 5 PV bias value
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
~
~
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
PID No. 8 PV bias value
PID No. 8 PV bias value
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
262
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0057
00000000 to 09999000
+1 to 2
+3 to 4
+5 to 6
+7 to 8
PID No. 5 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+9 to 10
+11 to 12
+13 to 14
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range
upper limit (8 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+43 to 44
+45 to 46
+47 to 48
+49 to 50
PID No. 8 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+51 to 52
+53 to 54
+55 to 56
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range
upper limit (8 digits BCD)
263
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Write PID Control Parameters 1 (Sequence No. 262)
Writes PID parameters No. 1 to 4 to the PID control parameters in the parameter area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
+0
+1
Unit No.
PID No. 1 P
PID No. 1 P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+2
+3
PID No. 1 I
+4
PID No. 1 I
+5
PID No. 1 D
+6
PID No. 1 D
+7
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
PID No. 1 PV bias value
PID No. 1 PV bias value
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range upper limit
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
~
~
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
+57
PID No. 4 PV bias value
PID No. 4 PV bias value
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range upper limit
264
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0058 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
+2 to 3
+4 to 5
+6 to 7
+8 to 9
PID No. 1 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+10 to 11
+12 to 13
+14 to 15
PID No. 1 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 1 Automatic selection range
upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+44 to 45
+46 to 47
+48 to 49
+50 to 51
PID No. 4 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+52 to 53
+54 to 55
+56 to 57
PID No. 4 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 4 Automatic selection range
upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
265
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Write PID Control Parameters 2 (Sequence No. 263)
Writes the PID parameters No. 5 to 8 to the PID control parameters in the parameter area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
+0
+1
Unit No.
PID No. 5 P
PID No. 5 P
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
+2
+3
PID No. 5 I
+4
PID No. 5 I
+5
PID No. 5 D
+6
PID No. 5 D
+7
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
PID No. 5 PV bias value
PID No. 5 PV bias value
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range upper limit
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
~
~
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
(rightmost 4 digits)
(leftmost 4 digits)
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
+57
PID No. 8 PV bias value
PID No. 8 PV bias value
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range upper limit
266
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0058 (fixed)
00 to 31
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
+2 to 3
+4 to 5
+6 to 7
+8 to 9
PID No. 5 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+10 to 11
+12 to 13
+14 to 15
PID No. 5 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 5 Automatic selection range
upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+44 to 45
+46 to 47
+48 to 49
+50 to 51
PID No. 8 P (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 I (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 D (8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 MV lower limit
(8 digits BCD)
+52 to 53
+54 to 55
+56 to 57
PID No. 8 MV upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 PV bias value
(8 digits BCD)
PID No. 8 Automatic selection range
upper limit
(8 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Read Local SP (Sequence No. 264)
Reads the local SP in the program parameter area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
Unit No.
Step No.
1st unit
2nd unit
~
~
+64
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
32nd unit
+65
267
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
D
D
D
+64
32nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+65
(max.)
32nd unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
1st unit
2nd unit
~
~
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
+63
32nd unit
+64
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 1
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1
+2
+3
+4
1st unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
00000000 to 09999000
2nd unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
2nd unit
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
00000000 to 09999000
+63
+64
32nd unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
32nd unit
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
268
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Write Local SP (Sequence No. 265)
Writes the local SP to the program parameter area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
1st unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
2nd unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
~
~
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
+122
+123
+124
+125
31st unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 4 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0031
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
1st unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
00000000 to 09999000
1st unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
1st unit
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+122
+123
31st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
31st unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
00000000 to 09999000
+124
+125
31st unit
Local SP (rightmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
31st unit
Local SP (leftmost 4 digits)
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
269
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Read Program Parameters (Sequence No. 266)
Reads the local SP, step time, PID set No., wait code, and events from 1 to 10 set values in the program parameter
area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
Unit No.
Step No.
Unit No.
Step No.
Unit No.
Step No.
1st unit
2nd unit
3rd unit
4th unit
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
D
D
D
+8
4th unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+9
(max.)
4th unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
270
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
Number of receive data words
Local SP (rightmost)
Local SP (leftmost)
Step bank time (rightmost)
Step bank time (leftmost)
PID set No. (rightmost)
PID set No. (leftmost)
Wait code (rightmost)
Wait code (leftmost)
1st unit
Event 1 setting (rightmost)
Event 1 setting (leftmost)
~
~
~
Event 10 setting (rightmost)
Event 10 setting (leftmost)
+27
+28
~
Local SP (rightmost)
Local SP (leftmost)
+85
+86
+87
+88
+89
+90
+91
+92
+93
+94
Step bank time (rightmost)
Step bank time (leftmost)
PID set No. (rightmost)
PID set No. (leftmost)
Wait code (rightmost)
Wait code (leftmost)
4th unit (max.)
Event 1 setting (rightmost)
Event 1 setting (leftmost)
~
~
Event 10 setting (rightmost)
Event 10 setting (leftmost)
+111
+112
271
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 28 + 1
00000000 to 09999000
F indicates a negative number.
+1 to 2
+3 to 4
+5 to 6
+7 to 8
+9 to 10
+11 to 12
1st unit
Local SP (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Step time) (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
PID set No. (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Wait code (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Event 1 setting (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Event 2 setting (8 digits BCD)
D
D
+27 to 28
+29 to 30
1st unit
Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Local SP (8 digits BCD)
D
D
+109 to 110 4th unit
Event 9 setting (8 digits BCD)
+111 to 112 4th unit
(max.)
Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
Write Program Parameters (Sequence No. 267)
Writes the local SP, step time, PID set No., wait code, and events from 1 to 10 settings in the program parameter
area.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
Number of units
+1
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
+2
+3
Unit No.
Step No.
Local SP (rightmost)
+4
Local SP (leftmost)
Step bank time (rightmost)
Step bank time (leftmost)
PID set No. (rightmost)
PID set No. (leftmost)
Wait code (rightmost)
Wait code (leftmost)
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
1st unit
+10
+11
+12
+13
Event 1 setting (rightmost)
Event 1 setting (leftmost)
~
~
~
~
Event 10 setting (rightmost)
Event 10 setting (leftmost)
+30
+31
~
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Step No.
+92
+93
4th unit (max.)
~
Event 10 setting (rightmost)
Event 10 setting (leftmost)
+120
+121
272
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 30 + 2
+1
+2
+3
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
1st unit Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
00 to 31
1st unit
Pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
Step No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 63
00 to 63
00000000 to 09999000
+4 to 5
1st unit
Local SP (8 digits BCD)
+6 to 7
1st unit
Step time (8 digits BCD)
+8 to 9
1st unit
PID set No. (8 digits BCD)
+10 to 11
+12 to 13
+14 to 15
1st unit
Wait code (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Event 1 setting (8 digits BCD)
1st unit
Event 2 setting (8 digits BCD)
D
D
+30 to 31
+32 to 33
1st unit
Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
2nd unit
Local SP (8 digits BCD)
D
D
+111 to 112 4th unit
Event 9 setting (8 digits BCD)
+120 to 121 4th unit
(max.)
Event 10 setting (8 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Remote Setting Mode (Sequence No. 268)
Switches the setting mode to the remote setting mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
273
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Local Setting Mode (Sequence No. 269)
Switches the setting mode to the local setting mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
External Setting Mode (Sequence No. 270)
Switches the setting mode to the external setting mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
274
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Run Command (Sequence No. 271)
Starts control.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
Pattern No./Bank No.
~
~
+64
(Undefined)
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Pattern No. Bank No.
+65
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
Pattern No./Bank No.
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0063
00 to 31
+24
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+64
32nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+65
(max.)
32nd unit
Pattern No./Bank No.
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0063
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
275
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Reset (Stop) (Sequence No. 272)
Stops control.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Auto Mode (Sequence No. 273)
Switches the control mode to the auto mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
276
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Manual Mode (Sequence No. 274)
Switches the control mode to the manual mode.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Execute A.T. (Sequence No. 275)
Executes A.T.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
PID set No.
Unit No.
Unit No.
1st unit
~
+64
~
(Undefined)
PID set No.
32nd unit (max.)
+65
277
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
1st unit
PID set No. (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0008
00 to 31
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+64
32nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+65
(max.)
32nd unit
PID set No. (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0008
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Cancel A.T. (Sequence No. 276)
Cancels A.T.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
1st unit
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
2nd unit
~
~
(Undefined)
+33
Unit No.
32nd unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
00 to 31
D
D
D
+33
32nd unit
(max.)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
278
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Change Pattern No. (Sequence No. 277)
Changes the pattern number.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
Unit No.
Unit No.
1st unit
~
+64
~
(Undefined)
Pattern No.
32nd unit (max.)
+65
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
1st unit
Pattern No. (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0063
00 to 31
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+64
32nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+65
(max.)
32nd unit
Pattern No. (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0063
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Change Bank No. (Sequence No. 278)
Changes the bank number.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Unit No.
1st unit
Bank No.
Bank No.
~
+64
~
(Undefined)
32nd unit (max.)
+65
279
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 2 + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0032
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
+3
+4
1st unit
Bank No. (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0007
00 to 31
2nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+64
32nd unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
+65
(max.)
32nd unit
Bank No. (4 digits BCD)
0000 to 0007
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Read Controller Status (Sequence No. 279)
Reads the Controller status.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Number of units
(Undefined)
Unit No.
1st unit
~
~
+26
(Undefined)
Unit No.
25th unit (max.)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units + 2
+1
+2
Number of units (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0025
00 to 31
1st unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+26
(max.)
25th unit
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 31
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Operation status
Auto/manual
Setting mode
A.T.
Hold
SP mode
Valid pattern No.
Valid PID set No.
Operation mode
1st unit
Wait
~
~
Operation status
Auto/manual
Setting mode
A.T.
Hold
+121
+122
+123
+124
+125
SP mode
25th unit (max.)
Valid pattern No.
Valid PID set No.
Operation mode
Wait
280
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units ꢁ 5 + 1
+1
+2
1st unit
Operation status (2 digits BCD)
00: Reset
01: Run
Hold (2 digits BCD)
00: Not hold
01: Hold
1st unit
Auto/manual (2 digits BCD)
00: Auto mode
01: Manual mode
00: Local SP mode
01: Remote SP mode
02: Fixed SP mode
SP mode (2 digits BCD)
+3
1st unit
Setting mode (2 digits BCD)
00: Local setting mode
01: Remote setting mode
02: External setting mode
00 to 63
Valid pattern No. (2 digits BCD)
+4
+5
1st unit
A.T. (2 digits BCD)
00: Not A.T.
01: A.T.
Valid PD set No. (2 digits Hex)
01 to 08
1st unit
Wait (2 digits BCD)
00: Not waiting
01: Waiting
02: Wait alarm output
Operation mode (2 digits BCD)
00: Setting level 1 (without technical mode)
01: Setting level 1 (with technical mode)
02: Setting level 2 (without technical mode)
03: Setting level 2 (with technical mode)
D
D
D
+125
25th unit
(max.)
Wait (2 digits BCD)
00: Not waiting
01: Waiting
02: Wait alarm output
Operation mode (2 digits BCD)
00: Setting level 1 (without technical mode)
01: Setting level 1 (with technical mode)
02: Setting level 2 (without technical mode)
03: Setting level 2 (with technical mode)
General-purpose Command (Sequence No. 280)
Sends the specified data and stores the received data in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Number of send data bytes
Send data (ASCII code)
Send data (ASCII code)
~
~
Send data
+126
(Undefined)
(max. = 251 characters)
281
Appendix H
ES100j Digital Controller Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0128
0001 to 0251
+1
+2
Number of send data bytes
The number of send bytes not including @,
the FCS, or the terminator.
Refer to the manual for the ES100j.
Send data (ASCII 2 characters)
D
Use ASCII (Up to 251 characters total.)
D
D
+127
Send data (ASCII 1 characters)
(max.)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Receive data (ASCII code)
Receive data (ASCII code)
~
~
Receive data
(Undefined)
+126
(max.=251 characters)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0127
Refer to the manual for the ES100V.
+1
Receive data
(ASCII 2 characters)
Returned as ASCII (Up to 251 characters
total.)
D
D
D
+126
(max.)
Receive data
(ASCII 1 characters)
Note 1. At transmission, a header code “@” is attached before the data and the FCS and a terminator “*”CR are
attached following the send data.
First word of send +0
0006
0007
“AB”
“CD”
“EF”
“GH”
data
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
@ABCDEFG[FCS]*CR
2 bytes
2. At reception, data excluding the header code “@” at the beginning of the receive data and the FCS and
terminator “*”CR at the end of the data is stored in the receive data storage words.
First word of send +0
0006
0007
“AB”
“CD”
“EF”
data
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
@ABCDEFG[FCS]*CR
2 bytes
“G”
3. Refer to the manual for the ES100j for the contents of send data and receive data.
282
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
The K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Intelligent
Signal Processor connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is shown as follows:
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Notes
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
300
301
Reset (by unit number)
Performs the same processing as
when an input is received on the
reset terminal.
Yes
No
Reset (continuous units) Performs the same processing as
when an input is received on the
Yes
No
reset terminal.
302
303
304
305
306
307
Write set value (by unit
number)
Writes the set value HH, H, L, or
LL.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
See
Note1
Write set value HH (con- Writes the set value HH.
tinuous units)
See
Note1
Write set value H (con-
tinuous units)
Writes the set value H.
See
Note1
Write set value L (contin- Writes the set value L.
uous units)
See
Note1
Write set value LL (con- Writes the set value LL.
tinuous units)
See
Note1
Write set value with bank Writes the set value to a bank
(by unit number)
See
Note2
which is not in use (K3TR: HH to
LL, K3TC: O1 to O5).
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
Write set value HH with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value HH to a bank
which is not in use.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
See
Note1
Write set value H with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value H to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value L with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value L to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value LL with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value LL to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value O5 with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value O5 to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value O4 with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value O4 to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value O3 with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value O3 to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value O2 with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value O2 to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Write set value O1 with
bank (continuous units)
Writes the set value O1 to a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value (by unit
number)
Reads the set value HH, H, L, or
LL.
See
Note1
Read set value HH (con- Reads the set value HH.
tinuous units)
See
Note1
Read set value H (con-
tinuous units)
Reads the set value H.
See
Note1
283
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Ladder interface
Send word Receive word
Notes
allocation
allocation
320
321
322
Read set value L (con-
tinuous units)
Reads the set value L.
Yes
Yes
See
Note1
Read set value LL (con- Reads the set value LL.
tinuous units)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
See
Note1
Read set value with
bank (by unit number)
Reads set value of a bank which
is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL,
K3TC: O1 to O5).
See
Note2
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
Read set value HH with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value HH of a bank
which is not in use.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
See
Note1
Read set value H with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value H of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value L with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value L of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value LL with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value LL of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value O5 with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value O5 of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value O4 with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value O4 of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value O3 with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value O3 of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value O2 with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value O2 of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read set value O1 with
bank (continuous units)
Reads the set value O1 of a bank
which is not in use.
See
Note1
Read holding data (by
unit number)
Reads the peak/bottom data
(maximum, minimum).
See
Note3
Read holding data PH
(continuous units)
Reads the peak data (maximum).
See
Note3
Read holding data BH
(continuous units)
Reads the bottom data (mini-
mum).
See
Note3
Read display value (PV) Reads the display value (PV).
(by unit number)
Read display value (PV ) Reads the display value (PV).
(continuous units)
Read model (by unit
number)
Reads the model data.
Read model (continuous Reads the model data.
units)
General-purpose com-
mand
Send specified data or receives
specified data and writes it to the
receive data words.
Note 1. Special specifications are required to use communications + comparison output.
2. Special specifications are required to use communications + comparison output for the K3TR and
K3TC. The operands HH, H, L, and LL are for the K3TR, and the operands O5, O4, O3, O2, and O1 are
for the K3TC.
3. Not available for the K3TC.
4. Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
284
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Connections
The connections used for the K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
K3Tj
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-232C port
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal
direction
Pin No.
Protective ground or earth
Signal ground or common return line
Send data
FG
–
–
1
SG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
7
Output
Input
2
Receive data
3
Request to send
Output
Input
4
Clear to send
5
Data set ready
Input
6
Data terminal ready
Output
20
Intelligent Signal
Processor
Serial Communications
Board
RS-232C: D-sub
9-pin female
RS-232C:
Terminal block
MAX232C or
equivalent
Signal
Name
Signal
Name
Pin
No.
Termi-
nal.
Shielded cable
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m.
2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater).
285
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
RS-422A/485 Connections
CQM1H
Serial Communica-
tions Board
K3Tj
RS-422A/485 port
K3Tj
Up to 32 units can be connected
K3Tj
• RS-422A
Signal name
Abbreviation
SDA
Signal direction
Pin No.
Send data A
Output
Output
Output
Input
–
9
Send data B
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
5
6
1
3
7
Receive data A
Receive data B
Signal ground
Protective ground
FG
–
Intelligent Sig-
nal Processor
Serial
Board
Communications
RS-422A: D-sub
9-pin female
Pin
No.
SN751177N or
equivalent
RS-422A:
Terminal block
Terminating
resistance
Signal
Name
Pin
No.
Terminal block SW
Termi-
Signal
nal. Name
Terminating
resistance
(terminator)
Shielded
cable
Terminating resistance (approx. 220 Ω) is
connected via the terminal block switch.
286
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
• RS-485
Signal name
Abbreviation
Signal direction Terminal
Inverting output
–
Input or output
Input or output
19
18
Non-inverting output
+
Intelligent Signal Processor
Turn ON the terminal block switch for
terminators only.
Serial Communications
Board
SN751177N or
equivalent
RS-485: D-sub
9-pin female
RS-485:
Terminal block
Terminal
block SW
Signal
Name
Pin
No.
Termi-
Signal
nal. Name
Shielded cable
Intelligent Signal Processor
Unit designated as terminator.
RS-485:
Terminal block
Termi-
Signal
nal. Name
Terminal block SW ON
The terminal block switch is turned ON.
Shielded cable
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a 1-to-N configuration. For 1-to-N connections, up to 32
units including the Serial Communications Board can be connected.
2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cables (AWG28i or greater).
3. Connect terminating resistance at both ends of the transmission path.
4. Turn the terminal block switch ON at the terminators.
5. Turn the terminal block switches OFF for units that are not terminators.
287
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Reset (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 300)
This sequence performs the same processing as when an input is received on the reset terminal.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
+2
~
~
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
+33
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0034
00 to 32
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
D
D
D
+33
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Reset Control (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 301)
This sequence performs reset control for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Number of units
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 32
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
288
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Write Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 302)
This sequence writes each set value (HH, H, L, LL).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Operand
Set value
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
+2
+3
+4
+5
Set value
Set value
~
~
+122
+123
+124
+125
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Operand
Set value
(Undefined)
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words 0006 to 0126
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 31
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
Operand
(ASCII 2 characters)
4848 (“HH”),
4820 (“H”),
4C4C (“LL”)
4C20 (“L”)
+4 to
+5
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+4
+5
2345
0001
+4
+5
1234
000F
D
D
D
+124 to Set value
+125 (5 digits BCD)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 303)
This sequence writes set value HH for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
Set value
(Undefined)
+2
+3
Set value
Set value
~
+64
~
Set value
(Undefined)
+65
289
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0004 to 0066
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
+2 to
+3
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+2
+3
2345
0001
+2
+3
1234
000F
D
D
D
+64 to
+65
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Set Value H (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 304)
This sequence writes set value H for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303
(Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value L (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 305)
This sequence writes set value L for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303
(Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value LL (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 306)
This sequence writes set value LL for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 303
(Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 307)
This sequence writes set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:O1 to O5).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Bank No.
Operand
Set value
(Undefined)
Set value
~
~
+122
+123
+124
+125
+126
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Bank No.
Operand
Set value
(Undefined)
Set value
290
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of send data words 0007 to 0127
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 25
00 to 99
01 to 04
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
Bank No.
(2 digits BCD)
Operand
(Two ASCII characters)
4848 (“HH”),
4820 (“H ”),
4C20 (“L ”),
4C4C (“LL”),
4F31 (“O1”)
4F32 (“O2”)
4F33 (“O3”)
4F34 (“O4”)
4F35 (“O5”)
+5 to
+6
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+5
+6
2345
0001
+5
+6
1234
000F
D
D
D
+125 to Set value
Same as above
+126
(5 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 308)
This sequence writes set value HH of a bank not in use for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Set value
(Undefined)
Bank No.
+2
+3
+4
Set value
Set value
~
~
+95
+96
+97
(Undefined)
Set value
(Undefined)
Bank No.
291
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words 0004 to 0098
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Bank No.
01 to 04
(2 digits BCD)
+3 to
+4
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+2
+3
2345
0001
+2
+3
1234
000F
D
D
D
+96 to
+97
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Write Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 309)
This sequence writes set value H of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of
sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 310)
This sequence writes set value L of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of
sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 311)
This sequence writes set value LL of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 312)
This sequence writes set value O5 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 313)
This sequence writes set value O4 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 314)
This sequence writes set value O3 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
292
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Write Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 315)
This sequence writes set value O2 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Write Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 316)
This sequence writes set value O1 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 308 (Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 317)
Reads set value HH, H, L, or LL.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Operand
+2
+3
~
~
(Undefined) Relevant unit No.
Operand
+64
+65
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words 0004 to 0066
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
Operand
(ASCII 2 characters)
4848 (“HH”),
4820 (“H”),
4C4C (“LL”)
4C20 (“L”)
4F31 (“01”)
4F35 (“05”)
D
D
D
+64 to
+65
Operand
(ASCII 2 characters)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR))
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
End code
Set value
(Undefined)
Set value
~
~
+94
+95
+96
(Undefined)
End code
Set value
(Undefined)
Set value
293
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0097
+1
End code (2 digits Hex)
00 to 22
+2 to
+3
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+2
+3
2345
0001
+2
+3
1234
000F
D
D
D
+95 to
+96
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
Same as above
Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 318)
This sequence reads set value HH for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Number of units (2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
This sequence is similar to sequence No. 317 (Read Set Value (by Unit Number)).
Read Set Value H (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 319)
This sequence reads set value H for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318
(Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value L (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 320)
This sequence reads set value L for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318
(Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value LL (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 321)
This sequence reads set value LL for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence No. 318
(Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units)).
294
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 322)
Reads the set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:01 to 05) and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Bank No.
+2
+3
+4
Operand
~
~
+95
+96
+97
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Bank No.
Operand
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 to 0098
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of units (2 digits BCD)
Relevant unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Bank No. (2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
00 to 99
01 to 04
Operand (ASCII 2 characters)
4848 (“HH”),
4820 (“H ”),
4C20 (“L ”),
4C4C (“LL”),
4F31 (“O1”)
4F32 (“O2”)
4F33 (“O3”)
4F34 (“O4”)
4F35 (“O5”)
D
D
D
+ 97
Operand (ASCII 2 characters)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Set value
(Undefined)
Set value
~
+63
~
Set value
+64
(Undefined)
Set value
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0065
+1 to
+2
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+1
+2
2345
0001
+1
+2
1234
000F
D
D
D
+63 to
+64
Set value
(5 digits BCD)
Same as above
295
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 323)
This sequence reads set value HH of a bank not in use for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Bank No.
+2
~
+33
~
(Undefined)
Bank No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0034
+1
+2
Number of units (2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
01 to 04
Bank No. (2 digits BCD)
D
D
D
+ 33
Bank No. (2 digits BCD)
Same as above
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The word allocation is similar to sequence No. 322 (Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number)).
Read Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 324)
This sequence reads set value H of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of
sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 325)
This sequence reads set value L of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of
sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 326)
This sequence reads set value LL of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of
sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 327)
This sequence reads set value O5 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 328)
This sequence reads set value O4 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
296
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Read Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 329)
This sequence reads set value O3 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 330)
This sequence reads set value O2 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units)
(Sequence No. 331)
This sequence reads set value O1 of a bank not in use for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that
of sequence No. 323 (Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units)).
Read Holding Data (Sequence No. 332)
Reads the peak/bottom data (maximum, minimum) and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Operand
+2
+3
~
~
(Undefined) Relevant unit No.
Operand
+64
+65
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0066
+1
+2
+3
Number of units (2 digits BCD)
Relevant unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Operand (ASCII 2 characters)
01 to 32
00 to 99
5048 (“PH”)
4248 (“BH”)
D
D
D
+65
Operand (ASCII 2 characters)
Same as above
297
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Peak/bottom data
(Undefined)
Peak/bottom data
Peak/bottom data
(Undefined)
Status
~
~
+94
+95
+96
Peak/bottom data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Status
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0097
+1 to
+2
Peak/bottom data
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+1
+2
2345
0001
+1
+2
1234
000F
+3
Status
(2 digits Hex)
d0 bit:
If overflow: 1
Others: 0
Others: 0
d1 bit:
If underflow: 1
d2 bit:
Not used
d3 bit:
During forced zero operation: 1
(K3TH,K3TR: 0)
Others: 0
d4 bit:
Not used
d5 bit:
During hold input: 1
Others: 0
Others: 0
d6 bit:
Bank input 1: 1
(K3TH, K3TX: 0)
d7 bit:
Bank input 2: 1
(K3TH, K3TX: 0)
Others: 0
D
D
D
+96
Status
Same as above
Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 333)
This sequence reads peak holding data for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Number of units (2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The data allocation is similar to sequence No. 332 (Read Holding Data (by Unit Number)).
298
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Read Holding Data BH (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 334)
This sequence reads bottom holding data for continuous units. The word allocation is identical to that of sequence
No. 333 (Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units)).
Read Display Value (PV) (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 335)
Reads the display value (PV) and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
+2
~
+33
~
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Offset
Contents
(data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words 0003 to 0034
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
D
D
D
+ 33
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Display value
(Undefined)
Display value
Status
~
~
+94
+95
+96
Display value
(Undefined)
Status
Display value
299
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0097
+1 to
+2
Display value
(5 digits BCD)
00000 to 99999
Negative sign: F (most significant digit)
Example 12345 Example –1234
+1
+2
2345
0001
+1
+2
1234
000F
+3
Status (4 digits Hex)
d0 bit:
If overflow: 1
Others: 0
Others: 0
d1 bit:
If underflow: 1
d2 bit:
Not used
d3 bit:
During forced zero operation: 1
(K3TH, K3TR, K3TC: 0)
Others: 0
d4 bit:
In test mode: 1
Others: 0
Others: 0
Others: 0
d5 bit:
While holding input: 1
d6 bit:
Bank input 1: 1
(K3TH, K3TX: 0)
d7 bit:
Bank input 2: 1
(K3TH, K3TX: 0)
Others: 0
Others: 0
d8 bit:
LL comparison output: 1
OUT1 comparison output: 1 (K3TC)
d9 bit:
L comparison output: 1
Others: 0
OUT2 comparison output: 1 (K3TC)
d10 bit:
H comparison output: 1
Others: 0
OUT4 comparison output: 1 (K3TC)
d11 bit:
HH comparison output: 1
Others: 0
OUT5 comparison output: 1 (K3TC)
d12 bit:
PASS comparison output: 1 Others: 0
OUT3 comparison output: 1 (K3TC)
d13 bit: Not used
d14 bit: Not used
d15 bit: Not used
D
D
D
+96
Status (4 digits BIN)
Same as above
300
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 336)
This sequence reads display value (PV) for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 32
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
This sequence is similar to sequence No. 335 (Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units)).
Model Data Read (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 337)
Reads model data and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
+2
~
+26
~
(Undefined)
Relevant unit No.
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words 0003 to 0027
(4 digits BCD)
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 25
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 99
D
D
D
+ 26
Relevant unit No.
(2 digits BCD)
Same as above
Note The number of Units can be up to 25 maximum.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Input specifications
Input specifications
Display specifications
Output specifications
Input contents
Operation mode
~
~
Input specifications
+121
+122
+123
+124
+125
Input specifications
Display specifications
Output specifications
Input contents
Operation mode
301
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0006 to 0126
+1 to
+ 2
Input specifications (ASCII
3 characters)
544131 (“TA1”) (K3TH)
544231 (“TB1”) (K3TH)
564432 (“VD2”) (K3TX)
414432 (“AD2”) (K3TX)
564132 (“VA2”) (K3TX)
414132 (“AA2”) (K3TX)
524231 (“RB1”) (K3TR, K3TC)
+2
+3
Display specifications
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (“A”) (common)
42 (“B”) (K3TH, K3TX)
43 (“C”) (K3TR, K3TC)
Output specifications (ASCII 5331 (“S1”) (RS-232C)
2 characters)
5332 (“S2”) (RS-485)
5333 (“S3”) (RS-422A)
5335 (“S5”) (RS-485 + comparison output)
5336 (“S6”) (RS-422A + comparison output)
+4
+5
Input contents
(ASCII 2 characters)
Leftmost digit: 30 (“0”) to 31 (“1”)
Rightmost digit: 31 (“1”) to 45 (“E”)
Operation mode
(ASCII 2 characters)
3030 (“00”) (K3TH, K3TX)
3031 (“00”) to 3133 (“12”) (K3TR)
5542 (“UB”) (K3TC)
5543 (“UC”) (K3TC)
D
D
D
+125
Operation mode
(ASCII 2 characters)
Same as above
Model Data Read (Continuous Units) (Sequence No. 338)
This sequence reads model data for continuous units.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Number of units
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 25
Note The number of Units can be up to 25 maximum.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The work allocation is similar to sequence No. 337 (Model Data Read (by Unit Number)).
302
Appendix I
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
General-purpose Command (Sequence No. 339)
Sends the specified data and writes the receive data to the receive data words. The characters such as “@”, FCS,
terminators need not be set in the send and receive data words. These characters will be automatically added for
transmission and automatically removed before saving data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
send data
+1
Send data byte length
Send data
+2
+3
Send data
~
~
Send data
+127
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128
0001 to 0251
+1
Send data byte length (4 digits BCD)
Send data (ASCII)
Number of bytes of send data not including
@, the FCS, and the terminator.
+2 to
+127
ASCII code
Send data: 251 characters max.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
Receive data
Receive data
Receive data
~
~
Receive data
+126
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0127
+1 to
+126
Receive data (ASCII)
ASCII code
Receive data: 251 characters max.
303
Appendix J
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
The V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Bar Code
Reader connected the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C cable.
305
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
allocation
Receive word
allocation
350
351
352
BCR read start
BCR read stop
Data read
Instructs the Reader to start a BCR read.
Instructs the Reader to stop a BCR read.
No
No
No
No
No
Data read by the Reader is received and
saved in the receive words.
Yes
353
Complete data read
Instructs the Reader to start a read. After
the data read by the Reader is received
and saved to the receive words, reading is
stopped.
No
Yes
354
355
356
BCR function write
(V500)
Writes the operation mode and read func-
tions.
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
BCR function read
(V500)
Reads the operation mode and read func-
tions.
Log data output request Requests output of log data sent to host.
(V500)
Yes
357
358
Preset data set (V500)
Writes preset data.
Yes
No
No
No
BCR connection con-
firmation (V500)
Confirms if the Reader is correctly set.
359
360
Log data clear (V500)
Clear log data.
No
No
No
Continuous data read
(scan) (V500)
Performs the following operations repeat-
edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the scan method.
Yes
361
Continuous data read
(interrupt) (V500)
Performs the following operations repeat-
edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the interrupt method (interrupt
No.100).
No
Yes
362
363
BCR initialize
Clears the log, confirms BCR connection,
and sets BCRs.
No
Yes
No
Continuous data read
(scan) (V520)
Performs the following operations repeat-
edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the scan method.
Yes
364
Continuous data read
(interrupt) (V520)
Performing the following operations repeat-
edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the interrupt method (interrupt
No.100).
No
Yes
365
366
General-purpose com-
mand 1
Used to send data of a specified data
length, and receive only ACK as the re-
ceive data.
Yes
Yes
No
General-purpose com-
mand 2
Used to send data of a specified data
length, and receive ACK together with the
return of other receive data. The frame for-
mat of the receive data, however, has to
contain STX and ETX.
Yes
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
306
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Connections
The connections for using the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol are shown below.
V500 Connections
100 VAC
CQM1H
V520-R12
j
Reader
V500-C11
ID Controller
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-232C port
V509-W040
Reader Cable
Serial Communications Board:
D-sub 9 pin female
V500-C11:
D-sub 9 pin female
Signal
Name
Signal
Pin No.
Name
Pin No.
V520 Connections
V520-R121
Reader
Serial Communications Board
CQM1H
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-232C port
V509-W011
Reader Cable
Serial Communications Board:
D-sub 9 pin female
V520-R121:
D-sub 9 pin female
Signal
Pin No.
Name
Signal
Pin No.
Name
307
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
System Setting
Shown below are the system settings of the V500-C11 and V520-R121 when this protocol is used.
Note The portions enclosed by in boxes are used for this protocol.
V500-C11
• BCR Functions
Read trigger
“READ SIGNAL INPUT”, “ONLINE READ COMMAND”
Read control method
“SINGLE READ”, “CONTINUOUS READ”
• Host Interface
Prefix
NONE, “STX”
Suffix
“ETX” , “CR ”
Bar code output
“OUTPUT” , “NO OUTPUT”
V520-R121
Start code
NONE, “STX”
Stop code
“ETX” , “CR”
Operation mode
External trigger, host trigger
Data output mode
1-shot, continuous
308
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
BCR Read Start (Sequence No. 350)
This sequence instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
BCR Read Stop (Sequence No. 351)
This sequence instructs the Bar Code Reader to stop reading.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Data Read (Sequence No. 352)
This sequence receives read data and saves it to the receive data storage words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
Number of receive data words
Read data
Read data
Read data
Read data
~
~
Read data
Read data
+15
+16
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0017
+1 to
+16
Read data (ASCII)
30 (‘0’) to 39 (‘9’), 41 (‘A’) to 5A (‘Z’), 3F (‘?’)
Up to 32 characters in ASCII
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
Complete Data Read (Sequence No. 353)
This sequence instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading, receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader,
stores the data in the receive data storage words, and then instructs the Reader to stop reading.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
It is similar to sequence No. 352 (Data read).
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
309
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
BCR Function Write (V500) (Sequence No. 354)
This sequence sets the operation mode and read functions in the Bar Code Reader.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
Operation mode
send data
+1
In-zone control
+2
+3
+4
+5
Types of bar code
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Number of digits
(Undefined)
Modulus check
Number of Multistep
(Undefined)
Buzzer
matches
labels
Horizontal control
+6
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0007 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Operation mode
41 (‘A’) : ONLINE
(ASCII 1 character)
*42 (‘B’) : ONLINE CONTROL
In-zone control
(ASCII 1 character)
*41 (‘A’) : ON
42 (‘B’) : OFF
+2
Bar code type
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : JAN
42 (‘B’) : NW7 NORMAL
43 (‘C’) : NW7 SMALL
44 (‘D’) : NW7 HEX
45 (‘E’) : CODE39 NORMAL
46 (‘F’) : CODE39 ST/SP OUTPUT
47 (‘G’) : 2 of 5 (ITF)
48 (‘H’) : CODE128
49 (‘I’) : CODE93
4A (‘J’) : 2 of 5 (3BAR)
4B (‘K’) : 2 of 5 (5BAR)
+3
+4
Number of digits
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 32
00: Any number of digits allowed.
Modulus check
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : No-check
42 (‘B’) : Modulus 10 (all bar codes)
43 (‘C’) : Modulus 11 (except JAN)
44 (‘D’) : Modulus 16 (NW7 only)
45 (‘E’) : Modulus 43 (CODE39 only)
46 (‘F’) : Modulus 47 (CODE93 only)
47 (‘G’) : Modulus 103 (CODE128 only)
+5
+6
Number of matches
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 5
Multistep labels
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 4
Buzzer
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : ON for normal read
42 (‘B’) : ON for no-read
43 (‘C’) : OFF
Horizontal control mode
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : Normal (continuous rotating)
42 (‘B’) : In-zone startup
Note Selecting the values marked with asterisks is required for this protocol.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
310
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
BCR Function Read (V500) (Sequence No. 355)
This sequence reads the settings of functions in the Bar Code Reader.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
Operation mode
In-zone control
Types of bar code
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Number of digits
(Undefined)
Modulus check
Number of Multistep
(Undefined)
Buzzer
matches.
labels.
Horizontal control
+6
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0007 (fixed)
+1
Operation mode
41 (‘A’) : ONLINE
(ASCII 1 character)
42 (‘B’) : ONLINE CONTROL
In-zone control
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : ON
42 (‘B’) : OFF
+2
Bar code type
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : JAN
42 (‘B’) : NW7 NORMAL
43 (‘C’) : NW7 SMALL
44 (‘D’) : NW7 HEX
45 (‘E’) : CODE39 NORMAL
46 (‘F’) : CODE39 ST/SP Output
47 (‘G’) : 2 of 5 (ITF)
48 (‘H’) : CODE128
49 (‘I’) : CODE93
4A (‘J’) : 2 of 5 (3BAR)
4B (‘K’) : 2 of 5 (5BAR)
+3
+4
Number of digits
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 32
Modulus check
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : No-check
42 (‘B’) : Modulus 10 (all bar codes)
43 (‘C’) : Modulus 11 (except JAN)
44 (‘D’) : Modulus 16 (NW7 only)
45 (‘E’) : Modulus 43 (CODE39 only)
46 (‘F’) : Modulus 47 (CODE93 only)
47 (‘G’) : Modulus 103 (CODE128 only)
+5
+6
Number of matches
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 5
Multistep labels
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 4
Buzzer
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : ON for normal read
42 (‘B’) : ON for no-read
43 (‘C’) : OFF
Horizontal control mode
(ASCII 1 character)
41 (‘A’) : Normal (continuous rotating)
42 (‘B’) : In-zone startup
311
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Log Data Output Request (V500) (Sequence No. 356)
This sequence requests output of the log data sent to host.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
send data
+1
Number of units
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0002 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of units
(2 digits BCD)
01 to 99
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Log data
Log data
~
~
Log data
Log data
+125
+126
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0127
+1 to
+126
Log data (ASCII)
Log data with the number of designated data is stored
including the separator GS (1D).
If the log data (including separator) exceeds 251
bytes, only 251 bytes are stored.
Note No retries are performed for this sequence.
312
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Preset Data Set (V500) (Sequence No. 357)
This sequence sets preset data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of presets
Preset data No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Number of units
Preset data
Preset data
~
+18
~
~
Preset data
Preset data
+19
~
+(18N+2)
+(18N+3)
+(18N+4)
+(18N+5)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Preset data No.
Number of units
Preset data
Preset data
~
~
Preset data
Preset data
+(18N+18)
+(18N+19)
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words 18N+2 (N is number of presets 1 to 5)
(4 digits BCD)
Number of presets
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 5
Preset data No.
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 5
Data length
01 to 32
(2 digits BCD)
+4 to
+19
Preset data (ASCII)
Combination of the following ASCII characters and up
to 32 characters maximum:
30 (’0’) to 39 (’9’)
41 (’A’) to 5A (’Z’), 3F (’?’)
The area that is not used is undefined
+20 to
+91
Store repeatedly the contents of words with offsets +2
to +19 the same number of times as the number of
presets (N)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
BCR Connection Confirmation (V500) (Sequence No. 358)
This sequence confirms whether the Bar Code Reader is connected correctly or not.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
313
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Log Data Clear (V500) (Sequence No. 359)
This sequence clears the log data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V500) (Sequence No. 360)
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and
receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The scan notification method is used for the receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data read).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Bar Code Reader still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351
(BCR read stop) to end the sequence.
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V500) (Sequence No. 361)
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instruct the Bar Code Reader to start reading and
receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and
the interrupt No. is 100.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation similar to that of sequence No. 352 (data read).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Bar Code Reader keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR
read stop) to end the sequence.
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
BCR Initialize (V500) (Sequence No. 362)
This sequence clears the log data, confirms BCR connection and sets the BCR functions.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 354 (BCR Function Set).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V520) (Sequence No. 363)
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and
receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The scan notification method is used for the receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
314
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data Read).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the bar code still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR Read
Stop) to end the sequence.
3. The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V520) (Sequence No. 364)
This sequence performs the following operations repeatedly: Instructs the Bar Code Reader to start reading and
receives the data read by the Bar Code Reader. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and
the interrupt No. is 100.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 352 (Data Read).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the bar code still keeps reading. Execute sequence No. 351 (BCR Read
Stop) to end the sequence.
3. The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
General-purpose Command 1 (Sequence No. 365)
This general-purpose command is used to send data with a specified data length, and receive back only ACK. STX
and ETX are automatically attached to the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Send data byte length
Send data
Send data
~
~
Send data
Send data
+127
+128
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0003 to 0129
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Send data byte length
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0254
The byte length of the send data excluding STX and
ETX.
+2 to
+128
Send data (ASCII)
Inscribe send data up to 254 bytes (max.) by ASCII.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
General-purpose Command 2 (Sequence No. 366)
This general-purpose command is used to send data with a specified data length, and receive back ACK in addi-
tion to other receive data. The frame format of the receive data, however, has to contain STX and ETX. STX and
ETX are automatically attached to the send data.
315
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
Appendix J
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Send data byte length
Send data
Send data
~
~
Send data
Send data
+127
+128
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0003 to 0129
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Send data byte length
(3 digits BCD)
1 to 254
The byte length of the send data excluding STX and
ETX.
+2 to
+128
Send data (ASCII)
Set send data up to 254 bytes (max.) by ASCII.
Receive Data Storage Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Receive data
Receive data
~
~
Receive data
Receive data
+126
+127
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0128
+1 to
+127
Receive data (ASCII)
If the receive data exceed 253 bytes, only 253 bytes
are stored.
Note Shown below is the receive data frame format. The reception data without ACK, STX, and ETX is stored.
Receive data (253 bytes max.)
STX
ETX
ACK
316
Appendix K
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
The 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Laser Micrometer
connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence Communications sequence
No. name
Function
Send word
Receive
word
allocation
allocation
400
401
3Z4L clear
Resets errors, data, analog output, deci-
sion result and places the Laser Microme-
ter into standby.
No
No
Memory switch set
Sets memory switches and the area for
the work position LED.
Yes
No
402
403
404
mm unit set
E unit set
Sets the display unit to mm.
Sets the display unit to E.
No
No
No
No
No
Calibration set
Calibrates the Laser Micrometer.
Calibration setting release.
Yes
405
406
407
408
409
410
Calibration release
Releases the calibration of the Laser Mi-
crometer.
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Program number set
(3000-series)
Switches the program number to a speci-
fied number.
Measurement condition set
(3000-series)
Sets measurement conditions.
No
Measurement condition re-
lease (3000-series)
Releases measurement conditions that
have been set.
No
Measurement condition list re- Requests the measurement conditions
quest (3000-series) that have been set and other settings.
Single run measurement start When the sample measurement condition
Yes
Yes
No
(3000-series)
is from 1 to 999, performs a single run
measurement and requests the measure-
ment results.
411
412
Zero run measurement start
(3000-series)
If the sample measurement condition is
zero, starts a zero run measurement.
No
No
No
Continuous measurement
start (scan) (3000-series)
Starts a continuous measurement. The
scan notification method is used for re-
ceive data.
Yes
413
Continuous measurement
start (interrupt) (3000-series)
Starts a continuous measurement. The
interrupt notification method is used for
receive data.
No
Yes
Measurement termination (3000-series)
Terminates a continuous measurement.
*1
414
415
Measurement termination
(3000-series)
No
No
No
Data request (3000-series)
Requests display data in the idle mea-
surement status or the latch data gener-
ated by the measurement command.
Yes
416
417
Statistic processing execution Lights the statistic processing LED and
No
No
No
No
(3000-series)
processes the statistics.
Statistic processing non-
execution (3000-series)
Turns OFF the statistic processing LED.
Statistics are not processed.
317
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Sequence Communications sequence
Function
Ladder interface
No.
name
Send word
allocation
Receive
word
allocation
418
419
420
421
422
423
All statistic memory clear
(3000-series)
Clears statistic processing memories of all
programs.
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Statistic memory clear
(3000-series)
Clears statistic processing memories of
program under display.
Statistic result request
(3000-series)
Requests statistic processing result.
No
Memory switch set 1
(3000-series)
Sets memory switches.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Memory switch set 2
(3000-series)
Sets memory switches.
Simple AVG times set
(3000-series)
Taking the simple average as the averag-
ing method, sets the averaging times per
measurement interval 4.
424
425
AVG move interval set
(3000-series)
Taking the average move as the averag-
ing method, sets the measurement inter-
val number.
Yes
Yes
No
No
AVG move (H) times set
(3000-series)
Taking the average move and high-speed
data output as the averaging method, sets
the averaging times per measurement in-
terval 4.
426
AVG move (L) times set
(3000-series)
Taking the average move and low-speed
data output as the averaging method, sets
the averaging times per measurement in-
terval 4.
Yes
No
427
428
429
430
Automatic detection set
(3000-series)
Sets work automatic detection function.
Yes
No
No
No
Automatic detection release
(3000-series)
Releases the settings of work automatic
detection function.
Automatic detection list re-
quest (3000-series)
Requests the settings of work automatic
detection function.
No
Yes
No
3Z4L initialize (3000-series)
Clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, sets
the memory unit, does not processes sta-
tistics, and clears all statistic memory.
Yes
431
432
433
434
Measurement condition set
(4000-series)
Sets measurement conditions.
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Measurement condition re-
lease (4000-series)
Releases measurement conditions that
have been set.
Measurement condition list re- Requests the measurement conditions
quest (4000-series) that have been set and other settings.
Yes
Yes
Single run measurement start When the sample measurement condition
(4000-series)
No
is from 1 to 999, performs a single run
measurement and requests the measure-
ment results.
435
436
Deflection measurement start Starts a deflection measurement.
(4000-series)
No
No
No
Continuous measurement
start (scan) (4000-series)
Starts a continuous measurement. The
scan notification method is used for re-
ceive data.
Yes
437
438
Continuous measurement
start (interrupt) (4000-series)
Starts a continuous measurement. The
interrupt notification method is used for
receive data.
No
No
Yes
*1
Measurement termination
(4000-series)
Terminates continuous measurement.
No
318
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Sequence Communications sequence
Function
Ladder interface
No.
name
Send word
allocation
Receive
word
allocation
439
Data request (4000-series)
Requests measurement data in the idle
measurement status or the latch data
generated by the measurement com-
mand.
No
Yes
440
441
442
443
444
Forced positive zero
(4000-series)
Sets the forced zero direction to positive
(+).
No
No
No
No
No
No
Forced negative zero
(4000-series)
Sets the forced zero direction to negative
(–).
No
No
Forced zero release (4000-se- Releases the forced zero direction.
ries)
3Z4L initialize (4000-series)
Clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, and
clears the memory unit settings.
Yes
Yes
General-purpose command 1 Used to send data of a specified data
length, and receive only OK as the re-
ceive data.
445
General-purpose command 2 Used to send data of a specified data
length, and receive data other than OK.
Yes
Yes
*1 Depends on the measurement contents.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
Connections
The connections for the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connection
Sensor
Signal cable
CQM1H
Serial Communica-
Controller
tions Board
RS-232C Port
Serial Communications Board:
D-sub 9 pin (female)
Controller: D-sub
25 pin (female)
Signal
name
Signal
name
Pin No.
Pin No.
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
SG
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20
FG
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
SG
DTR
319
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
DIP Switch Settings
Shown below are the settings of 3Z4L-3000, 3Z4L-4000-series DIP switches required to use the system protocol
sequences.
3Z4L-3000 Series
• DIP Switch 1
No.
Setting
Status
Baud rate
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Handshaking procedure
RS-232C interface use
selection
• DIP Switch 2
No.
Setting
Status
Selection for
measurement section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Set these settings according
to the sensor connected.
Setting of minimum read
value
Set these settings for
4 digits in the decimal por-
tion.
Setting of transparent
body measurement
function
8
Setting of simultaneous
measurement function
ON/OFF
• DIP Switch 3
No.
Setting
Status
Setting of measurement
function by 2
measurement
1
2
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
instruments
3
4
5
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
This protocol does not sup-
port the error data exclusion
function
Error data exclusion
function
6
Multistep selection
function
ON/OFF
3Z4L-4000 Series
• DIP Switch 1
No.
Setting
Status
Baud rate
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Hand-shake procedure
Delimiter
RS-232C interface use
selection
320
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
• DIP Switch 2
No.
Setting
Status
Selection for
measurement section
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Set these settings according
to the sensor connected.
Setting of minimum read
value
Set these settings for
4 digits in the decimal por-
tion.
Display unit
External command
setting
Delimiter Control Code Setting
3Z4L-4000 Series
The delimiter control codes must be set on DIP switch SW1 for the 3Z4L-4000 Series. Turn off pins 4 and 5, set the
delimiter codes to CR+LF, and set the delimiter code control setting in the sequence to CR+LF. See the setting for
CR+LF in the following diagram.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turn OFF.
Turn OFF (to use a general-purpose interface)
Turn ON (to use a general-purpose interface)
Delimiter Setting
Delimiter
CR+LF
LF
CR
Pin
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 4
Pin 5
OFF
Handshaking
ON:
OFF:
Control (recognize DRT input)
3-wire method (non-protocol)
Baud Rate
Baud rate
1200 2400
OFF
4800
9600
Pin
Pin 1
Pin 2
ON OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
3Z4L-3000 Series
The delimiter control code does not need to be set on the DIP switch for the 3Z4L-3000 Series. Set the delimiter
321
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
control codes in the sequence to CR+LF for the send code and to CR or CR+LF for the receive code. See the
settings in the following diagram.
1 2 3 4
5
6
Turn OFF.
Turn OFF (to use a general-purpose interface)
Turn ON (to use a general-purpose interface)
Handshaking
ON:
OFF:
Control (recognize DRT input)
3-wire method (non-protocol)
Baud Rate
Baud rate
4800
9600
1200 2400
Pin
Pin 1
Pin 2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
The High-speed 3Z4L-3000-series Meters must have the delimiter control codes set using the memory switches.
Set both the send and receive codes to CR+LF.
322
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
3Z4L Clear (Sequence No. 400)
This sequence resets errors, data, analog output, and decision result, and puts the Laser Micrometer into standby.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Memory Switch Set (Sequence No. 401)
This sequence sets memory switches and the area for the work position LED.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
W
X
Y
Z
V
+1
(Undefined)
+2
Data
Offset
Contents
(data format)
3000-series
4000-series
+0
+1
Number of send data
words (4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
0003 (fixed)
w (1 digit BCD)
Using buzzer sound: 0 to 3
Number of digits for
extinguishing indicator: 0 to
2
x (1 digit BCD)
y (1 digit BCD)
Automatic latch release
time: 0 to 9
I/O IF RUN Input: 0 or 1
Using print timer, the setting Display of Err-0: 0 or 1
for simultaneous
measurement: 0 to 3
(high-speed), 0 to 1 (other)
z (1 digit BCD)
v (1 digit BCD)
Display of the comma for
1/1000s digit, number of
display digits: 0 to 5
Averaging method: 0 to 2
(high-speed), 0 (other)
(high-speed), 0 to 3 (other)
+2
Measurement interval 4: 0 to Use of comma: 0 or 1
6
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
mm Unit Set (Sequence No. 402)
This sequence sets the display unit to mm.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
E Unit Set (Sequence No. 403)
This sequence sets the display unit to E.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
323
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Calibration Set (Sequence No. 404)
This sequence calibrates the Laser Micrometer.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Decimal portion
Decimal integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
data
+1
High calibration
gauge dimension
(Undefined)
Sign
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Low calibration
gauge dimension
(Undefined)
Sign
(Decimal integer portion)
(Undefined)
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0007 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
HC gauge dimension
(Decimal portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
Example –123.4567
+1
+2
+3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
2 D 0 0
Example –123.4567
+2
+3
HC gauge dimension
(integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
+1
+2
+3
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
2 D 0 0
HC gauge dimension (Sign) if +: 20(‘ ’)
(ASCII 1 character)
if –: 2D(‘–’)
+4 to
+6
LC gauge dimensions
Same as HC gauge dimensions
Note 1. For this sequence, both the high and low calibration gauges must be set.
2. The limit value, reference value, and offset value can be set to 3 digits for the integer portion and to 4 dig-
its for the decimal portion.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Calibration Release (Sequence No. 405)
This sequence releases the calibration of the Laser Micrometer.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence releases both the high and low calibration.
324
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Program Number Set (3000-series) (Sequence No. 406)
This sequence switches the program number to a specified number.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
data
+1
Program number (1 digit BCD)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Program number (1 digit BCD)
0 to 9
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Measurement Condition Set (3000-series) (Sequence No. 407)
This sequence sets measurement conditions. Conditions to be set can be selected by setting Yes/No flags.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send
data
Number of send data words
(Unused)
+0
+1
+2
Segment number (SG)
+3
+4
(Undefined)
+5
Measurement interval number (M)
Lower limit value (LL)
Decimal portion
+6
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+7
Sign
+8
+9
(Undefined)
Sign
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
Upper limit value (LH)
Multistep selection limit value (L1)
(Undefined)
Sign
Multistep selection limit value (L2)
Multistep selection limit value (L3)
(Undefined)
Sign
(Undefined)
Sign
+22 (Undefined)
Multistep selection limit value (L4)
Multistep selection limit value (L5)
Multistep selection limit value (L6)
+23
+24
Sign
+25 (Undefined)
+26
+27
+28
+29
Sign
(Undefined)
Sign
325
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
+41
+42
+43
+44
+45
+46
+47
+48
+49
+50
+51
+52
+53
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Reference value (REF)
(Undefined)
Sign
(Undefined)
Analog output scale number (SCL)
Offset classification (OF)
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Offset value
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Data output conditions (PR)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Schedule output timer
Sample measurement pulse
(PRT)
(SMP)
Sample measurement classification
(Undefined)
(Unused)
(Unused)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Setting Yes/No flags
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0054 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Unused
Undefined
+2 to
+4
Segment number
(ASCII 6 characters)
Combination of 31(‘1’) to 36(‘6’), 20(‘ ’)
+5
Measurement interval
number (1 digit BCD)
1 to 4
Example –123.4567
+6
Lower limit value (decimal
portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
000 to 999
+6
+7
+8
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
2 D 0 0
+7
+8
Lower limit value (Integer
portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Lower limit value (Sign)
(ASCII 1 character)
if +: 20(‘ ’)
if –: 2D(‘–’)
+9 to
+11
Upper limit value
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
+12 to
+14
Multistep selection limit
value (L1)
+15 to
+17
Multistep selection limit
value (L2)
+18 to
+20
Multistep selection limit
value (L3)
+21 to
+23
Multistep selection limit
value (L4)
+24 to
+26
Multistep selection limit
value (L5)
+27 to
+29
Multistep selection limit
value (L6)
326
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+30 to
Reference value
Same as lower limit values
+32
+33
Analog output scale number 1 to 3
(1 digit BCD)
+34 to
+35
Offset classification (ASCII
3 characters)
4F4620 (“OF”), 4F4D20 (“OM”)
Same as lower limit values
0 to 6
+36 to
+38
Offset value
+39
+40
+41
Data output conditions
(1 digit BCD)
Scheduled output timer
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Sample measurement pulse 000 to 999
(3 digits BCD)
+42 to
+43
Sample measurement
classification
(ASCII 3 characters)
415647 (“AVG”), 4D4158 (“MAX”)
4D494E (“MIN”), 524E47 (“RNG”)
+44 to
+45
Unused
Undefined
+46
Yes/No for segment setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
1 (SG)
Don’t set: 0
+47
Yes/No for measurement
interval number setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
1 (M)
Don’t set: 0
+48
+49
Yes/No for upper/lower limit Set:
value setting
(1 digit BCD)
1 (LL,LH)
Don’t set: 0
Yes/No for multistep
selection limit value
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
1 (L1,L2,L3,L4,L5,L6)
Don’t set: 0
+50
+51
+52
Yes/No for reference setting Set:
(1 digit BCD)
1 (REF, SCL)
Don’t set: 0
Set: 1 (OF or OM)
Don’t set: 0
Yes/No for offset value
setting (1 digit BCD)
Yes/No for data output
condition setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
1 (PR, PRT)
Don’t set: 0
+53
Yes/No for sample
measurement pulse setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
1 (SMP, MAX or MIN or RNG or AVG)
Don’t set: 0
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. This sequence cannot be used to set the error lower limit (EL), error upper limit (EH), error exclusion
counter (CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function).
2. The following settings must be made together with this sequence; they cannot be set separately.
Lower limit, upper limit
Multistep selection limit
Reference value, analog output scale number
Data output conditions, scheduled print timer
3. The limit value, reference value, and offset value can be set to 3 digits for the integer portion and to 4 dig-
its for the decimal portion.
327
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Measurement Condition Release (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 408)
This sequence releases the measurement conditions that have been set.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
Send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 407 (Measurement Condition Set). However, only the
setting Yes/No flags at +46 to +53 from the send data leading word can be used.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. The following conditions are used when the measurement conditions are released: Segment becomes
1, measurement interval becomes 1, the number of sample measurement pulses becomes 1.
2. The following conditions cannot be released with this sequence: error lower limit (EL), error upper limit
(EH), error exclusion counter (CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function).
3. The following settings cannot be released separately using this sequence.
Lower limit, Upper limit
Multistep selection limit
Reference value, analog output scale number
Data output conditions, scheduled print timer
Measurement Condition List Request (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 409)
This sequence requests the measurement condition settings that have been set and other settings.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
328
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send
data
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
+0
+1
Program number (P)
+2
Segment number (SG)
+3
+4
(Undefined)
+5
Measurement interval number (M)
Lower limit value (LL)
Decimal portion
+6
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+7
Sign
+8
Decimal portion
+9
Upper limit value (LH)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
+25
+26
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
+41
+42
+43
+44
+45
Decimal portion
Multistep selection limit value (L1)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Multistep selection limit value (L2)
Multistep selection limit value (L3)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Multistep selection limit value (L4)
Multistep selection limit value (L5)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Multistep selection limit value (L6)
Reference value (REF)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Analog output scale number (SCL)
Offset classification (OF)
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Offset value (LH)
Data output condition (PR)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Scheduled output timer
(PRT)
(SMP)
Sample measurement pulse
Sample measurement classification
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Statistical processing calculation classification
329
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0046 (fixed)
0 to 9
+1
Program number
(1 digit BCD)
+2 to
+4
Segment number
(ASCII 6 characters)
Combination of 31(‘1’) to 36(‘6’), 20(‘ ’)
+5
Measurement interval
number (1 digit BCD)
1 to 4
Example –123.4567
+6
Lower limit value (Decimal
portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
000 to 999
+6
+7
+8
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
+7
+8
Lower limit value (Integer
portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Lower limit value (Sign)
(BIN)
If +: 0
If – : F
+9 to
+11
Upper limit value
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
Same as lower limit values
+12 to
+14
Multistep selection limit
value (L1)
+15 to
+17
Multistep selection limit
value (L2)
+18 to
+20
Multistep selection limit
value (L3)
+21 to
+23
Multistep selection limit
value (L4)
+24 to
+26
Multistep selection limit
value (L5)
+27 to
+29
Multistep selection limit
value (L6)
+30 to
+32
Reference value
+33
Analog output scale number 1 to 3
(1 digit BCD)
+34 to
+35
Offset classification (ASCII
3 characters)
4F4620 (“OF”), 4F4D20 (“OM”)
+36 to
+38
Offset value
Same as lower limit values
0 to 6
+39
+40
+41
Data output condition
(1 digit BCD)
Scheduled output timer
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Sample measurement pulse 000 to 999
(3 digits BCD)
+42 to
+43
Sample measurement
classification
(ASCII 3 characters)
415647 (“AVG”), 4D4158 (“MAX”)
4D494E (“MIN”), 524E47 (“RNG”)
+44 to
+45
Statistical processing
calculation classification
(ASCII 3 characters)
535420 (“ST”), 4E5354 (“NST”)
Note This sequence cannot be used to request the lower limit (EL), error upper limit (EH), error exclusion counter
(CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function).
330
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Single Run Measurement Start (3000-series) (Sequence No. 410)
When the sample measurement condition is from 1 to 999, this sequence performs a single run measurement and
requests the measurement results
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data stor- +0
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
age words
+1
Program number
Decision result
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Decimal portion
Measurement value
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Decimal portion
Deviation value
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digit BCD)
With no reference setting: 0006
With reference setting: 0009
+1
+2
Program number
(1 digit BCD)
0 to 9
Decision result
(ASCII 2 characters)
With no limit setting: 0000
With limit setting: 2B4E (“+N”), 4F4B (“OK”),
2D4E (“–N”)
Example –123.4567
+3
Measurement value
(decimal portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+3
+4
+5
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
+4
+5
Measurement value (integer 000 to 999
portion) (3 digits BCD)
Measurement value (Sign)
(BIN)
If +: 0
If –: F
+6 to
+8
Deviation value
Same as measurement value
*The deviation will be stored in this area only when
reference setting is made.
Zero Run Measurement Start (3000-series) (Sequence No. 411)
If the sample measurement condition is zero, a zero run measurement is started.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note The zero run measurement keeps measuring until sequence No. 414 (Measurement Termination) is
executed.
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 412)
A continuous measurement is started. The scan notification method is used for the receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start).
331
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 414
(Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 413)
A continuous measurement is started. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data and the inter-
rupt No. is 101.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 414
(Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
Measurement Termination (3000-series) (Sequence No. 414)
This sequence terminates a continuous measurement.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
For continuous measurement: Not available
For Zero Run Measurement
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Data Request (3000-series) (Sequence No. 415)
This sequence requests display data in the idle measurement status or the latch data generated by the measure-
ment command.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 410 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Statistic Processing Execution (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 416)
This sequence lights the statistic processing LED and implements the statistic processing.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
332
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Statistic Processing Non-execution (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 417)
This sequence turns the statistic processing LED off and does not carry out the statistic processing.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
All Statistic Memory Clear (3000-series) (Sequence No. 418)
This sequence clears statistic processing memories of all programs.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Statistic Processing Memory Clear (3000-series)
(Sequence No. 419)
This sequence clears statistic processing memories of the program under display.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Statistic Result Request (3000-series) (Sequence No. 420)
This sequence requests the statistic processing results.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Program number (P)
+2
Number of statistic data (N)
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
+3
+4
Average value (AVG)
Maximum value (MAX)
Minimum value (MIN)
(Undefined)
Sign
+5
+6
+7
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+8
+9
Decimal portion
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Range (R)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Standard deviation (SD)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
333
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset
Contents
(data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0019 (fixed)
0 to 9
Program number
(1digit BCD)
+2 to
+3
Number of statistic data
(6 digits BCD)
000000 to 999999
0000 to 9999
000 to 999
Example –123.4567
+4
+5
+6
Average value (decimal
portion) (4 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+6
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
Average value (integer
portion) (4 digits BCD)
Average value (Sign) (BIN)
Maximum value
Minimum value
If +: 0
If –: F
+7 to
+9
Same as average value
Same as average value
Same as average value
Same as average value
+10 to
+12
+13 to
+15
Range
+16 to
+18
Standard deviation
Note The number of digits of the Decimal portion is fixed to 4 digits. If a deviation calculation results in a value
with 5 decimal places, it will be stored with one digit overflowing into the integer portion.
Examples: The value –0.1234 is stored as follows:
Area of decimal portion: 1234; Area of integer portion: 0000; Sign area: F000
The value –0.12345 is stored as follows:
Area of decimal portion: 2345; Area of integer portion: 0001; Sign area: F000
334
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Memory Switch Set 1 (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 421)
This sequence sets memory switches.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
W
X
Y
Z
V
+1
(Undefined)
+2
Offset
+0
Contents
(data format)
Data
Number of send data words 0003 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
w (1 digits BCD)
x (1 digit BCD)
0: For single run or zero run measurement start
displaying ‘–––.’
1: For single run or zero run measurement start
displaying the previous measured value
0: Perform single run measurement to the RUN signal
of I/O IF
1: Repeat measurement while the RUN signal of I/O
IF is input
y (1 digit BCD)
z (1 digit BCD)
v (1 digit BCD)
*0: RS-232C Delimiter CR+LF
1: RS-232C Delimiter CR
2: RS-232C Delimiter LF
0: RS-232C no parity check
1: RS-232C odd parity check
2: RS-232C even parity check
0: Displaying ‘Err-0’
+2
1: Displaying ‘0’
Note Settings marked with asterisks are required for this protocol.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Memory switches cannot be set when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
2. The setting (y, z) of RS-232C takes effect when the power supply is turned back on.
335
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Memory Switch Set 2 (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 422)
This sequence sets memory switches.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
W
X
Y
Z
V
+1
(Undefined)
+2
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0003 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
w (1 digit BCD)
0: Work automatic detection is not performed
1: Work automatic detection is performed
Diameter detection method (1 scan)
2: Work automatic detection is performed
Diameter detection method (8 scan)
3: Work automatic detection is performed
Position detection method (1 scan)
x (1 digit BCD)
y (1 digit BCD)
z (1 digit BCD)
v (1 digit BCD)
For expansion
0 (fixed)
For expansion
0 (fixed)
For expansion
0 (fixed)
+2
*0: Error data exclusion function is not used
1: Error data exclusion function is used
Note Settings marked with asterisks are required for this protocol.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Memory switches cannot be set when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Simple AVG Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 423)
This sequence uses the simple average as the averaging method and sets the averaging times per measurement
interval 4.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of averaging times
data
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
1 to 2048
+1
Number of averaging times
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
336
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
AVG Move Interval Set (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 424)
This sequence uses the average move as the averaging method and sets the measurement interval number.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
data
+1
Measurement interval number
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Measurement interval number
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 4
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
AVG Move (H) Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 425)
This sequence uses the average move and high-speed data output as the averaging method and sets the averag-
ing times per measurement interval 4.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of averaging times
data
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
16 to 2048
+1
Number of averaging times
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
AVG Move (L) Times Set (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 426)
This sequence uses the average move and low-speed data output as the averaging method and sets the averag-
ing times per measurement interval 4.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of averaging times
data
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
32 to 2048
+1
Number of averaging times
(4 digits BCD)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
337
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Automatic Detection Set (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 427)
This sequence sets the work automatic detection function.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
Number of send data words
The number of measuring times
Invalid time
+1 (Undefined)
+2
+3
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Detection lower limit
Detection upper limit
(Undefined)
Sign
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Sign
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0009 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of measurements
(3 digits BCD)
001 to 999
+2
+3
Invalid time (4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0000 to 9999
Example –123.4567
Detection lower limit
(decimal portion)
(4 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
2 D 0 0
+4
+5
Detection lower limit
(integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Detection lower limit (Sign)
(ASCII 1 character)
If +: 20 (‘ ’)
If – : 2D (‘–’)
+6 to
+8
Detection upper limit
Same as detection lower limit
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Automatic Detection Release (3000-series, High-speed Type)
(Sequence No. 428)
This sequence releases the setting of work automatic detection function.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Automatic Detection List Request (3000-series, High-speed
Type) (Sequence No. 429)
This sequence requests the settings of work automatic detection function.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
338
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
Number of receive data words
The number of measuring times
Invalid time
+1 (Undefined)
+2
+3
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Detection lower limit
Detection upper limit
(Undefined)
Sign
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
Decimal portion
Integer portion
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Sign
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0009 (fixed)
000 to 999
+1
The number of measuring
times
(3 digits BCD)
+2
+3
Invalid time
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 9999
0000 to 9999
Example –123.4567
Detection lower limit
(decimal portion)
(4 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
+4
+5
Detection lower limit
(integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Detection lower limit (Sign)
(BIN)
If +: 0
If –: F
+6 to
+8
Detection upper limit
Same as detection lower limit
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
3Z4L Initialize (3000-series) (Sequence No. 430)
This sequence clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, sets memory switches, does not process statistics, and clears
the statistic memory.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 401 (Memory Switch Setting)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
339
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Measurement Condition Set (4000-series) (Sequence No. 431)
This sequence sets measurement conditions. Conditions to be set can be selected by setting Yes/No flags.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Segment number (SG)
(Undefined)
+2
Measurement interval number (M)
Decimal portion
+3
Lower limit value (LL)
Upper limit value (LH)
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+4
Sign
+5
Decimal portion
+6
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+7
+8
Decimal portion
+9
Reference value (REF)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
(Undefined)
(Unused)
Analog output scale number (SCL)
(Unused)
(Unused)
(Undefined)
Data output conditions (PR)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(PRT)
Data output timer (BCD 3 digits)
Number of seconds for latch timer (RLT)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Setting Yes/No flags
340
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words 0025 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
Segment number
(1 digit BCD)
1 to 5
Measurement interval
number (1 digit BCD)
1 to 7
Lower limit value (Decimal
portion)
0000 to 9999
Example –123.4567
(4 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
2 D 0 0
+4
+5
Lower limit value (integer
portion) (3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Lower limit value (Sign)
(ASCII 1 character)
If +: 20 (‘ ’)
If – : 2D (‘–’)
+6 to
+8
Upper limit value
Same as lower limit value
+9 to
+11
Reference value
Same as lower limit value
+12
Analog output scale number 0 to 3
(1 digit BCD)
+13 to
+15
Unused
+16
+17
+18
Data output conditions
(1 digit BCD)
0 to 6
Data output timer value
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Number of seconds for latch 00 to 99
timer
(2 digits BCD)
+19
+20
Yes/No for segment setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
Don’t set: 0
1(SG)
Yes/No for measurement
interval number setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
Don’t set: 0
1(M)
+21
Yes/No for upper/lower limit Set:
1(LL, LH)
value setting
(1 digit BCD)
Don’t set: 0
+22
+23
Yes/No for reference setting Set:
1(REF, SCL)
1(PR, PRT)
(1 digit BCD)
Don’t set: 0
Yes/No for data output
condition setting
(1 digit BCD)
Set:
Don’t set: 0
+24
Yes/No for latch timer
setting (1 digit BCD)
Set:
Don’t set: 0
1(RLT)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. The following settings must be made together with this sequence; they cannot be set separately.
Lower limit, upper limit
Reference value, data output timer
Data output conditions, scheduled print timer
2. The limit value and reference value can be set to 3 digits for the integer portion and to 4 digits for the
decimal portion.
341
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Measurement Condition Release (4000-series)
(Sequence No. 432)
This sequence clears the measurement conditions that have been set.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 431 (Measurement Condition Setting). However,
only the setting Yes/No flags at +19 to +24 from the send data leading word can be used.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. The following conditions are used when the measurement conditions are released: Segment becomes
1 and the measurement interval becomes 1.
2. The following settings cannot be cleared separately using this sequence. They all must be cleared at the
same time.
Lower limit, Upper limit
Data output conditions, Scheduled print timer
The scale (SCL) and data output timer (PRT) cannot be cleared.
3. This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
Measurement Condition List Request (4000-series)
(Sequence No. 433)
This sequence requests the measurement condition settings that have been set and other settings.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Segment number (SG)
(Undefined)
+2
Measurement interval number (M)
Decimal portion
+3
Lower limit value (LL)
Upper limit value (LH)
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+4
Sign
+5
Decimal portion
+6
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+7
+8
Decimal portion
+9
Reference value (REF)
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
+18
(Undefined)
Analog output scale number (SCL)
Forced zero number (ZERO+)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Data output condition (PR)
(PRT)
Data output timer (BCD 3 digits)
Number of seconds for latch timer (RLT)
342
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0019 (fixed)
1 to 5
Segment number
(1 digit BCD)
Measurement interval
number (1 digit BCD)
1 to 7
Example –123.4567
Lower limit value (Decimal
portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+3
+4
+5
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
+4
+5
Lower limit value (Integer
portion)
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Lower limit value (Sign)
(BIN)
If +: 0
If –: F
+6 to
+8
Upper limit value
Same as lower limit value
Same as lower limit value
+9 to
+11
Reference value
+12
Analog output scale number 0 to 3
(1 digit BCD)
+13 to
+15
Forced zero number (ASCII 5A45524F2B (“ZERO+”)
5 characters)
4E4F524D20 (“NORM ”)
5A45524F2D (“ZERO–”)
+16
+17
+18
Data output condition
(1 digit BCD)
0 to 6
Data output timer value
(3 digits BCD)
000 to 999
Number of seconds for latch 00 to 99
timer
(2 digits BCD)
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
Single Run Measurement Start (4000-series) (Sequence No. 434)
When the sample measurement condition is from 1 to 999, this sequence performs a single run measurement and
requests the measurement results.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
Number of receive data words
Decision result
Decimal portion
Measurement value
Deviation value
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Sign
Integer portion
(Undefined)
343
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
With no reference setting: 0005
With reference setting: 0008
With no limit setting: 0000
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
+1
Decision result
(ASCII 2 characters)
With limit setting: 2B4E (“+N”), 4F4B (“OK”),
2D4E (“–N”)
Example –123.4567
+2
+3
+4
Measurement value
(decimal portion)
(4 digits BCD)
0000 to 9999
+2
+3
+4
4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3
F 0 0 0
Measurement value (integer 000 to 999
portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Measurement value (Sign)
(BIN)
If +: 0
If –: F
+5 to
+7
Deviation value
Same as measurement value
*The deviation will be stored in this area only when
reference setting is made.
Deflection Measurement Start (4000-series) (Sequence No. 435)
This sequence starts a deflection measurement.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note The deflection measurement keeps measuring until sequence No. 438 (Measurement Termination) is
executed.
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (4000-series)
(Sequence No. 436)
This sequence starts a continuous measurement. The scan notification method is used for the receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 438
(Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (4000-series)
(Sequence No. 437)
This sequence starts a continuous measurement. The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data
and the interrupt No. is 101.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Note 1. Since this sequence repeats itself within the sequence, once it is executed, it remains in the execution
state until cancelled.
2. Even if execution is cancelled, the Laser Micrometer still keeps measuring. Execute sequence No. 438
(Measurement Termination) to end the sequence.
344
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
Continuous Measurement Termination (4000-series)
(Sequence No. 438)
This sequence terminates continuous measurement.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
For continuous measurement: None.
For Deflection Measurement
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Data Request (4000-series) (Sequence No. 439)
This sequence requests display data in the idle measurement status or latch data generated by the measurement
command.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 434 (Single Run Measurement Start).
Forced Positive Zero (4000-series) (Sequence No. 440)
This sequence sets the forced zero direction to positive (+)
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Forced Negative Zero (4000-series) (Sequence No. 441)
This sequence sets the forced zero direction to negative (–)
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Forced Zero Release (4000-series) (Sequence No. 442)
This sequence releases the forced zero direction.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
3Z4L Initialize (4000-series) (Sequence No. 443)
This sequence clears the 3Z4L, sets the mm unit, and sets memory switches.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No. 401 (Memory Switch Setting).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
345
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
General-purpose Command 1 (4000-series) (Sequence No. 444)
This general-purpose command is used to send data with a specified data length, and receive back only OK. The
terminator (CR) is automatically attached to the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Send data byte length
Send data
Send data
D
D
Send data
+128
+129
Send data
CR
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0129
0001 to 0255
+1
Send data byte length (4 digits BCD)
The number of bytes of send data
excluding the terminator (CR)
+2 to
+129
Send data (ASCII)
Send data up to 255 bytes maximum
Specify in ASCII.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
346
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
Appendix K
General-purpose Command 2 (4000-series) (Sequence No. 445)
This general-purpose command is used to send data with a specified data length, and receive back receive data
other than OK. The terminator (CR) is automatically attached to the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
Send data byte length
Send data
Send data
D
D
Send data
+128
+129
Send data
CR
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0129
0001 to 0255
The number of bytes of send data
excluding the terminator (CR)
+1
Send data byte length
(4 digits BCD)
+2 to
+129
Send data (ASCII)
Send data up to 255 bytes maximum
Specify in ASCII.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Receive data
Receive data
D
D
Receive data
Receive data
+126
+127
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0128
+1 to
+127
Receive data (ASCII)
When the receive data exceed 254 bytes,
only 254 bytes are stored.
347
Appendix L
Visual Inspection System Protocol
The Visual Inspection System Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Visual Recognition
Device connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Visual Inspection System Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
450
451
452
453
454
Measurement execution Carries out one measurement one and
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
(F200)
stores the measurement results in the
specified words.
Continuous measure-
ment execution (scan)
(F200)
Carries out continuously setting the F200
and storing the measurement results in
the specified words.
No
No
No
No
Continuous measure-
ment execution (inter-
rupt) (F200)
Carries out continuously setting the F200
and storing the measurement results in
the specified words.
Reference object regis-
tration (group) (F200)
Performs reference position registration
and evaluation criterion registration at the
same time.
Reference object regis-
tration (reference posi-
tion) (F200)
Registers the reference position for mea-
suring the amount of position displace-
ment when a position displacement com-
pensation is used.
No
455
456
457
460
461
462
463
464
Reference object regis-
tration (evaluation criteri- nate the output format.
on) (F200)
Registers the reference value to discrimi-
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Evaluation condition
change (F200)
Changes the upper and lower limit values
of the evaluation condition of the desig-
nated output No.
Arbitrary measurement
value acquisition (F200) trary measurement item regardless of out-
put format in the specified words.
Stores the measurement values of arbi-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Measurement execution Carries out one measurement and stores
(F300)
the measurement results in the specified
words.
Continuous measure-
ment execution (scan)
(F300)
Carries out continuously setting the F300
and storing the measurement results in
the specified words.
No
Continuous measure-
ment execution (inter-
rupt) (F300)
Carries out continuously setting the F300
and storing the measurement results in
the specified words.
No
Reference object regis-
tration command 1
execution (F300)
Performs a measurement for the input
image and updates the reference object
data of the full window.
No
Reference object regis-
tration command 2
execution (F300)
Performs a measurement for the input
image and updates the reference object
data of the full window
Yes
No
465
470
Illumination fluctuation
follow execution (F300)
Executes an illumination fluctuation follow.
No
No
No
Measurement execution Carries out one measurement and stores
and positioning (F350)
Yes
the measurement results in the specified
words.
349
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Ladder interface
Send word
allocation
Receive word
allocation
471
472
473
Camera designation and Designates the camera for measurement.
positioning (F350)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Scene switching and
positioning (F350)
Switches to a designated scene No.
Inspection execution and Carries out one inspection and outputs
character inspection
(F350)
inspection results to the video monitor.
474
Character string inspec- Changes the inspection character string
Yes
No
tion and character in-
spection (F350)
of a designated inspection area No. to a
designated character string.
480
481
482
Camera change (de-
crease by 1) (F200/300)
Decreases the display camera No. by 1.
No
No
No
No
No
Camera change (in-
crease by 1) (F200/300)
Increases the display camera No. by 1.
Binary level modification Modifies the binary levels (upper limit and
(F200/300)
Yes
lower limit values) of a designated window
number No.
483
490
Reset (F200/300)
Resets the F200/F300.
No
No
No
No
Scene switch (decrease Decreases the scene No. by 1.
by 1)
491
Scene switch (increase
by 1)
Increases the scene No. by 1.
No
No
492
493
Scene switch (arbitrary) Switches to a designated scene No.
Yes
No
No
No
Measurement, inspec-
tion termination
Terminates the measurement and returns
to the home menu.
494
495
General-purpose com-
mand (send)
Sets and executes commands that are
otherwise not supported.
Yes
Yes
No
General-purpose com-
mand (send/receive)
Sets and executes commands that are
otherwise not supported.
Yes
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
350
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Connections
The connections for using the Visual Inspection System Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
F200/300/350
Serial Communica-
tions Board
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C Unit
Pin No.
Signal name
Abbreviation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Protective ground or earth
Send data
FG (GND)
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
DR (DSR)
SG (GND)
CD (DCD)
ER (DTR)
Receive data
Request to send
Clear to send
Data set ready
Signal ground
Carrier detection (Data word receive)
Data terminal ready
20
Serial Communications
Board: D-sub 9 pin (female)
F300-E:
D-sub 25 pin (female)
Signal Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal Name
• For RS/CS Flow Control
F300-E:
D-sub 25 pin (female)
Serial Communications
Board: D-sub 9 pin (female)
Signal Name
Pin No.
Pin No.
Signal Name
351
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Measurement Execution (F200) (Sequence No. 450)
This sequence carries out one measurement and stores the measurement results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Output No.
Evaluation
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
result
Measurement value
Sign
0
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006
+1
+2
Output No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
Note 1. Only one output No. can be stored.
2. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting :–2147483.648 to 2147483.647
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
3. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, unde-
fined data is stored in the specified words.
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F200)
(Sequence No. 451)
This sequence carries out continuously the setting of the F200 and stores measurement results in the specified
words. The scan notification method is used for the receive data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Output No.
Evaluation
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
result
Measurement value
Sign
0
352
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006
+1
+2
Output No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated.
2. Turn OFF CIO 28911 (if port A is used) or CIO 28915 (if port B is used) to terminate this sequence.
3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting : –2147483.648 to 2147483.647
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, unde-
fined data is stored in the specified words.
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F200)
(Sequence No. 452)
This sequence carries out continuously setting the F200 and stores measurement results in the specified words.
The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data. The interrupt No. is 102.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Output No.
Evaluation
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
result
Measurement value
Sign
0
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006
+1
+2
Output No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated.
2. Turn OFF CIO 28911 (if port A is used) or CIO 28915 (if port B is used) to terminate this sequence.
353
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting :–2147483.648 to 2147483.647
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, unde-
fined data is stored in the specified words.
Reference Object Registration (Group) (F200)
(Sequence No. 453)
This sequence performs reference position registration and criterion registration at the same time.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Reference Object Registration (Reference Position) (F200)
(Sequence No. 454)
This sequence registers the reference position for measuring the amount of position displacement when a position
displacement compensation is used.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Reference Object Registration (Criterion) (F200)
(Sequence No. 455)
This sequence registers a reference value to discriminate the output format.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Evaluation Condition Change (F200) (Sequence No. 456)
This sequence changes the upper and lower limit values of evaluation condition of the designated output No.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Output No.
+1
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Upper limit value
Lower limit value
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Sign
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
(Undefined)
Integer portion
(Undefined)
Sign
(Undefined)
354
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0010
+1
Output No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
+2 to
+5
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Upper limit value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+2
+3
+4
+5
0567
+2
0678
2345
0001
3000
Upper limit value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+3
+4
+5
1234
0000
2D00
Upper limit value (sign) (ASCII
2 digits)
+6 to
+9
Same as upper limit.
Lower limit value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Lower limit value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
Lower limit value (sign) (ASCII
2 digits)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated.
2. Enter values so that upper limit ≥ lower limit.
3. Enter upper limit and lower limit values within the range –2147483.648 to 2147483.648.
Arbitrary Measurement Value Acquisition (F200)
(Sequence No. 457)
This sequence stores measurement values of arbitrary measurement items regardless of output format in the spe-
cified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Data 1
(Undefined)
Data 2
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003
+1
Data 1 (2 digits BCD)
00: Area
01: Center of gravity x
02: Center of gravity y
03: Main axis angle
04: Output format
05: Reference value of output format
06: X displacement
07: Y displacement
08: Angle displacement
09: X reference position
10: Y reference position
11: Angle reference position
+2
Data 2 (2 digits BCD)
When 00 to 03 is set to data 1
Window No.: 00 to 07
When 04 to 05 is set to data 1
Output No.:
00 to 07
When 06 to 11 is set to data 1
Camera No.: 00 to 01
355
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Decimal portion
Integer portion
Measurement value
Sign
0
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004
+1 to
+3
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
Note 1. Only one output No. can be designated.
2. Measurement is not performed with this command. The measurement results of the last measurement
will be stored in the specified words.
3. This command can acquire only the measurement value of the window No. set by output format.
4. For data 1 and 2 , the receive data is compared with the send data. If the receive data is not the same as
the send data, CIO 28909 (if port A is used) or CIO 28913 (if port B is used) will turn ON.
5. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting : –2147483.648 to 2147483.647
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
6. If a measurement value exceeds the range of measurement values when calibration is turned off, unex-
pected data is stored in the specified words.
Measurement Execution (F300) (Sequence No. 460)
This sequence carries out one measurement and stores measurement results in the specified words
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data stor-+0
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
age words
+1
Window No.
Evaluation
result
+2
+3
Decimal portion
Decimal portion
Decimal portion
Decimal portion
Decimal portion
Integer portion
+4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
0
+5
+6
Integer portion
+7
0
+8
+9
Integer portion
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
0
Integer portion
0
Integer portion
0
356
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006: 1 measurement item
0009: 2 measurement items
0012: 3 measurement items
0015: 4 measurement items
0018: 5 measurement items
00 to 07
+1
+2
Window number (2 digits BCD)
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
+6 to
+8
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
+9 to
+11
+12 to
+14
+15 to
+17
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting :–2147483.648 to 2147483.648
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. The priority of measurement items being output are as follows:
Area
Center of gravity X, Center of gravity Y
Displacement in center of gravity X (reserved), displacement in center of gravity Y (reserved)
Main axis angle
Main axis angle aberration (reserved)
Edge angle
Edge angle (reserved)
Center X, center Y
Center X aberration (reserved), center Y aberration (reserved)
Inclination
Inclination aberration (reserved)
Intersecting point X, intersecting point Y
Intersecting point X aberration (reserved), intersecting point Y aberration (reserved)
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F300)
(Sequence No. 461)
This sequence carries out continuously the settings of F300 and stores measurement results in the specified
words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
357
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Window No.
Evaluation
result
+2
Decimal portion
+3
Integer portion
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
+4
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
0
+5
Decimal portion
+6
Integer portion
0
+7
+8
Decimal portion
+9
Integer portion
0
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
Decimal portion
Integer portion
0
Decimal portion
Integer portion
0
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006: 1 measurement item
0009: 2 measurement items
0012: 3 measurement items
0015: 4 measurement items
0018: 5 measurement items
00 to 07
+1
+2
Window No. (2 digits BCD)
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
+6 to
+8
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
+9 to
+11
+12 to
+14
+15 to
+17
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items are up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
3. The range of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting :–2147483.648 to 2147483.648
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. The priority order of measurement items being output are as follows:
Area
Center of gravity X, Center of gravity Y
Displacement in center of gravity X (reserved), displacement in center of gravity Y (reserved)
Main axis angle
358
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Main axis angle aberration (reserved)
Edge angle
Edge angle (reserved)
Center X, center Y
Center X displacement (reserved), center Y displacement (reserved)
Inclination
Inclination displacement (reserved)
Intersecting point X, intersecting point Y
Intersecting point X displacement (reserved), intersecting point Y displacement (reserved)
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F300)
(Sequence No. 462)
This sequence carries out continuously setting the F300 and stores measurement results in the specified words.
The interrupt notification method is used for the receive data. The interrupt No. is 102.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Window No.
Evaluation
result
+2
Decimal portion
+3
Integer portion
+4
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
Sign
0
+5
Decimal portion
+6
Integer portion
0
+7
+8
Decimal portion
+9
Integer portion
0
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
Decimal portion
Integer portion
0
Decimal portion
Integer portion
0
359
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006: 1 measurement item
0009: 2 measurement items
0012: 3 measurement items
0015: 4 measurement items
0018: 5 measurement items
00 to 07
+1
+2
Window No. (2 digits BCD)
Evaluation result (1 digit BCD)
0: OK
1: NG
+3 to
+5
Measurement value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
+3
3456
0012
F000
+3
3456
0012
0000
Measurement value (integer portion)
(7 digits BCD)
+4
+5
+4
+5
Measurement value (sign)
(1 digit)
F is stored for negative values.
Same as +3 to +5.
+6 to
+8
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
+9 to
+11
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
Same as +3 to +5.
+12 to
+14
+15 to
+17
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting :–2147483.648 to 2147483.648
For calibration ON setting : –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. The priority of measurement items being output are as follows:
Area
Center of gravity X, Center of gravity Y
Displacement in center of gravity X (reserved), displacement in center of gravity Y (reserved)
Main axis angle
Main axis angle displacement (reserved)
Edge angle
Edge angle(reserved)
Center X, center Y
Center X displacement (reserved), center Y displacement (reserved)
Inclination
Inclination displacement (reserved)
Intersecting point X, intersecting point Y
Intersecting point X displacement (reserved), intersecting point Y displacement (reserved)
Reference Object Registration Command 1 Execution (F300)
(Sequence No. 463)
This sequence performs a measurement for the input image and updates reference object data of the full window.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
360
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Reference Object Registration Command 2 Execution (F300)
(Sequence No. 464)
This sequence performs a measurement for the input image and updates the reference object data of a desig-
nated window.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Window No.
+1
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Window No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Illumination Fluctuation Follow Execution (F300)
(Sequence No. 465)
This sequence executes an illumination fluctuation follow.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Measurement Execution and Positioning (F350)
(Sequence No. 470)
This sequence carries out one measurement and stores the measurement results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of receive data words
Decimal portion
X displacement
Y displacement
Correlation value
Sign
Integer portion
Decimal portion
Integer portion
Sign
Sign
Decimal portion
Integer portion
0
361
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
0007
Example
–123.456
+1 to
+2
Example
+123.456
X displacement (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
X displacement (integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+1
+2
3456
F012
+1
+2
3456
0012
X displacement (sign) (1 digit)
(See note.)
F is stored for negative values.
+3 to
+4
Example
–123.456
Example
+123.456
Y displacement (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Y displacement (integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+1
+2
3456
F012
+1
+2
3456
0012
Y displacement (sign) (1 digit)
(See note.)
F is stored for negative values.
+5 to
+6
Example
–12.345
Example
+12.345
Correlation value (decimal portion)
(3 digits BCD)
Correlation value (integer portion)
(3 digits BCD)
+1
+2
2345
F001
+1
+2
2345
0001
Correlation value (sign) (1 digit)
(See note.)
F is stored for negative values.
Note 1. The number of models that can be stored in a designated word is 1.
2. If a measurement is carried out without executing a camera designation, a measurement is executed for
all cameras in which the measurement model is registered.
3. When the correlation value is less than 70 and the measurement value overflows, CIO 28909 (if port A is
used) or CIO 28913 (if port B is used) will turn ON.
4. Data to be output is within the range 999.999 (upper limit) to –999.999 (lower limit).
5. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
6. Turn the Abort Bit ON and then OFF to end this sequence.
Camera Designation and Positioning (F350) (Sequence No. 471)
This sequence designates the cameras for measurement.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
First camera
No.
Last camera
No.
(Undefined)
Offset
Content (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digit BCD)
0003
+1
+2
First camera No. (1 digit BCD)
Last camera No. (1 digit BCD)
0 to 7
0 to 7
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Set values so that the first camera No.< last camera No.
2. If a designated camera No. is abnormal, CIO 28909 (if port A is used) or CIO 28913 (if port B is used) will
turn ON.
Scene Switching and Positioning (F350) (Sequence No. 472)
This sequence switches to a designated scene No.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Scene No.
362
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Scene No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 15
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. If a scene No. is abnormal, CIO 28909 (if port A is used) or CIO 28913 (if port B is used) will turn ON.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
3. Turn the Abort Bit ON and then OFF to end this sequence.
Inspection Execution and Character Inspection (F350)
(Sequence No. 473)
This sequence carries out one inspection and outputs the inspection results to a video monitor.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Character String Inspection and Character Inspection (F350)
(Sequence No. 474)
This sequence changes the inspection character string of a designated inspection area No. to a designated char-
acter string.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send+0
Number of send data words
Inspection area No.
data
+1
(Undefined)
+2
+3
Number of designated character strings
Designated character string
Designated character string
~
~
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0015
0 to 24
+1
Number of designated character
strings (4 digits BCD)
+2
Inspection area No.
(2 digits BCD)
00 to 07
+3 to
Number of designated character
strings (ASCII)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Camera Change (Decrease by 1) (F200/300) (Sequence No. 480)
This sequence decreases the display camera No. by 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
363
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Camera Change (Increase by 1) (F200/300) (Sequence No. 481)
This sequence increases the display camera No. by 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Binary Level Modification (F200/300) (Sequence No. 482)
This sequence modifies the binary levels (upper limit and lower limit values) of a designated output No. (F200) or
window number No. (F300).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
+3
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Window No. or Output No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Upper limit value
Lower limit value
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004
+1
+2
+3
Window No. (1 digit BCD)
0 to 7
Upper limit value (3 digits BCD)
Lower limit value (3 digits BCD)
000 to 255
000 to 255
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Enter values so that the upper limit ≥ lower limit.
Reset (F200/300) (Sequence No. 483)
This sequence resets the F200/F300 (to starting status).
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Scene Switching (Decrease by 1) (Sequence No. 490)
This sequence decreases the scene No. by 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Scene Switching (Increase by 1) (Sequence No. 491)
This sequence increases the scene No. by 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
364
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Scene Switching (Arbitrary) (Sequence No. 492)
This sequence switches to a designated scene No.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
Number of send data words
(Undefined)
Scene No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002
+1
Scene No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 15
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Measurement, Inspection Termination (Sequence No. 493)
This sequence terminates the measurement and returns to the home menu.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
General-purpose Command (Send) (Sequence No. 494)
This sequence can set and execute commands that are not otherwise supported. The delimiter (CR+LF) is auto-
matically attached to the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Command length
(Undefined)
Command
~
~
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
003 to 0129
+1
Command length (4 digits BCD)
Command (ASCII)
0001 to 0253
+2 to
Specify ASCII data.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. The processing depends on the command.
2. For a command with a response, use sequence #495.
General-purpose Command (Send/Receive) (Sequence No. 495)
This sequence can set and execute commands that are not otherwise supported. The delimiter (CR+LF) is auto-
matically attached to the send data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Command length
(Undefined)
Command
~
~
365
Visual Inspection System Protocol
Appendix L
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0129
0001 to 0253
+1
Command length (4 digits BCD)
Command (ASCII)
+2 to
Specify ASCII data.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The reception data is stored in the reception data words without the delimiter (CR+LF),
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Command length
(Undefined)
Command
~
~
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Command length (4 digits BCD)
Command (ASCII)
+2 to
ASCII data is returned.
Note 1. The processing depends on the command.
2. For a command with a response, use sequence #495.
366
Appendix M
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
The V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the ID Controller Con-
nected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C or RS-422A cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
Read (ASCII/1)
Read (ASCII/2)
Read (ASCII/4)
Read (ASCII/8)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 1.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 2.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 4.
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 8.
Read (Hexadeci-
mal/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 1.
Read (Hexadeci-
mal/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 2.
Read (Hexadeci-
mal/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 4.
Read (Hexadeci-
mal/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 8.
Auto-read (ASCII/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 1.
Auto-read (Hexade-
cimal/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 1.
Polling Auto-read
(ASCII)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand
(ASCII/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is 2.
Yes
512
513
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand
(ASCII/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 4.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand
(ASCII/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be read from the Carrier is 8.
514
515
Polling Auto-read
(Hexadecimal)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
Yes
Yes
No
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand (Hexa- from the Carrier is 2.
decimal/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be read
Yes
516
517
518
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand (Hexa- be read from the Carrier is 4.
decimal/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Polling Auto-read
Subcommand (Hexa- be read from the Carrier is 8.
decimal/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
Write (ASCII/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 1.
367
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Ladder interface
Send word
allocation
Receive word
allocation
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
Write (ASCII/2)
Write (ASCII/4)
Write (ASCII/8)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 2.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 4.
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 8.
Write (Hexadeci-
mal/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 1.
Write (Hexadeci-
mal/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 2.
Write (Hexadeci-
mal/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 4.
Write (Hexadeci-
mal/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 8.
Auto-write (ASCII/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 1.
Auto-write (Hexade-
cimal/1)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 1.
Polling Auto-write
(ASCII/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 2.
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand
(ASCII/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 2.
530
531
Polling Auto-write
(ASCII/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 4.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand
(ASCII/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 4.
532
533
Polling Auto-write
(ASCII/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 8.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand
(ASCII/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 8.
534
535
Polling Auto-write
(Hexadecimal/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
to the Carrier is 2.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand (Hexa- to the Carrier is 2.
decimal/2)
Used when the number of Heads to be written
536
537
Polling Auto-write
(Hexadecimal/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 4.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand (Hexa- be written to the Carrier is 4.
decimal/4)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
538
539
Polling Auto-write
(Hexadecimal/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
be written to the Carrier is 8.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Polling Auto-write
Subcommand (Hexa- be written to the Carrier is 8.
decimal/8)
Used when the maximum number of Heads to
540
Data check
Writes and verify the CRC code for the check
blocks designated by the user.
Control management Performs I/O or an I/O read.
Yes
Yes
541
542
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Error information
read
Reads information from the latest error log.
543
Command proces-
sing cancel
Cancels command processing except polling
command processing and returns to the com-
mand waiting status.
Yes
Yes
368
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Ladder interface
Send word
allocation
Receive word
allocation
544
545
546
Polling auto-read
command proces-
sing cancel
Cancels polling auto-read processing.
Cancels polling auto-write processing.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Polling auto-write
command proces-
sing cancel
General-purpose
command
Sends arbitrary data and stores receive data
to receive data words.
Note Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
Connections
Connections when using the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
CQM1H
Head
Data Carrier
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-232C port
ID Controller
Serial Communications Board:
D-sub 9 pin (female)
ID Controller (CD1D):
D-sub 9 pin (female)
Signal
Pin No.
name
Signal
Pin No.
name
Shielded cable
Serial Communications Board:
D-sub 9 pin (female)
ID Controller (CA1A):
D-sub 25 pin (female)
Shielded cable
369
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
RS-422A Connections
CQM1H
Head
Head
Data Carrier
Serial Commu-
nications Board
RS-422A port
ID Controller
ID Controller
Data Carrier
Up to 16 units can be connected
Serial Communications Board:
ID Controller (CD1D):
D-sub 9 pin (female)
D-sub 9 pin (female)
Signal
Pin No.
name
Signal
Pin No.
name
Shielded cable
Note 1. Ground the cable shield at either the ID Controller or the Serial Communications Board to prevent mal-
function.
2. Turn ON the pin 6 on DIP switch SW6 to set the host communications procedure to the 1-to-N procedure
for 1-to-N connections.
370
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
DIP Switch Settings
V600/620-CD1D DIP Switches
DIP Switch 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not used (Always keep it OFF.)
Local communications mode setting
Speed priority setting
Distance priority setting
• SW7 Setting
This setting is only valid if the EEPROM-type (batteryless-
type) Data Carrier (DC) is accessed. The setting of SW7 does
not work with the SRAM-type (battery-type) DC. SW7 must
be set to OFF when the V620 is used.
Data
length (bit)
STOP
bits (bit)
Parity type
Baud rate
(bps)
7
7
7
2
2
1
E
O
E
2400
4800
9600
19,200
7
8
8
1
2
1
O
N
N
8
8
1
1
E
O
Display mode
Error display mode
I/O display mode
371
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
DIP Switch 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not used (Always keep it OFF.)
Communications protocol setting with host devices
1-to-N protocol
1-to-1 protocol
Note When selecting the “1-to-N” protocol, setting is limited to
N=1. In this case, the FCS check code may be added.
• ID Controller Unit Number Setting (Valid Only for 1-to-N Protocol)
Unit No.
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
Note 1. Be careful not to set to the same unit number twice.
2. Set them to OFF for the 1-to-1 protocol.
Synchronous condition
OFF (LL level)
ON (HL level)
Trailing edge
Leading edge
372
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
V600-CAjA DIP Switches
DIP Switch 1
Note Factory Setting: All OFF
Mode 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW7 and SW8: Be sure to set to OFF.
• Baud Rate
Setting
• Communications Format
Data
length (bit)
STOP
bit (bit)
Baud rate
(bps)
Parity type
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
7
7
7
2
2
1
E
O
E
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
1
1
1
O
N
N
E
O
1=ON, 0=OFF
1=ON, 0=OFF
(See note 1)
(See note 2)
Note 1. Data length setting
7 bits: ASCII code
8 bits: JIS8 unit code
2. Parity setting
E: Even parity
O: Odd parity
N: No parity designation
DIP Switch 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
• SW8: Receive Side Terminal Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A)
Connected (ID Controller send side)
Not connected
• SW7: Receive Side Terminal Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A)
Connected (ID Controller receive side)
Not connected
• SW6: Communications Protocol Setting
1-to-N protocol
1-to-1 protocol
• ID Controller Unit Number Setting (Valid Only for the 1-to-N Protocol)
Unit No.
• Local Communications Mode Setting
Speed priority setting
No. 0
No. 1
No. 2
Distance priority setting
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 7
No. 8
No. 9
No. 10
No. 11
No. 12
No. 13
No. 14
No. 15
• SW1 Setting
This setting is only valid if the EEPROM-type (battery-
less-type) Data Carrier (DC) is accessed. The setting
of SW7 does not work with the SRAM-type (battery-
type) DC.
• SW6 Setting
When selecting the 1-to-N protocol for the
V600-CA1A/RS-232C interface, the setting is limited
to N=1. In this case, the FCS check code may be add-
ed.
Note 1. Be careful not to set to the same unit number twice.
2. Set them to OFF for the 1-to-1 protocol.
373
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Read (ASCII/1) (Sequence No. 500)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
(Undefined)
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
Head CH No.
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 (fixed)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
00 to 15 (CAjA)
R/W Head channel
(CH) No. (1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+3
+4
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
Read bytes
01 to F4 (1 to 244 bytes)
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Read data
Read data
~
~
+122
Read data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0123
+1 to +122
Read data (ASCII)
Number of read bytes stored in ASCII
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive
data words.
374
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Read (ASCII/2) (Sequence No. 501)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Up to 118 bytes of data can be
read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
First word of send
data
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
CH 2
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0010
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0002
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 76 (1 to 118 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Number of receive data words
Read data
+0
+1
Receive data
storage words
~
~
~
CH 1
Read data
Not used
+59
+60
+61
Read data
CH 2
~
Read data
+119
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0120
+(60(N–1)+1) to Read data (ASCII)
Number of read bytes store in ASCII
+(60(N–1)+59)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive
data words.
375
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Read (ASCII/4) (Sequence No. 502)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Up to 48 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
First word of send
data
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
CH 2
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+14
+15
+16
+17
Head CH No.
4 CH
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0018
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 30 (1 to 48 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
Number of receive data words
Read data
+0
+1
~
~
CH 1
Read data
Read data
+24
+25
CH 2
~
~
~
~
Read data
+48
Read data
Read data
+73
~
+96
~
4 CH
376
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0097
+(24(N–1)+1) to
Read data (ASCII)
Number of read bytes stored in ASCII
+(24(N–1)+24)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive
data words.
Read (ASCII/8) (Sequence No. 503)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Up to 20 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
data
+1
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
CH 2
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
+30
+31
+32
+33
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
8 CH
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0034
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 14 (1 to 20 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
377
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
Number of receive data words
Read data
+0
+1
~
+10
~
CH 1
CH 2
Read data
Read data
+11
~
~
~
~
Read data
+20
Read data
Read data
+71
~
+80
~
CH 8
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0081
+(10(N–1)+1) to Read data (ASCII)
Number of read bytes stored in ASCII
+(10(N–1)+10)
N: Number of Heads
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the receive
data words.
Read (Hexadecimal/1) (Sequence No. 504)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0005 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
00 to 15 (CAjA)
R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+3
+4
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
Read bytes
01 to 7A (1 to 122 bytes)
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
+2
Number of receive data words
Read data
Read data
~
~
+61
Read data
378
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0062
+1 to +61
Read data (Hexadecimal)
Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal
data
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the re-
ceive data words.
Read (Hexadecimal/2) (Sequence No. 505)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Up to 60 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
First word of send
data
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
CH 2
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0010
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0002
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 3C (1 to 60 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Number of receive data words
Read data
+0
+1
Receive data
storage words
~
~
CH 1
Read data
Not used
+30
+31
~
~
~
~
Not used
+60
+61
Read data
CH 2
Read data
+90
379
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0091
+(60(N–1)+1) to Read data (Hexadecimal)
+(60(N–1)+30)
Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal
code
N: Number of Heads
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the re-
ceive data words.
Read (Hexadecimal/4) (Sequence No. 506)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Up to 24 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
data
+1
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
CH 1
CH 2
Read bytes
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
+14
+15
+16
+17
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 4
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0018
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 18 (1 to 24 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
380
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Number of receive data words
Read data
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
~
~
~
CH 1
Read data
(Not used)
+12
+13
~
(Not used)
Read data
+24
+25
CH 2
CH 4
~
+36
~
~
Read data
~
Read data
Read data
+73
+84
~
~
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0085
+(24(N–1)+1) to Read data (Hexadecimal)
+(24(N–1)+12)
Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal
data
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is received beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
Read (Hexadecimal/8) (Sequence No. 507)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Up to 10 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
data
+1
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
CH 2
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
+30
+31
+32
+33
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 8
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
381
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0006 to 0034
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
+(4(N–1)+2)
+(4(N–1)+3)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
01 to 0A (1 to 10 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Number of receive data words
Read data
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
~
~
~
CH 1
Read data
Not used
+5
+6
~
Not used
+10
+11
Read data
CH 2
CH 8
~
+15
~
~
Read data
~
Read data
Read data
+71
+75
~
~
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0076
+(10(N–1)+1) to Read data (CH 1)
+(10(N–1)+5) (Hexadecimal)
Number of read bytes stored in hexadecimal
data
N: Number of Heads
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the receive
data words.
Auto-read (ASCII/1) (Sequence No. 508)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 500 (Read (ASCII/1)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 500 (Read (ASCII/1)).
Note For auto-read (AR), a response is not returned if the number of Heads is not read by the Carrier, the Abort Bit
must be turned OFF to terminate the sequence.
382
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Auto-read (Hexadecimal/1) (Sequence No. 509)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 504 (Read (Hexadecimal/1)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 504 (Read (Hexadecimal/1)).
Note For auto-read (AR), a response is not returned if the number of Heads is not read by the Carrier, the Abort Bit
must be turned OFF to terminate the sequence.
Polling Auto-read (ASCII) (Sequence No. 510)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
+(4(N–1)+2)
+(4(N–1)+3)
+(4(N–1)+4)
+(4(N–1)+5)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH N
* N: Number of Heads
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0034
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
If number of Heads is 2 or less
01 to 76 (1 to 118 bytes)
If number of Heads is 4 or less
01 to 30 (1 to 48 bytes)
If number of Heads is 8 or less
01 to 20 (1 to 20 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 511, 512, 513.
2. Execute Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-read.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
383
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (ASCII/2) (Sequence No. 511)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Up to 118 bytes of
data can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 501 (Read (ASCII/2)). However, the leading ad-
dress No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #510.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 501 (Read (ASCII/2)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 511.
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the re-
ceive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (ASCII/4) (Sequence No. 512)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Up to 48 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 502 (Read (ASCII/4)). However, the leading ad-
dress No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #510.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 502 (Read (ASCII/4)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 512.
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the re-
ceive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (ASCII/8) (Sequence No. 513)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Up to 20 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 503 (Read (ASCII/8)). However, the leading ad-
dress No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #510.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 503 (Read (ASCII/8)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 513.
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the re-
ceive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
384
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal) (Sequence No. 514)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH 1
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
~
~
+(4(N–1)+2)
+(4(N–1)+3)
+(4(N–1)+4)
+(4(N–1)+5)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
CH N
* N: Number of Heads
Leading address No.
(Undefined)
Read bytes
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0006 to 0034
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0008
+(4(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(4(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
0000 to FFFF
+(4(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(4(N–1)+5)
Read bytes
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
If number of Heads is 2 or less
01 to 3C (1 to 60 bytes)
If number of Heads is 4 or less
01 to 18 (1 to 24 bytes)
If number of Heads is 8 or less
01 to 0A (1 to 10 bytes)
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 514 before executing Sequence No. 515, 516, 517.
2. Execute Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-read.
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (Hexadecimal/2) (Sequence
No. 515)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 2. Up to 60 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 505 (Read (Hexadecimal/2)). However, the lead-
ing address No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #514.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 505 (Read (Hexadecimal/2)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 514 before executing Sequence No. 515.
385
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
2. Data from Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (Hexadecimal/4) (Sequence
No. 516)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 4. Up to 24 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 506 (Read (Hexadecimal/4)). However, the lead-
ing address No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #514.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 506 (Read (Hexadecimal/4)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 514 before executing Sequence No. 516.
2. Data from Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
Polling Auto-read Sub-command (Hexadecimal/8) (Sequence
No.517)
This sequence is used when the maximum number of Heads to be read from the Carrier is 8. Up to 10 bytes of data
can be read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No.507 (Read (Hexadecimal/8)). However, the leading
address No. and number of read bytes are not used and will be the value specified for sequence #514.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of sequence No.507 (Read (Hexadecimal/8)).
Note 1. Execute sequence No.514 before executing sequence No.517.
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Write (ASCII/1) (Sequence No.518)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
+5
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
~
~
Max
Write data
+128
386
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006 to 0129
+1
+2
Relevant Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
00 to 15 (CA2A)
R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+3
+4
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
Number of write bytes
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0248
+5to
+128
Write data (ASCII)
Input in ASCII
Up to 248 bytes (max.) can be set
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
Write (ASCII/2) (Sequence No. 519)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Up to 118 bytes of data can be
read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 1
~
~
~
+64
+65
+66
+67
+68
+69
+70
Write data
(Not used)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
CH 2
Number of write bytes
Write data
~
+128
Write data
387
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0007 to 0129
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0002
+(64(N–1)+2)
+(64(N–1)+3)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(64(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(64(N–1)+5)
Number of write bytes
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0118
+(64(N–1)+6) to Write data (ASCII)
Input in ASCII.
(64(N–1)+64)
Up to 118 bytes (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
388
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Write (ASCII/4) (Sequence No. 520)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Up to 48 bytes of data can be
read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 1
~
~
Write data
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 2
~
+57
~
~
Write data
~
+86
+87
+88
+89
+90
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 4
~
+113
~
Write data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0007 to 0114
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
+(28(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(28(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(28(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(28(N–1)+5)
Number of write bytes
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0048
+(28(N–1)+6)
Write data (ASCII)
Input in ASCII.
to (28(N–1)+29)
Up to 48 bytes (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Write designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
389
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Write (ASCII/8) (Sequence No. 521)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Up to 20 bytes of data can be
read for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 1
~
~
Write data
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 2
~
+29
~
~
Write data
~
+100
+101
+102
+103
+104
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write bytes
Write data
CH 8
~
+113
~
Write data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data
words(4 digits BCD)
0007 to 0114
0001 to 0008
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
+(14(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(14(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(14(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(14(N–1)+5)
Number of write bytes
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0020
+(14(N–1)+6)
to (14(N–1)+15)
Write data (ASCII)
Input in ASCII
Up to 20 bytes (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note Write data designated for ASCII is sent beginning with the smallest offset from the send data words.
390
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Write (Hexadecimal/1) (Sequence No. 522)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
Number of send data words
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
~
~
(Undefined)
Write data
Max +35
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0006 to 0036
Relevant Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
00 to 15 (CA2A)
R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+3
+4
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
Number of write digits
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0122
+5 to
35
Write data (Hexadecimal)
Input in hexadecimal
Up to 122 digits (max.)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Data of which Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the
send data words.
2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
391
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Write (Hexadecimal/2) (Sequence No. 523)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Up to 56 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 1
~
~
~
Write data
(Not used)
+19
+20
~
+65
+66
+67
+68
+69
+70
(Not used)
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 2
~
+83
~
Write data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0007 to 0084
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0002
+(64(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(64(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(64(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(64(N–1)+5)
Number of write digits
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0056
+(64(N–1)+6)
to (64(N–1)+19)
Write data (Hexadecimal)
Input in hexadecimal
Up to 56 digits (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data
words.
2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
392
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Write (Hexadecimal/4) (Sequence No. 524)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Up to 24 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 1
~
~
~
Write data
Not used
+11
+12
~
+29
+30
+31
+32
+33
+34
Not used
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 2
~
~
~
Write data
+39
~
+86
+87
+88
+89
+90
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 4
~
+95
~
Write data
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
Number of send data words 0007 to 0096
(4 digits BCD)
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
+(28(N–1)+2)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
+(28(N–1)+3)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(28(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(28(N–1)+5)
Number of write digits
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0024
+(28(N–1)+6)
to (28(N–1)+11)
Write data (Hexadecimal)
Input in hexadecimal code
Up to 24 digits (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
393
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data
words.
2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
Write (Hexadecimal/8) (Sequence No. 525)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Up to 10 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
Number of send data words
Number of Heads
First word of send
data
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 1
~
~
~
(Undefined)
Write data
+8
Not used
+9
~
+15
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
Not used
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 2
~
~
~
+22
(Undefined)
Write data
Unit No.
~
+100
+101
+102
+103
+104
(Undefined)
(Undefined)
Head CH No.
Leading address No.
Number of write digits
Write data
CH 8
~
+106
~
(Undefined)
Write data
394
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words 0007 to 0107
(4 digits BCD)
+1
Number of Heads
(4 digits BCD)
0001 to 0004
+(14(N–1)+2)
+(14(N–1)+3)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the model)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
0000 to FFFF
+(14(N–1)+4)
Leading address No.
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
+(14(N–1)+5)
Number of write digits
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0010
+(14(N–1)+6)
to (14(N–1)+8)
Write data (Hexadecimal)
Input in hexadecimal code
Up to 10 digits (max.) can be set
N: Number of Heads
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data
words.
2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
Auto-write (ASCII/1) (Sequence No. 526)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 518 (Write(ASCII/1)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 518 (Write(ASCII/1)).
Note For auto-write (AW), a response is not returned if the number of Heads is not written by the Carrier, the Abort
Bit must be turned OFF to terminate the sequence.
Auto-write (Hexadecimal/1) (Sequence No. 527)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 1.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 522 (Write (Hexadecimal/1)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 522 (Write (Hexadecimal/1)).
Note For auto-write (AW), a response is not returned if the number of Heads is not written by the Carrier, the Abort
Bit must be turned OFF to terminate the sequence.
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/2) (Sequence No. 528)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 519 (Write (ASCII/2)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 519 (Write (ASCII/2)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-write.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
395
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/2) (Sequence No. 529)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Up to 118 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 519 (Write (ASCII/2)). However, the leading ad-
dress No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 528 before executing Sequence No. 529.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/4) (Sequence No. 530)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 520 (Write (ASCII/4)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 520 (Write(ASCII/4)).
Note Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling auto-
write.
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/4) (Sequence No. 531)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4. Up to 48 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 520 (Write (ASCII/4)). However, the leading ad-
dress No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 530 before executing Sequence No. 531.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/8) (Sequence No. 532)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 521 (Write (ASCII/8)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 521 (Write (ASCII/8)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-write.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/8) (Sequence No. 533)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Up to 20 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 521 (Write (ASCII/8)). However, the leading ad-
dress No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
396
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 532 before executing Sequence No. 533.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/2) (Sequence No. 534)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 523 (Write (Hexadecimal/2)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 523 (Write (Hexadecimal/2)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-write.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/2) (Sequence
No. 535)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Up to 56 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 523 (Write (Hexadecimal/2)). However, the lead-
ing address No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 534 before executing Sequence No. 535.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/4) (Sequence No. 536)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 4.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 524 (Write (Hexadecimal/4)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 524 (Write (Hexadecimal/4)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-write.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/4) (Sequence
No. 537)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 2. Up to 24 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 524 (Write (Hexadecimal/4)). However, the lead-
ing address No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
397
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 536 before executing Sequence No. 537.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/8) (Sequence No. 538)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 525 (Write (Hexadecimal/8)).
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 525 (Write (Hexadecimal/8)).
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 545 (Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel) to cancel the polling
auto-write.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/8) (Sequence
No. 539)
This sequence is used when the number of Heads to be written to the Carrier is 8. Up to 10 digits of data can be
written for each Read/Write Head.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 525 (Write (Hexadecimal/8)). However, the lead-
ing address No., number of write, and write data are not used and become undefined.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
None.
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 538 before executing Sequence No. 539.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
Data Check (Sequence No. 540)
This sequence writes and verifies the CRC code for check blocks designated by the user.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
Unit No.
+1
Head CH No.
(Undefined)
+2
+3
+4
+5
Processing designation
(Undefined)
Leading address of check object
Number of check block
(Undefined)
bytes
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words 0006 (fixed)
(4 digits BCD)
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
00 to 15 (CA2A)
R/W Head CH No.
(1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
+3
+4
Processing designation
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
Verification: 43 (C)
Calculation: 4B (K)
Management of number of write times: 4C (L)
Leading address of check
object
(4 digits Hexadecimal)
0000 to FFFF
(If management of number of write times is
designated, H’
H’ jD)
j
j
j
0
t
o
H
’
j
j
j
5
o
r
H
’
j
j
j
8
t
o
j
j
+5
Number of check block
bytes (2 digits
Hexadecimal)
If verification, calculation is designated:
03 to FF (set 00 for 256 bytes)
If management of number of write times is
designated: 00 to FF
398
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined)
Completion code
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Completion code
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
(Verification, calculation designation)
00: Normal completion for calculation processing
75: Data in normal condition for verification
processing
76: Error Data alarm for verification processing
(If management of number of write times is
designated)
75:Number of write times is under those which is
specified.
76:alarm for number of write times is over those
which is specified.
Note If L (management of number of write times) is designated by processing designation, management of num-
ber of write times for Data Carrier of EEPROM is performed.
Control (Sequence No. 541)
This sequence performs I/O operations or I/O reads.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
(Undefined)
+1
Unit No.
OUT1 operation OUT2 operation
(Undefined)
+2
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 (fixed)
+1
+2
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
OUT1 operation (1 digit BCD)
0: No operation
1: turned ON
2: turned OFF
OUT2 operation (1 digit BCD)
0: No operation
1: turned ON
2: turned OFF
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Output status after
Current input status
operation
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Current input status
Leftmost 4 bits:
Rightmost 4 bits:
1: ON status
0: OFF status
Leftmost 1
byte
IN1 operation
IN2 operation
Output status after operation
1: ON status
0: OFF status
Leftmost 4 bits:
OUT1 operation
Rightmost 4 bits: OUT2 operation
Note 1. The V600/620-CAjA does not support this command.
2. This sequence executes the equivalent of the CONTROL command.
399
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Error Information Read (Sequence No. 542)
This sequence reads information from the latest error log.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
+1
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
00 to 07 (CD1D)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Error log
~
~
+75
Error log
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 to 0076
+1 to +75
Error log (ASCII)
One item of data is stored with 5
characters of generated command,
generated Head No., generated
error code.
Note 1. The V600/620-CAjA does not support this command.
2. Up to 30 error records can be stored.
3. The most resent error records are stored first.
Command Processing Cancel (Sequence No. 543)
This sequence cancels command processing except for polling command processing. The command waiting sta-
tus is entered.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
+1
(Undefined)
Unit No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the
model)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined) Unit No.
400
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Completion code
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
00: Normal termination
14: Auto or communications command processing
not executed
75: Cancelled before the end of expansion
command receive or before sync input went
active or before detection of the existence of
Data Carrier
76: Cancelled during read/write processing for Data
Carrier
Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel
(Sequence No. 544)
This sequence cancels polling auto-read processing.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of send +0
Number of send data words
data
+1
(Undefined)
(Not used)
Unit No.
+2
+3
(Undefined)
Head channel No.
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0004 (fixed)
+1
Unit No. (2 digits BCD)
Arbitrary (However, there is a limit for the
maximum Unit No. depending on the
model)
+2
+3
Not used
R/W Head CH No. (1 digit BCD)
R/W Head CH 1 designation: 1
R/W Head CH 2 designation: 2
The CD1D must be set to 1.
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
(Undefined) Completion code
Offset Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data
words (4 digits BCD)
0002 (fixed)
+1
Completion code
(2 digits Hexadecimal)
75: Cancelled before communications processing
with Data Carrier
76: Cancelled after communications processing with
Data Carrier
Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel (Sequence
No. 545)
This sequence cancels polling auto-write processing
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
The send data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing
Cancel)
Receive Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
The receive data word allocation is similar to that of Sequence No. 544 (Polling Auto-read Command Processing
Cancel)
401
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
Appendix M
General-purpose Command (Sequence No. 546)
This sequence transmits arbitrary data and stores receive data to the receive data words. The characters “@”,
FCS (terminator) are not required in the send data words and receive data words. These characters will be auto-
matically added for transmission and automatically removed before saving data.
Send Data Word Allocation (2nd Operand of PMCR)
First word of
send data
+0
+1
+2
Number of send data words
Send data byte length
Send data
~
+127
~
Send data
(Undefined)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of send data words
(4 digits BCD)
0003 to 0128
0001 to 0251
+1
Send data byte length
(4 digits BCD)
The number of bytes in the send data
except for @, the FCS, and the terminator.
+2 to
+127
Send data (ASCII)
Input send data up to 251 characters
(max.) in ASCII
Receive Data Storage Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR)
Receive data
storage words
+0
+1
Number of receive data words
Receive data
~
+126
~
Receive data
(Undefined)
Offset
Contents (data format)
Data
+0
Number of receive data words
(4 digits BCD)
0002 to 0127
+1 to
+126
Receive data
(ASCII)
Receive data is stored in ASCII.
Up to 251 characters (max.)
402
Appendix N
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
The Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely a Hayes modem
connected to the Serial Communications Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below.
Ladder interface
Sequence
No.
Communications
sequence name
Function
Send word
Receive word
allocation
allocation
550
Initialize modem
(general-purpose)
Initializes the modem connected to the
Serial Communications Board. The
initialization command is set in the words
specified for the second operand of
PMCR.
Yes
No
560
570
580
Initialize modem
(specialized)
Initializes certain OMRON Modems.
No
No
No
561
571
581
Dial
Dials from the modem connected to the
Serial Communications Board. AT
commands and telephone numbers are set
set in the words specified for the second
operand of PMCR. This sequence can be
used only for certain OMRON modems.
Yes
552
553
Password
After the line is connected, the password
sent from the other exchange is verified to
confirm that the line is connected to the
desired exchange. The normal value of a
password is set in the words specified for
the second operand of PMCR.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Data send/receive
(general purpose
sequence)
Sends arbitrary data to the exchange
which the line is connected. Send data is
set in the words specified for the second
operand of PMCR. Receive data is stored
in the words specified for the third operand
of PMCR.
554
555
Escape
Shifts the modem to escape mode (the
condition in which command input is
available during data communications).
The escape code is fixed to “+++”
Hang up
After shifting to escape mode, the line is
disconnected.
No
No
No
562
572
582
Executes continuously from initialization to
dialling operations for certain OMRON
Modems.
Yes*
Initialize and dial
590
Escape to hang up
Executes continuously from shifting to the
escape mode to hanging up.
No
No
Note 1. Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 2nd and 3rd operands of PMCR.
NO:
Send word allocation:
Receive word allocation:
Set a dummy word address for the 3rd operand (D).
Set the constant 0000 for the 2rd operand (S).
2. For details about dialling, refer to sequences 561, 571 and 581.
403
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
Connections
The connections when using the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below.
RS-232C Connection
Telephone line
Modem
Modem
Modem: D-sub
25 pin (female)
CQM1H D-sub 9 pin
(female)
Compatible Modems
Although most of the sequences in this protocol can be used regardless of modem, the sequences Initialize Mo-
dem (specialized) and Dial sequences can be used only for the following Modems:
• MD24FB10V (OMRON Modem)
• MD144FB5V (OMRON Intelligent Modem)
• ME1414VB2/B2 (OMRON FAX/DATA Modem)
For other modems, create a modem initialization sequence using the general-purpose Initialize Modem sequence
and dial using the Data Send/Receive sequence (Sequence No. 553).
404
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
Modem Settings
When this protocol is used, it is required that the modem connected to the Serial Communications Board be initial-
ized to the following conditions:
Command echo
No
Result code display format
Numeric format
Speed display, busy/dialling tone detection at
connection
Baud rate display enabled, busy and dialling tone
detection enabled.
Error correction data compression display
MNP setting
Error correction/data compression display enabled
Error correction provided (auto-reliable mode)
MNP class setting
MNP class 4
Not enabled
Not enabled
Always ON
+
V.42 compression, Error correction
Flow control between terminal modems
ER signal control
Escape code
Note 1. It is recommended that, in addition to the above settings, the abort timer should be set so that commu-
nications are cut off if a communications error happened due to incidents such as cable disconnection
between the Serial Communications Board and modem. Set the abort timer to 10 minutes for the mo-
dem initialization (specialized) (Sequence No. 560, 570, 580). Refer to modem’s manual for further in-
formation about abort timers.
2. The data format of the modem (baud rate, data length, parity, stop bit) is set by AT commands issued
from a device connected to the modem. Its settings should conform to communications conditions of the
device which issues AT commands. Therefore when communications are made between the modem
and Serial Communications Board, it is required that communications conditions should be set by issu-
ing AT commands from the Serial Communications Board.
3. Modem settings become invalid if the power supply is turned off and must be set again. However, a
memory backup function can be used to protect settings so that even after the power supply to the mo-
dem is turned off, it can communicate with the previous setting conditions.
For Initialize Modem (specialized), the modem initialization command is built in as message data. However, for
Initialize Modem (general-purpose), the command must be specified in PMCR.
Operand 1
Operand 2
Operand 3
#x550 (x: Communications port)
First address for storing initialization command character string C
None
C+0
C+1
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of data
Number of bytes for send data (initialization command)
4 digits BCD
4 digits BCD
ASCII
C+2
:
Send data (initialization command)
(Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
C+n
Setting Example for Modem Initialization Command
• MD24FB10V Using Sequence #550 (OMRON)
The following command is set in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR.
ATE0V0X4\V2\N3%C0*C0\X1&M0S26=10
0018
0032
0 * C 0
1 & M 0
6 = 1 0
S 2
A T E 0 V 0 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 %C
\ X
Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
Note Turn ON pin 4 of DIP switches SW3 on for this Modem (ER signal always ON).
405
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
MD144FB5V (OMRON)
The following command is set in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR.
ATE0V0X4\V2\N3%C0*C0\Q0&M0&D0%B9600S26=10
0023
0041
0 * C 0
0 & M 0
0 % B 9
& D
6 0 0 S
A T E 0 V 0 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 %C
\ Q
= 1 0
2 6
Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
ME1414VBII/ME1414BII (OMRON)
The following command is set in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR.
AT\J1B8E0V0S0=1X4\V2\N3&M0%C0&D0&E0\X1S26=10
0024
0044
4 \ V 2
3 & M 0
0 & D 0
%C
& E 0 \
A T \ J 1 B 8 E 0 V 0 S 0 = 1 X
\ N
S 2 6 =
X 1 1 0
Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
Note Turn ON DIP switch SW3 on in the rear of the Modem.
Dialling
To dial telephone numbers for the OMRON Modems using sequences No. 561, 571, 581, set the dialling command
and telephone number in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR. However, for other Modems, make
the following settings for the Data Send/Receive sequence.
This is an example of telephone number settings for the above mentioned 3 OMRON Modems.
Operand and Word Settings of PMCR
Operand 1
MD24FB10V
MD144FB5V
#x561 (x: Communications port)
#x571
ME1414VB2/B2 #x581
Operand 2
Operand 3
First address C of send data (dialling operation)
None
C+0
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of
data
4 digits BCD
C+1
Number of bytes of send data (dialling operation)
4 digits BCD
ASCII
C+2
:
Send data (dialling operation)
(Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
C+n
406
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
Setting Example
If telephone number is 03-0123-4567
0010
0016
4154
A T
4454
D T
3033
0 3
2D30
3132
1 2
332D
3435
4 5
3637
6 7
– 0
3 –
Character string length of dialling operation sent to modem (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
Note 1. This example uses a tone line. Change ATDT to ATDP for pulse lines.
2. Fill the telephone number to the left in the words if the character string length of the dialling operation is
an odd number of bytes.
0008
0011
4154
A T
4454
D T
3031
0 1
2D32
3334
3 4
3500
– 2
5
j
Character string length of dialling operation sent to modem (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
Password Verification
A password can be verified by executing sequence No. 552 of this protocol. It is required to set in advance the
value of the password in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR.
Operand and Word Settings of PMCR
Operand 1
Operand 2
Operand 3
#x550 (x: Communications port)
First address of the words where the password is set
None
C+0
C+1
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of
data
4 digits BCD
4 digits BCD
ASCII
Number of bytes of comparison data (normal value of
password)
C+2
:
Comparison value (password normal value)
(Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
C+n
Setting Example
When password is OMRON-CO.
0006
0008
4F4D
O M
524F
R O
4E2D
434F
C O
N –
Character string length of password sent to modem (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
407
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
Password Verification Operation
The number of retries is 3 for password verification.
PC
Personal computer
(remote exchange)
Password verification
(starting #552)
Dispatching
character string
“Password: ”
Receiving character
string
(Retry up to 3 times)
Issuing password
Password
Receiving
password
Verifying
password
When Instruction
Execution Flag
(SR 28908 or
SR 28913) turns
ON.
Verification
result
Terminating
process
Data Send/Receive
Data Send/Receive can be executed using sequence No. 553. The send data sent to another exchange is set in
the words specified by the second operand of PMCR. Data received by the PC is stored in the words specified by
the third operand of PMCR.
Operand and Word Settings of PMCR
Operand 1
Operand 2
Operand 3
#x553 (x: Communications port)
First address C1 of the words where send data is set
First address C2 of the words where receive data is stored
• Operand 2
C1+0
Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of
data
4 digits BCD
C1+1
Number of bytes of send data
4 digits BCD
ASCII
C1+2
:
Send data (dialling operation)
(Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
C1+n
• Operand 3
C2+0
Number of bytes of receive data
4 digits BCD
ASCII
C2+1
:
Receive data (dialling operation)
(Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
C2+n
408
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
Appendix N
Setting Example
When send data is THIS IS SAMPLE.
0009
0014
5448
T H
4953
I S
2049
I
5320
S
5341
S A
4D50
M P
4C45
L E
Character string length of send data sent to modem (bytes)
Code length of PMCR when it is used (words)
A maximum of 200 bytes (including the CR) can be received. When the received data is RETURN OK, the content
stored in the receive words is as follows:
0006
5245
R E
5455
T U
524E
R N
204F
O
4B00
K
Length of received character string (words)
Note An error will occur is the reception data is not received within 90 seconds after the data is sent.
Escape Mode
Shifting to the escape mode can be made using sequence No. 554. No setting is necessary for this sequence.
Note The character string to shift the online mode to the escape mode (i.e., the escape code) is ‘+’ for modem
settings.
Hang Up Command
The hang up command (to disconnect the line) can be executed using sequence No. 555. No setting is necessary
for this sequence.
Communication Errors
Three result codes are monitored after an AT command is sent to the modem. When a result code is returned, it will
be checked. If the code is not the normal result code (“OK”, “CONNECT 9600/REL4”, “CONNECT 2400/REL4”, in
words), after a fixed time of waiting to send, the following retry processing will be repeated 2 times to send the AT
command again and waiting for another result code.
The receive monitoring time and send wait time for each sequence are shown below.
Sequence
No.
Sequence name
Receive monitoring time Send wait time for retries
#550
#560
#570
#580
#561
#571
#581
#552
#553
#554
#555
#562
Initialize modem (general-purpose)
Initialize modem (specialized)
10 s
10 s
1 s
1 s
Dial
90 s
90 s
Password
None
3 s
Data send/receive (general-purpose) 90 s
None
Escape
10 s
10 s
90s
1.5 s (after first try)
1.5 s (after first try)
Hang up
Initialize and dial
Initializing: 1 s
Dialling: 90 s
#572
#582
#590
Escape and hang up
10 s
1.5 s (after first try)
409
Index
components, names and functions, 10
Numbers
CompoWay/F, protocols, 63
1:1 Data Link, 3, 4, 6, 107
functions, 108
ports, connections, 110
specifications, 109
starting, 108
CompoWay/F Master
command and response formats, 138
communications specifications, 138
connections, 151
message frames, 143
protocols, 142
sequences, 137, 142
transmission procedure, 138
1:1 NT Link, 3, 4, 7
1:N NT Link, 3, 4, 7
errors, 129
connectors, 12, 13, 17, 26
See also installation
connector hoods, 25
cover dimensions, 15
wiring, 23
2-wire and 4-wire connections, transmission circuits, 19
2-wire or 4-wire switch, 13
3Z4L Laser Micrometer, 63
connections, 319
protocols, sequences, 317–347
CPU Units, supporting CPU Units, 8
CS1-series CPU Units, changes in communications specifica-
tions, 54, 55
CS1-series Serial Communications Unit/Board, changes in
communications specifications, 54, 55
A–B
applications, precautions, xiii
B500-AL001-E Link Adapter, 22
bar code reader, connections, 101
Bar Code Readers, 5
current consumption, 8
CV-series CPU Units, changes in communications specifica-
tions, 54, 55
CV-series Host Link Units, changes in communications specifi-
cations, 54, 55
baud rate
no-protocol communications, 100
protocol macros, 59
CVM1 CPU Units, changes in communications specifications,
54, 55
CVM1 Host Link Units, changes in communications specifica-
tions, 54, 55
CX-Protocol, 5, 37, 66, 100, 109, 116
C
C-mode commands, 5
D–E
dimensions, 8
C-series CPU Units, changes in communications specifications,
54
C-series Host Link Units, changes in communications specifi-
cations, 53, 55
Serial Communications Boards, 15
E5j J Temperature Controller, 63
connections, 230
C200H Communications Boards, 55
protocols, sequences, 229–242
C200HX/HG/HE Communications Board, changes in commu-
nications specifications, 55
E5j K Digital Controller, 63
connections
read, 154
write, 154
cables, 12, 13
See also installation
preparation, 23
read protocols, sequences, 153–170, 171–185
cleaning, 130
E5ZE Temperature Controller, 63
connections
communications distance
Host Link, 36
read, 188
protocol macros, 59
write, 188
read protocols, sequences, 187–208
write protocols, sequences, 209–227
communications ports. See ports
communications sequences, 85
See also PMCR(––) instructions, protocol macros, standard
system protocols; sequences
EC Directives, xv
EMI measures, xv
comparison, previous products, 55
error check codes, Host Link, 36
411
Index
errors
1:N NT Link, 129
error codes, 30, 81, 85, 105
error flags, 30
flags, 121
Host Link, 121
installation
1:1 Data Link, connections, 110
cables, Host Link, 44
Host Link
connections, 39
preparing cables, 44
mounting location, 4
end codes, 52
no-protocol communications, connections, 101
NT Links, connections, 117
protocol macros, connections, 70
Serial Communications Boards, 14
indicators, 120
protocol macros, 125
troubleshooting, 121
ES100 Digital Controller, 63
connections, 244
protocols, sequences, 243–282
instructions
PMCR(––), 85, 89
RXD(––), 102, 104
TXD(––), 34, 102, 104
Executed Reception Case No. (code), 82
external dimensions, connector cover, 15
Intelligent Signal Processors, 5
K–M
F
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor, 63
connections, 285
F200/F300/F350 Visual Inspection Unit, 63
protocols, sequences, 283–303
ferrite cores, xvi
Link Adapters, 19, 22, 40, 72
link words, settings, 29
flags, 30
errors, 121
maintenance, 119
cleaning, 130
inspection, 131
Frame Check Sequence. See frames, FCS
frames
dividing, precautions, 45
FCS, 46
memory, allocations, 27
messages, no-protocol communications, 99
modems, 5
compatibility, 404
settings, 405
H
mounting height, 15
Hayes Modem AT Command, 63
compatible modems, 404
connections, 404
N
no-protocol communications, 3, 4, 6, 97
overview, 98
protocols, sequences, 403–409
ports, connections, 101
specifications, 98
heat-shrinking tubes, 25
Host Link, 3, 4, 5, 33
commands, 5, 51
noise reduction, 18
NT Link commands, 7
communications, procedures, 45
end codes, 52
errors, 121
NT Links, 113
1:1, 114
host-initiated communications, 34
PC-initiated communications, 34
ports, connections, 39
specifications, 36
1:N, 114
commands, 114
overview, 114
ports, connections, 117
transmission delay, 50
unit number setting, 29
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter, DIP switch settings, 19
Host Link Units, changes in communications specifications, 55
O
operating environment, precautions, xiii
operation
basic procedure, 8
procedure
I
indicators
CPU Unit, 11
error displays, 120
Serial Communications Boards, 10
1:1 Data Link, 109
Host Link, 36
no-protocol communications, 100
NT Links, 116
inspection, 131
protocol macros, 66
412
Index
protocols, 4, 136
See also standard system protocols
3Z4L Laser Micrometer, sequences, 317–347
CompoWay/F, sequences, 137
creating, 64
E5j J Temperature Controller, sequences, 229–242
E5j K Digital Controller read, sequences, 153–170,
171–185
E5ZE Temperature Controller read, sequences, 187–208
E5ZE Temperature Controller write, sequences, 209–227
ES100 Digital Controller, sequences, 243–282
Hayes Modem AT Command, sequences, 403–409
Host Link, 45
P
parameters
sequence, 77
step, 78
PC Setup, 8, 28
link words, 1:1 Data Link, 108
standard settings
1:1 Data Link, 109
Host Link, 37
no-protocol communications, 100
NT Links, 116
protocol macros, 67
K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor, sequences, 283–303
Protocol Support Software, list, 136
structure, 76
PC-initiated communications, 34
PMCR(––) instruction, 85, 143
operand settings, 89
specifications, 85
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader, sequences, 305–316
V600/V620 ID Controller, sequences, 367–402
Visual Inspection System, sequences, 349–366
ports, 8
See also RS-232C ports; RS-422A/485 ports
settings, 29
R
power supply, 8
reception case number, 31, 82
reception counter, 31, 98
reception matrixes, 77
repeat counter, 31
precautions, xi
applications, xiii
Board replacement, 132
Forced Abort Bit, 95
general, xii
installing Serial Communications Boards, 16
noise reduction, 18
NT Links, 114
operating environment, xiii
replacement, 132
RS-232C
communications, one-to-one link, 108
connecting Units, 108
RS-232C connections, 151
safety, xii
wiring, 18
RS-232C ports
1:1 connections, 71
1:N connections, 73
changes from previous products, 53
connector pin layout, 11, 12
host computer connections, 40
specifications, 11
previous products, comparison, 55
program examples
1:1 Data Link, 111
Host Link, 48
no-protocol communications, 105
NT Links, 114
wiring, 20
protocol macros, 87, 88
RS-422 connections, 152
protocol macros, 3, 4, 5, 57
applications, 85
RS-422A/485 ports
1:1 connections, 74
errors, 125
flags and control bits, 80
functions, 58
ladder programs, 87
ports, connections, 70
specifications, 59
standard system protocols, 63
transmission methods, 91
1:N connections, 75
changes from previous products, 55
host computer connections, 42
specifications, 12
wiring, 21
RS-485 connections, 152
RXD(––) instruction, 102, 104
413
Index
sequences, E5j J Temperature Controller
S
General-purpose Read, 241
General-purpose Write, 241
Read Heater Current, 240
Read Initial Status, 240
Read Input Shift Value, 238
Read Output Value, 239
Read Parameters 1, 236
Read Parameters 2, 237
Read Process Value, 239
Read Set Point Limit, 239
Save Set Point, 233
Select Backup Mode, 232
Select Local Mode, 232
Select RAM Write Mode, 232
Select Remote Mode, 232
Write Input Shift Value, 235
Write Parameters 1, 233
Write Parameters 2, 234
safety precautions. See precautions
sequence parameters, 77
sequences, CompoWay/F Master
Broadcast with ASCII Conversion, No Response, 146
Broadcast with No Conversion and No Response, 148
General-purpose Broadcast with No Conversion and No Re-
sponse, 150
General-purpose Send with No Conversion and with Re-
sponse, 149
Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response, 143
Send with No Conversion and with Response, 147
sequences, 3Z4L Laser Micrometer
3Z4L Clear, 323
3Z4L Initialize (3000-series), 339
3Z4L Initialize (4000-series), 345
All Statistic Memory Clear (3000-series), 333
Automatic Detection List Request (3000-series), 338
Automatic Detection Release (3000-series), 338
Automatic Detection Set (3000-series), 338
AVG Move (H) Times Set (3000-series), 337
AVG Move (L) Times Set (3000-series), 337
AVG Move Interval Set (3000-series), 337
Calibration Release, 324
sequences, E5j K Digital Controller
Execute/Cancel AT, 184
General-purpose Read, 170
General-purpose Write, 182
Read Alarm Hysteresis, 162
Read Alarm Value, 156
Read Control Period, 159
Read Cooling Coefficient, 157
Read Dead Band, 158
Calibration Set, 324
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (3000-series), 332
Continuous Measurement Start (Interrupt) (4000-series), 344
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (3000-series), 331
Continuous Measurement Start (Scan) (4000-series), 344
Continuous Measurement Termination (4000-series), 345
Data Request (3000-series), 332
Data Request (4000-series), 345
Deflection Measurement Start (4000-series), 344
E Unit Set, 323
Forced Negative Zero (4000-series), 345
Forced Positive Zero (4000-series), 345
Forced Zero Release (4000-series), 345
General-purpose Command 1 (4000-series), 346
General-purpose Command 2 (4000-series), 347
Measurement Condition List Request (3000-series), 328
Measurement Condition List Request (4000-series), 342
Measurement Condition Release (3000-series), 328
Measurement Condition Release (4000-series), 342
Measurement Condition Set (3000-series), 325
Measurement Condition Set (4000-series), 340
Measurement Termination (3000-series), 332
Memory Switch Set, 323
Memory Switch Set 1 (3000-series), 335
Memory Switch Set 2 (3000-series), 336
mm Unit Set, 323
Program Number Set (3000-series), 325
Settings, 320
Simple AVG Times Set (3000-series), 336
Single Run Measurement Start (3000-series), 331
Single Run Measurement Start (4000-series), 343
Statistic Processing Calculation Non-execution (3000-se-
ries), 333
Statistic Processing Execution (3000-series), 332
Statistic Processing Memory Clear (3000-series), 333
Statistic Result Request (3000-series), 333
Zero Run Measurement Start (3000-series), 331
Read Hysteresis, 159
Read Input Digital Filter, 162
Read Input Shift Limits, 162
Read LBA Detection Time, 160
Read Level 0 Parameters, 163
Read Level 1 Parameters 1, 164
Read Level 1 Parameters 2, 165
Read Level 2 Parameters 1, 167
Read Level 2 Parameters 2, 168
Read Manual Reset Value, 158
Read MV, 156
Read MV at Stop Time and at PV Error, 161
Read MV Limits, 161
Read Process Value, 155
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative
Time, 157
Read Set Point, 156
Read Set Point during SP Ramp, 155
Read SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value, 159
Remote/Local, 183
Run/Stop, 183
Software Reset, 185
Switch to Level 0 (Software Reset), 182
Switch to Level 1, 185
Write Alarm Hysteresis, 176
Write Alarm Value, 172
Write Control Period, 174
Write Cooling Coefficient, 173
Write Dead Band, 173
Write Hysteresis, 173
Write Input Digital Filter, 176
Write Input Shift Value, 176
Write LBA Detection Time, 175
Write Level 0 Parameters, 177
Write Level 1 Parameter 2, 179
Write Level 1 Parameters 1, 178
414
Index
Write Level 2 Parameters 1, 180
Write Level 2 Parameters 2, 181
Write Manual Reset Value, 173
Write MV at Stop Time and at PV Error, 175
Write MV Limits, 175
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative
Time, 172
Write Set Point, 172
Write Setting Unit, 218
sequences, ES100j Digital Controller
Auto Mode, 276
Cancel A.T., 278
Change Bank No., 279
Change Pattern No., 279
Execute A.T., 277
External Setting Mode, 274
General-purpose Command, 281
Local Setting Mode, 274
Manual Mode, 277
Read Adjustment Parameters, 256
Read Control Monitor Data, 254
Read Controller Status, 280
Read Error Detection Data, 248
Read Event Data, 246
Read Heater Burnout Data, 250
Read Local SP, 267
Read MV Data, 253
Read PID Control Parameters 1, 260
Read PID Control Parameters 2, 262
Read Program Parameters, 270
Read PV Data, 251
Write SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value, 174
sequences, E5ZE Temperature Controller
Cancel Autotuning, 218
Initialize Settings, 223
Read Alarm Mode, 197
Read Alarm Temperatures, 198
Read Control Period, 196
Read Cooling Coefficient, 208
Read Dead Band/Overlap Band, 207
Read Error Status, 200
Read HB Alarm and HS Alarm Valid Channels, 205
Read Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Currents,
205
Read Heater Current and SSR Leakage Current, 206
Read Hysteresis, 199
Read Input Shift Value, 201
Read Manual Reset Value, 201
Read Operation Status, 199
Read Output Mode, 197
Read Output Value Change Rate Limit, 204
Read Output Value Limit, 203
Read Output Values, 193
Read Present Set Point, 203
Read Process Value, 192
Read Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative
Time, 195
Read Ramp Value, 202
Read SP Data, 252
Read Time Signal, 247
Remote Setting Mode, 273
Reset (Stop), 276
Run Command, 275
Write Adjustment Parameters, 259
Write Local SP, 269
Write PID Control Parameters 1, 264
Write PID Control Parameters 2, 266
Write Program Parameters, 272
sequences, Hayes Modem AT Command
Data Send/Receive (General-purpose), 408
Dial, 406
Escape, 409
Escape to Hang Up, 403
Hang Up, 409
Read Set Point, 191
Read Set Point, Process Value, and Output Value, 194
Read Setting Unit, 200
Save Settings, 223
Start Autotuning, 217
Start Control, 226
Start Manual Operation, 227
Stop Operation or Control, 226
Write Alarm Mode, 214
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 0.1), 216
Write Alarm Temperature (Setting Unit 1), 215
Write Control Period, 213
Initialize and Dial, 403
Initialize Modem (Specialized), 405
Password, 407
Set Modem (General-purpose), 405
Write Cooling Coefficient, 225
Write Dead Band/Overlap Band, 225
Write HB and HS Alarm Valid Channels, 224
Write Heater Burnout and SSR Failure Detection Current,
224
Write Hysteresis, 217
Write Input Shift Value, 218
Write Manual Output Value, 220
Write Manual Reset Value, 219
Write Output Mode, 214
Write Output Value Change Rate Limit, 222
Write Output Value Limit, 221
Write Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative
Time, 212
Write Ramp Value, 220
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1), 211
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1), 210
415
Index
sequences, K3Tj Intelligent Signal Processor
General-purpose Command, 303
Model Data Read (by Unit Number), 301
sequences, V600/V620 ID Controller
Auto-read (ASCII/1), 382
Auto-read (Hexadecimal/1), 383
Auto-write (ASCII/1), 395
Auto-write (Hexadecimal/1), 395
Command Processing Cancel, 400
Control, 399
Model Data Read (Continuous Units), 302
Read Display Value (PV) (by Unit Number), 299
Read Display Value (PV) (Continuous Units), 301
Read Holding Data, 297
Read Holding Data BH (Continuous Units), 299
Read Holding Data PH (Continuous Units), 298
Read Set Value (by Unit Number), 293
Data Check, 398
Error Information Read, 400
Read Set Value H (Continuous Units), 294
General-purpose Command, 402
Polling Auto-read (ASCII), 383
Polling Auto-read (ASCII/2), 384
Polling Auto-read (ASCII/4), 384
Polling Auto-read (ASCII/4), 384
Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal), 385
Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/2), 385
Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/4), 386
Polling Auto-read (Hexadecimal/8), 386
Polling Auto-read Command Processing Cancel, 401
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/2), 395
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/4), 396
Polling Auto-write (ASCII/8), 396
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/2), 397
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/4), 397
Polling Auto-write (Hexadecimal/8), 398
Polling Auto-write Command Processing Cancel, 401
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/2), 396
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/4), 396
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (ASCII/8), 396
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/2), 397
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/4), 397
Polling Auto-write Subcommand (Hexadecimal/8), 398
Read (ASCII/1), 374
Read Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value HH (Continuous Units), 294
Read Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value L (Continuous Units), 294
Read Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value LL (Continuous Units), 294
Read Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units), 297
Read Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units), 297
Read Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units), 297
Read Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units), 296
Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number), 295
Reset (by Unit Number), 288
Reset Control (Continuous Units), 288
Write Set Value (by Unit Number), 289
Write Set Value H (Continuous Units), 290
Write Set Value H with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value HH (Continuous Units), 289
Write Set Value HH with Bank (Continuous Units), 291
Write Set Value L (Continuous Units), 290
Write Set Value L with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value LL (Continuous Units), 290
Write Set Value LL with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value O1 with Bank (Continuous Units), 293
Write Set Value O2 with Bank (Continuous Units), 293
Write Set Value O3 with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value O4 with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value O5 with Bank (Continuous Units), 292
Write Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number), 290
Read (ASCII/2), 375
Read (ASCII/4), 376
Read (ASCII/8), 377
Read (Hexadecimal/1), 378
Read (Hexadecimal/2), 379
Read (Hexadecimal/4), 380
sequences, V500/V520 Bar Code Reader
BCR Connection Confirmation (V500), 313
BCR Function Read (V500), 311
BCR Function Write (V500), 310
BCR Initialize (V500), 314
BCR Read Start, 309
BCR Read Stop, 309
Complete Data Read, 309
Read (Hexadecimal/8), 381
Write (ASCII/1), 386
Write (ASCII/2), 387
Write (ASCII/4), 389
Write (ASCII/8), 390
Write (Hexadecimal/1), 391
Write (Hexadecimal/2), 392
Write (Hexadecimal/4), 393
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V500), 314
Data Continuous Read (Interrupt) (V520), 315
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V500), 314
Data Continuous Read (Scan) (V520), 314
Data Read, 309
General-purpose Command 1, 315
General-purpose Command 2, 315
Log Data Clear (V500), 314
Write (Hexadecimal/8), 394
Log Data Output Request (V500), 312
Preset Data Set (V500), 313
System Setting, 308
416
Index
sequences, Visual Inspection System
specifications, Serial Communications Boards, 8
Arbitrary Measurement Value Acquisition (F200), 355
Binary Level Modification (F200/300), 364
Camera Change (Decrease by 1) (F200/300), 363
Camera Change (Increase by 1) (F200/300), 364
Camera Designation and Positioning (F350), 362
Character String Inspection and Character Inspection (F350),
363
standard system protocols, 63, 135
communications problems, 79
examples, 78
modifying, 64
step parameters, 78
switches, 13
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F200), 353
Continuous Measurement Execution (Interrupt) (F300), 359
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F200), 352
Continuous Measurement Execution (Scan) (F300), 357
Evaluation Condition Change (F200), 354
General-purpose Command (Send), 365
General-purpose Command (Send/Receive), 365
Illumination Fluctuation Follow Execution (F300), 361
Inspection Execution and Character Inspection (F350), 363
Measurement Execution (F200), 352
synchronization
RS-232C ports, 11
RS-422A/485 ports, 12
SYSMAC WAY. See Host Link
T
Temperature Controllers, 5
Measurement Execution (F300), 356
Measurement Execution and Positioning (F350), 361
Measurement, Inspection Termination, 365
Reference Object Registration (Criterion) (F200), 354
Reference Object Registration (Group) (F200), 354
Reference Object Registration (Reference Position) (F200),
354
terminating resistance switch, 13
trace function, protocol macros, 63
troubleshooting, 119, 121
1:N NT Link errors, 129
Host Link errors, 121
protocol macro errors, 125
Reference Object Registration Command 1 Execution
(F300), 360
Reference Object Registration Command 2 Execution
(F300), 361
TXD(––) instruction, 34, 102, 104
Host Link, 36
Reset (F200/300), 364
Scene Switching (Arbitrary), 365
Scene Switching (Decrease by 1), 364
Scene Switching (Increase by 1), 364
V
Scene Switching and Positioning (F350), 362
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader, 63
connections, 307
protocols, sequences, 305–316
Serial Communications Boards
error information, 121
installation, 14
replacement, 132
specifications, 8
V600/V620 ID Controller, 63
connections, 369
protocols, sequences, 367–402
Visual Inspection System
connections, 351
protocols, sequences, 349–366
serial communications modes
1:1 Data Link, 3, 4, 6, 108
1:1 NT Link, 3, 4, 7
1:N NT Link, 3, 4, 7
Host Link, 3, 4, 5, 34
no-protocol, 2, 3, 4, 6, 98
NT Link, 114
Visual Inspection Units, 63
W
protocol macro, 3, 4, 5, 58
setting, 29
weight, 8
settings
wiring, 17
connectors, 23
precautions, 18
RS-232C ports, 20
RS-422A/485 ports, 21
See also PC Setup
flags and control bits, 27
switches, 13
soldering, 25
417
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W365-E1-1
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
Revised content
1
September 1999
Original production
419
|